Home

StarOffice 6.0 User`s Manual English

Contents

1. Long term Goal 2 p 3 State the intended goal il AS One way to create a completely new presentation is in the Outline View mode All slide titles will appear in a list along with the headings and sub topics The hier archy of the headings as well as the sequence of the slides can be easily modified 1 The preview window should have opened if not you can show it by choosing View Preview The Preview window enables you to view the slide layout including text background and background objects You can dock the Preview window at the window border if you press the Ctrl key and drag the window to the position you choose 2 In addition open the Stylist either by choosing Format Stylist or with the F11 key 3 The cursor is now blinking next to the small icon for slide 1 Enter the desired text for example First Page This will be the title for slide 1 4 If you press the Enter key you will see in the next line of the Outline view a small icon for slide 2 Enter a title for the second slide for example Second Page Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 299 5 Press the Enter key again You can now enter the next text in the next line which begins with a small icon for slide 3 where you would enter the title for slide 3 but in this example slide 2 should get a subtitle 6 Now press the Tab key before you enter any text By doing that you ensure that
2. Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl Alt ShifttArrow Keys Like Alt but only the active cell is modified Alt Ins 3 seconds in Insert mode Arrow Keys insert row column Ctrl Arrow Keys insert cell Alt Del 3 seconds in Delete mode Arrow keys delete row column Ctrl Arrow keys merge cell with neighboring cell Ctrl Shift T Removes cell protection from all selected tables If the cursor is anywhere in the document i e if a table has not been selected then cell protection is removed from all tables Shift Ctrl Del If nothing is selected the contents of the next cell are deleted If cells are selected the whole line of the selection will be deleted If all rows are selected completely or partially the entire table is deleted Moving and Resizing Frames Graphics and Objects Shortcut Keys Effect Alt Arrow Keys Move object Alt Ctrl Arrow Keys Resizes by moving lower right corner Alt Ctrl Shift Arrow Keys Resizes by moving top left corner 430 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets This section contains the shortcut keys specifically for use in spreadsheets Moreover the general shortcut keys in StarOffice also apply The shortcut keys Alt Enter are used in spreadsheets to fill selected ranges with the content of the cell currently active Select a range in the spreadsheet enter a value or formula and conclude it by using these shortcut keys The entire range
3. 4 y 3 Layer View u 4 Navigation Arranging Slides Switch to the Slide View by clicking the respective icon above the vertical scroll bar located at the right of your screen Now you can rearrange the position of individual slides and define effects for the transition between slides In the slide view change the sequence of the slides by dragging them to any other position in the presentation When you long click a slide in the slide view you can copy the slide using drag and drop while pressing the Ctrl key The mouse pointer will have a small plus sign next to it while you drag to indicate a copy You can also drag and drop between the slide views of StarOffice Impress documents If you call up the context menu of a selected slide you will see the Show Hide Slide command You can use this command to temporarily remove the current slide from your presentation without deleting it from the actual document A slide that is not shown in the presentation receives a name highlighted in gray Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 295 Incorporating Slide Show Effects In the Slide View mode you can define transition effects to precede the display of each slide 1 Click on the second slide once to select it 2 On the object bar under Transition select Automatic and enter the desired display time for the first slide for example 00 01 00 That means that the second slide will be displ
4. The top two rows of the sheet should not be printed on pages 1 and 3 but should be the topmost rows on print pages 2 and 4 The first column A should not be printed on pages 1 and 2 but should be on pages 3 and 4 1 Choose Format Print ranges Edit You will see the Edit print ranges dialog 2 Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet 3 Select the first two rows and for example click cell A1 and drag to A2 In the shrunk dialog you will see 1 2 Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat 4 Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area The dialog is restored again 5 If you also want column A as a column to repeat click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area 6 Click column A not in the column header 7 Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this via Format Page Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 263 Saving and Opening Sheets in HTML Saving Sheets in HTML StarOffice Calc saves all the sheets of a Calc document together as an HTML docu ment At the start of the HTML document a heading and a list of hyperlinks are automatically added which lead to the individual sheets within the document Numbers are shown as written In addition i
5. If you click the More button on the Header tab you can choose additional settings for the border and background of a header Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 163 Border Background Borders Background Line arrangement m Une Spacing to contents Left o o0cm Right Jo 00cm 4 00 pt Top o 00em H E A z 9 00 pt Bottom o o 2 60 pt W Synchronize __ 3 00 pt E oL Black Shadow style Position ojo io E E Dietance Jo Ecm Color Oo Gray a 1 00 pt O pt Cancel Help Reset Draw a line under the header by going to the Borders tab Under Line arrange ment click between the two lower angle marks at the bottom of the rectangle You can also use this tab page to define the style of the line and the distance between the header text and the line Footnotes and Endnotes You can display footnotes in a text document at the bottom of a page or column if you are using more than one column or at the end of a document The settings are defined by choosing Tools Footnotes The following information is also valid for endnotes Endnotes are footnotes that appear collectively at the end of a document instead of at the foot of each page 164 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Footnote Settings a Per oomen Z Fotnote E Footnote Characters kd You can jump from a footnote anchor in the document to the footnote
6. Modify specific basic requirements in the table and you will see the new result You can give a name to the scenario created in this manner and compare it with other scenarios Using Ready Made Scenarios We have provided a ready made example of scenarios for you to work with 1 Choose File New Templates and Documents and from the dialog open the Samples 2 Open the spreadsheet examples Now you see the spreadsheet documents that come with the program 3 Double click the document with Recar in the name What you see is a sample spreadsheet in which several scenarios have been created Areas in which the scenarios that differ by initial values are located are surrounded by frames Select the appropriate scenario in the list box appearing at the top of every frame Scenarios can also be selected in the Navigator 1 Open the Navigator with the F5 key or the Navigator icon on the function bar 2 Click the Scenarios icon in the Navigator the icon with the question and excla mation marks In the Navigator you see the defined scenarios with the comments that were entered when the scenarios were created Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 257 Creating Your Own Scenarios To create a scenario select all the cells that provide the data for the scenario In our example you can create an additional scenario called High Dollar Rate for example Do the following 1 Select the cells that are already highl
7. 1 530 000 00 i 250 000 00 150 000 00 689 000 00 200 000 00 1 289 000 00 30 Total Result ss 600 000 00 370 000 00 1 694 000 00 520 000 00 3 184 000 00 EE a2 246 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 What do you need the DataPilot for A table that has been created with the DataPilot is an interactive table i e data can be arranged rearranged or summarized according to different points of view This functionality is especially useful for Sales Controlling On the one hand it may be important to view the turnover figures at regular intervals on the other it may be relevant to analyze sales figures on a regional basis Creating DataPilot Tables 1 Select the data range of a table together with the row and column headings 2 Choose Data DataPilot Start The dialog Select Source appears Select the option Current selection and confirm with OK The column headings of the table will be shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog which can then be posi tioned via drag and drop as required in the layout areas Column Row and Data 3 Drag the required fields into one of the three areas The field will be dropped accordingly DataPilot Layout a cancel Ss Drag the fields from the right into the desired position More gt gt If the button is dropped in the Data area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used in the data range to create
8. Exceptions Options Custom Quotes Word Completion lt a 5 Correct Tyo IMitial CApitals Capitalize first letter of every sentence Automatic bold and underline _ URL Recognition Replace 18t with 1 st Replace 1 2 with Y Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete blanks and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Apply numbering symbol a KAKKAR lt LIBRIS BISISIBISIRIBISI EE Apply border Create table Apply Styles LI Remove Blank paragraphs Replace Custom styles M Replace while modifying existing text Edit Z M Auto Format AutoCorrect while typing Cancel Help Reset Note the functions in the illustrated dialog A detailed explanation of each function is given in StarOffice Help In addition to the functions shown here you can also select Custom Quotes This means that all quotation marks that you enter as a simple computer character with Shift 2 are automatically turned into correct typographer s quotes You yourself can choose the characters to be used for this purpose Turning off URL Recognition by AutoCorrect When you enter text StarOffice automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink StarOffice formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes color and underline the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles If you do not want StarOf
9. There are various ways of loading or opening documents For example you can use the Open dialog and the Templates and Documents dialog Opening Documents ss To open an existing document that was saved on the hard drive or ona disk you have several possibilities You can either choose File Open click the Open File icon on the function bar or use the Ctrl O shortcut keys Now you see the Open dialog Under Windows a system dialog is automatically displayed when opening and saving StarOffice documents Choose Tools Options StarOffice General and mark Use StarOffice dialogs Then you will see the StarOffice dialogs shown in this guide Fwottice60 01 user Date modified autocorr Folder 13 12 2001 15 441 J autotext Folder 20 12 2001 11 19 backup Folder 20 12 2001 11 173 basic Folder 20 12 2001 14 01 config Folder 2041272001 1401 2 J database Folder 2041272001 11 173 end ce oe File name l Open WErSion ka E File type fan files C amp Help E Read only Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 31 This dialog is described in detail in the StarOffice Help However here are a few tips You can change the size of the dialog by dragging the borders of the dialog with your mouse x Click the Default Directory icon to go straight to your work directory To define your work directory choose Tools Options StarOffice Paths You can long click or short click the Up One Level
10. User Defined IV Protected against manual changes Heading t t This is the content from chapter 1 1 This is the entey foo the table of contends Create index table for i v Heading t 2 Entire document This is the content Grom chapter 1 2 This key wordis a main etry Create from Styles Tables IT Text frames IV Index marks l Graphics OLE objects mans eaees J Use level from source chapter Cancel Help Reset y Preview 4 Mark Styles and after clicking the button choose one of the Styles used in the document to generate the index from all those paragraphs having the corre sponding Style 5 Mark the other check boxes under Create from if you want to create the index from all the objects of a certain type 6 Enter a fitting title into the Title field for the index you can alter the title directly in the document but it will be overwritten when the index is updated The names of the objects will appear in the index You can assign names to the objects on the Options tab of the corresponding property dialog Creating Bibliographies A bibliography entry could be shown in the text as follows Smith Smith 1995 has also carried out research on this matter The reader will then know that more detailed information can be found in the bibliography under Smith 1995 for example the full name of the author title of the book publisher etc You can decide which details should appear in the bibliography by going
11. mere SSS mea ooo mses O O 5 Enter Title Page and press the Enter key You can change the properties of the new Page Styles later 6 Inthe context menu of the Stylist click the New command again and define the Page Style with the name Table of contents 7 Repeat the whole procedure again for the new Main text Page Style Of course the names used here are only meant as examples In a real situation you would naturally enter the names of your choice You have now created the three new Styles 88 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Applying Page Styles 1 Place the cursor on the first page of your document Double click the Title page entry in the Stylist So now you have assigned the first page this Page Style To confirm this you will see the name Title page in the Page Style field on the status bar below By the way you can also edit double click and assign existing Page Styles via the context menu of the Page Style field on the status bar If however you now scroll through the pages of your document you may notice that the Title page Page Style has been applied to every page If all the pages had been defined by the Standard Page Style they are now all defined by the new Style Page Styles always apply to all preceding as well as following pages unless a page break occurs with a change of Page Style On the Organizer tab page if you enter a Next Style for a Page Style this means that after
12. 2 Choose Presentation Show Hide Slide again when you want to have the slide shown again A more elegant way to keep individual slides hidden in certain presentations can be found under Presentation Custom Slide Shows 302 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 os EEE 1 amp JE Blue Custom Slide Show he 24 pma E Define Custom Slide Show Mew Custom Slide Show Welcome Overview Contribution Margins Inthe Custom Slide Shows dialog click the New button The Define Custom Slide Show dialog appears In this dialog enter a name for your presentation On the left you can see a list of the existing slides Select a slide you want to show in your custom slide show and click the button with the arrows pointing to the right The slide will be inserted in the right field All slides listed on the right will be shown in the custom slide show You can rearrange the order of your slides in the right field via Drag amp Drop Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 303 Exporting Printing and Presenting There are many possible ways of outputting finished presentation documents You can create finished presentations or print the pages in color you can have high resolution transparencies produced or transfer them wholly or partially to other applications and then use them within those applications When printing you can also choose whether to output your document directly to
13. 4 Choose Set as default template That is all you have to do The next time you open a new text document the new document will correspond to the template you selected 410 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Resetting Default Templates To reset the modified text template to the original default template proceed as follows 1 Choose File Templates Organize 2 Open the context menu and choose Reset default template In the submenu select the document type whose default setting you want to restore Thereafter when you open an empty text document it will again correspond to the StarOffice default template for text documents Using Custom Templates There are several ways to make your work easier by using your own custom templates One of the most important is quick access to the templates You can store your templates in different locations in StarOffice Opening a new document with one of your templates will then differ accordingly Templates in the Template Folder You can save a new template via File Templates Save or select the Template file type in the normal Save dialog If you save the template in the staroffice6 0 user template directory you can access this template anytime by selecting it in the New dialog File New From Templates and Documents When you open the template a new document will be created based on that template You may need to update the view of the templates in the dialog bef
14. Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer Instructions for word processing in StarOffice Writer Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc Instructions for the use of spreadsheets in StarOffice Calc Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress Instructions for presentations in StarOffice Impress Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw Instructions for drawing in StarOffice Draw Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice Instructions for working with data sources the gallery and copying between different program modules In Appendix you will find other information and at the end of the manual is an alphabetical index 20 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Icons and Conventions There are three icons used to call your attention to additional helpful information The Important icon points out important information regarding data and system security The Note icon points out extra information for example alternative ways to reach a certain goal The Tip icon points out tips for working with the program in a more efficient manner The names of menu commands icons dialogs and other control elements of StarOffice are hereafter printed in bold To delineate the steps for opening dialogs a special shorthand is used For example when you read choose Tools Options StarOffice User Data this means that you first choose the Tools menu on the me
15. Date T gt fo 03 2000 Cancel AMO Y amount kai p 100 fies h p none 2 0 H More gt o a o e o mer If you click OK you will now only see the records that meet all criteria Choose Data Filter Remove Filter to reset the view To display only records with a specific content you can easily do this with the aid of the AutoFilter 1 Place the cursor in the database range 2 Click on the AutoFilter icon on the main toolbar The column headers of the database range have now been given small buttons 3 Click on the button next to the Date field and select for example 1 2 00 Only records that contain this date will be shown On the main toolbar reset the view with the AutoFilter icon 240 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals If you want to expand the sample data and actually use it for a budget you will also want to summarize and print the data in totals and subtotals This can be done in just a few steps 1 Place the cursor in the database range 2 Choose Data Subtotals The Subtotals dialog appears 3 Specify the desired options for calculating the subtotals Group subtotals according to Date i e calculates a new subtotal for each date and use the function Sum adds the subtotals to calculate Amount Subtotals 1st Group 2nd Group 3rd Group Options Group by Date Calculate subtotals for Us
16. Shift Pos1 Go to the beginning of a line and select it End Go to end of line Shift End Go to end of line and select it Ctrl Pos1 Go to start of document Ctrl Shift Pos1 Go and select text to start of document Ctrl End Go to end of document Ctrl Shift End Go and select text to end of document CtrlPageUp Switch cursor between text and header Ctrl PageDown Switch cursor between text and footer Insrt Insert mode on off PageUp Screen page up Shift PageUp Move up screen page with selection PageDown Move down screen page Shift PageDown Move down screen page with selection Ctrl Del Delete text to end of word Ctrl Backspace Delete text to beginning of word Ctrl Shift Del Delete text to end of sentence Ctrl Shift Backspace Delete text to beginning of sentence Ctrl Tab Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion Ctrl Shift Tab Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Comple tion Alt W Spellchecker dialog Accept a word marked as unknown or incorrect in the given input row word Ctrl double mouse click Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navi gator Stylist or other windows 428 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Moving Paragraphs and Switching Heading Levels The numbering is automatically adjusted Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl ArrowUp Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph Ctrl ArrowDown Move the active paragraph or selected paragr
17. T 5 21 Help Add Smh Delete Currency Lavender Currency Turquoise M More gt Crau Let 216 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The preview shows an example of how each format you select in the Format field will look Click OK to apply the format to the selected range in the spreadsheet If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents then under Tools Options Spreadsheet View Show or in the View menu you may still have Highlight values marked In this case the specified colors will be used A format that you define yourself can be set as an AutoFormat 1 Format a spreadsheet to your liking 2 Select the whole sheet e g by clicking the empty button in the top left corner above the first row header 3 Call up the AutoFormat dialog and click Add A dialog will appear in which you give the new format a name The format defined in this way can then be used in the future on other spread sheets By choosing an appropriate background color and a pattern for the cells in the sheet you can create an appealing spreadsheet Use the More button to display additional options in the dialog In the additional section that is then displayed you can choose which properties of the chosen format are to be excluded from the automatic formatting For example if you remove the checkmark in front of Font the font will not be taken into account by the AutoFormat Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With
18. Ticker Symbol This is the unique stock identification code Quantity Current number of shares Each Purchased at This contains the average purchase price per share taking into account the commission that was paid Example You purchase 10 shares at 10 dollars each and pay a commission of 20 dollars The purchase price of the shares without commis sion is thus 100 dollars 10 shares 10 dollars But the price you actually paid for the shares taking into consideration the commission is 120 dollars 10 shares 10 dollars 20 dollars If you divide this figure by the number of shares purchased you will find that the price you paid per share was 12 dollars Current Price This is the only column in which you should make a setting on this tab Enter the current price of the stock here Buying Price This tells you the total cost for buying the current holdings taking into consideration the commission paid Selling Value In this column you have the possible profit from selling at the current stock price market value less commissions Potential Profit This displays the possible profit or loss if sold at the current amount market price taking into account the commission as an amount and the change as a percentage Profits Realized In this column you can see profits hopefully already realized from previous sales and dividends paid With Help Tips turned on move the mouse pointer over the heade
19. Categories Fath Alda Save links relative to O File system D Internet W Show preview 2 When you enter a word in the text that exists as an AutoText name after the third matching letter is typed a Help tip will appear containing the whole name of the AutoText 3 Press Enter to insert the AutoText If you see a Help tip containing several AutoText names that begin the same way use Ctrl Tab to scroll forwards and Shift Ctrl Tab to scroll backwards through the AutoText names Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 105 Exceptions in AutoCorrect If AutoCorrect corrects a word you have entered and if you do not want this correction you can restore the word using the Undo function This word will also be placed in the list of exceptions in AutoCorrect if AutoInclude is marked in the AutoCorrect dialog By default it is marked Example By default AutoCorrect automatically corrects two capitals at the start of a word But in the case of product names and the like you might actually want two initial capitals Suppose you have a new product called ESt AutoCorrect will automatically change this to Est Press Ctrl Z This will undo the automatic replacement and the word ESt is automatically included in the list of exceptions in the AutoCorrect Dialog See also the functions for automatic numbering of headings starting on page 126 106 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2
20. Click Insert Table and keeping the mouse button pressed drag to select the desired amount of rows and columns When you release the mouse button a table with the selected rows and columns will appear in your document Formatting Tables in Text Documents A new table inserted into a text document will be pre formatted The first row will have the Paragraph Style Table Heading and all other rows will have the Table Contents Style Text entered in the first row will automatically be bold and centered The following describes various formatting options that determine the overall appearance of a table With tables in text documents the first thing to note is that not all cells have to be sized according to the general grid of rows and columns You can easily merge neighboring cells into a single cell or split individual cells horizontally or verti cally The relevant icons called Merge Cells and Split Cells can be found on the table object bar This gives you great flexibility in formatting the table In the Table Format dialog you can decide on formatting attributes for a table Open this dialog either with the menu command Format Table or the Table command in the context menu Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 141 If you want to change the table background for example proceed as follows 1 Select the cells to which you want to assign a background color 2 Now either choose Format Table or click
21. Editing Saving Bitmaps Inserting Bitmaps A bitmap image can be inserted in StarOffice Writer StarOffice Calc StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress documents 1 Choose Insert Graphics From File In StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress choose Insert Graphic 2 Select the file With the File type field you can limit the selection to certain file types 3 Check the Link box if you want a link to the original file If the Link box is marked whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded and the editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re applied and the image is displayed If the Link box is not checked you are always working with the copy created with the first insertion 4 Click Open to insert the image Editing Bitmaps When you select the bitmap image the object bar offers you the tools for editing the image Only a local copy is edited in the document even if you have inserted an image as a link The object bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using The illustration shows the object bar in StarOffice Draw ae Default Als 4 Pps 4 Pps 4 ps SB Cp 4 fin 4 sp A A number of filters are located on the Filter floating toolbar that you SE can open with the icon on the far left of the object bar Some of the filters open once a dialog is started and you can use these for example to select the in
22. Further Information 363 Logo 366 Designing 3D Objects From Font Characters 367 Further Information 368 Contents 15 Construction Drawing 369 Creating a Construction Plan 370 Further Information 372 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 373 Data Sources in StarOffice 373 Registering an Address Book 375 Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format 379 Table Design 380 Form Design 382 Searching in Tables and Form Documents 382 Searching With a Form Filter 383 Copying and Moving Data Using Drag and Drop 387 Dragging and Dropping Within a StarOffice Document 387 Inserting Objects From the Gallery 388 Copying Graphics From the Gallery 390 Inserting Graphics From a Document in the Gallery 390 Copying Graphics Between Documents 391 Copying Draw Objects into Other Documents 391 Drag and Drop With the Data Source View 392 Copying Sheet Areas to Text Documents 394 Inserting Data From Spreadsheets 394 Inserting Data From Text Documents 395 Revision Marking Function 396 Recording and Displaying Changes 396 Accepting or Rejecting Changes 396 Comparing Versions of a Document 398 Merging Versions 398 Recording Changes 399 Protecting Records 400 Version Management 400 16 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide Modifying and Customizing the User Interface of StarOffice 401 Configuring StarOffice 401 Configuring the Keyboard 401 Configuring Menus 402 Changing Toolbars 403 Inserting Moving and Deleting Icons on Toolbars 404 Sending Faxes an
23. HTML page open the Navigator tells you at a glance which hyperlinks the page contains Any hidden hyperlinks will be shown as well without reference text The Content View in the Navigator helps you organize and rearrange whole chap ters with their sub chapters provided you have formatted them with the Styles defined for the chapter numbering For detailed instructions refer to the StarOffice Help Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 117 Indexes and Tables of Contents in StarOffice Writer In your StarOffice Writer documents you can have any number of predefined or user defined indexes For example you can have a table of contents alphabetical index illustration index or bibliography Defining Index Table of Contents Entries Before creating an index or table of contents determine which entries in your document you want included For entries in the table of contents the simplest method is Assign the Paragraph Styles Heading 1 to Heading 10 to your head ings according to the hierarchical level The table of contents can then be created automatically You can also add paragraphs formatted with other Paragraph Styles to the table of contents see Creating a Table of Contents First define entries for other indexes as entries in the document 1 Select the word or words in your document which are to be listed in the index Several words can be selected by holding down the Shift key if they are listed
24. March 2002 If you want to automatically transfer only specific records from a large database into the spreadsheet you can also use the filters in the data source browser 1 Place the cursor in the data field which contains the data that should be the same in all filtered records For example to filter only records that have Main Street in their address place the cursor in a field containing Main Street Click the AutoFilter icon Now you only see the records containing the precise text Main Street Select the Main Street records for example using the Shift key as described above drag the selected records into the spreadsheet document and release the mouse button at the point where the first field to be inserted should appear Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 245 Evaluating Data With StarOffice Calc StarOffice Calc provides you with several powerful tools for evaluating data The DataPilot allows you to produce any kind of sub evaluation of your data as a sepa rate spreadsheet You can analyze your data thoroughly via consolidation Goal Seek and multiple operations DataPilot The DataPilot allows you to analyze and assess data that has already been entered It allows you from one and the same value to generate reports as a function of the point of view that is most prominent Imagine a data analysis table containing your company s sales figures not only for specific product groups but also
25. The cross fading function is only available for drawings in StarOffice Draw and not in StarOffice Impress documents To insert into a presentation an object that was created by cross fading two objects copy it from the drawing into the presen tation document by way of the clipboard In the process of cross fading a transition between two objects is calculated and the increments will be positioned on the page In the increments the form orientation and color of the objects as well as other attributes are adjusted uniformly 1 For example in an empty drawing document draw an object at the bottom left and another one at the upper right use two different colors 2 Select both objects 3 Choose the command Edit Cross fading A dialog appears where you can define further settings 4 Click OK StarOffice Draw calculates the increments and displays the results This new object is a group which consists of the specified number of indi vidual objects You can enter the group press F3 to edit the individual objects The Modify menu in StarOffice Draw contains all the necessary commands for working with groups and these func tions can be also found in StarOffice Impress under the Format Group menu command or in the context menu os d Further information can be found in the mO n a StarOffice Help Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 345 Working With a Group of Objects Several objects at one time can b
26. This floating toolbar contains the basic functions to edit a form You will find again many of these functions in the object bar if you select a form element in the document If you click a form element in the editing mode Object bar Format menu commands and context menus offer context sensitive editing functions In the form design you can Include controls Apply properties to them define Form properties and Define subforms m Here the Form Navigator that you open on the object bar or the floating toolbar is a useful tool EJ With the command Open in Design Mode you can save a form document so that it always opens in editing mode If you receive an error when assigning the properties for the objects contained in the form for example when assigning a non existent database table to an object you ll see a corresponding error message This error message can have an More button If you click More you ll see then a dialog displaying clear information warnings and errors about the current problem Searching in Tables and Form Documents a In spreadsheets and documents in which form functions are used you can click the Find Record icon to open a dialog to find any text and values Use the icon at the bottom of the form bar not the similar looking icon on the main toolbar on the left You can search in all data records or in all data fields You can select whether the text must be at the beginning end or any location of the data fiel
27. X CHEREN FESERENS FERGE FENE EENET E5 Doo o o oms ooo as bieri befaat O OOOO O 326 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Toolbars and Windows in StarOffice Draw 4 Zoom floating toolbar 3 Effects floating toolbar 2 Text floating toolbar 10 Alignment floating toolbar 3 Rectangles floating toolbar 1 Arrange floating toolbar 4 Ellipses floating toolbar 12 Insert floating toolbar 5 3D Objects floating toolbar 13 Navigator window 6 Curves floating toolbar 14 Stylist window 7 Lines floating toolbar 15 Option bar 8 Connectors floating toolbar 16 Color bar Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses Entering Text The drawing module in StarOffice StarOffice Draw has many functions for creating and editing vector graphics In this section we introduce the most commonly used functions Further information can be found in the StarOffice Help Open a new drawing document by choosing File New Drawing In addition to the blank drawing page you will see the main toolbar on the left and the object bar for drawings at the top of the work area With the View Tool bars command you can also display the option bar at the bottom edge of the window If you use these instructions to create a presentation document instead of a new drawing document you will notice one of the visible differences between StarOffice Impress and StarOffice Draw The buttons at the top right above the scroll bar only
28. increase the spacing to make the heading wider Close the dialog with OK 3 You have now additionally used direct formatting on one of the headings formatted with the Style Head1 All direct and Style formatting should now be added to the Head1 Paragraph Style This Style is still selected in the Stylist 4 FE At the top of the Stylist click the Update Style icon All headings formatted with Head1 will be automatically reformatted with the modified Style When creating a new Style you can also make it adapt to any changes automati cally In the properties dialog for the Style click the Organizer tab and mark Auto Update Now if you change the formatting of say a paragraph formatted with this Style the formatting of all other paragraphs with the same Style will be auto matically changed as well Page Styles and Page Numbers You want to create a text document without a page number on the title page with lowercase or uppercase roman numerals on the pages of the table of contents you do not know how many yet and then you want to start the page numbering with arabic numerals Different Page Styles are the StarOffice Writer equivalent of section changes in other text programs It is best to have page numbers in footers or headers rather than in the running text to make sure that the page numbers do not change their position when text is inserted or deleted You can do this for example by following these steps 1 Cr
29. you can display employee information simply by entering a letter This enables you for example to instantly find out if a particular employee is present sick or on vacation First you must open the Stylist click the icon in the Function bar and create three Cell Styles For the Cell Styles choose names that correspond to the information you want to represent In this case you could choose Sick Vacation and Present Click in the Stylist and open the context menu where you then click the New command to activate the Cell Style dialog On the Organize tab enter the word Sick and assign a background color to the Cell Style by way of the Background tab page Click OK and repeat this process for the two remaining Cell Styles Now select with the mouse the range to which you want the conditional format ting to apply Choose Format Conditional Formatting to open the Conditional Formatting dialog 278 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 t For Condition 1 define Cell value equals s s sick In the Cell Style list box select the Style Sick The use of quotation marks is absolutely necessary to define conditions For Condition 2 define Cell value equals v v vacation In the Cell Style list box select the Style Vacation For Condition 3 define Cell value equals p p present In the Cell Style list box select the Style Present Conditional Formatting Ic I value i It ki irs ell va
30. 1 5 Press the Enter key to confirm or click Apply in the Formula bar The sum will appear in the last cell If you change the numbers in the table the sum will automatically be updated If for example you want to format the numbers as currency select the cells and choose Number Format from the context menu The Number Format dialog appears where you can choose a new format Merging and Splitting Cells You can select adjacent cells together then merge them into a single cell Conversely you can take a large cell that has been created by merging single cells and divide it back into individual cells The commands are different in StarOffice Writer and Calc Merging Cells in StarOffice Writer 1 Select the adjacent cells 2 Choose Format Cell Merge Splitting Cells in StarOffice Writer 1 Place the cursor in the cell to be split 2 Choose Format Cell Split A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells horizontally or verti cally Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 147 Merging Cells in StarOffice Calc 1 Select the adjacent cells 2 Choose Format Merge Cells Define Canceling the merging of cells in StarOffice Calc 1 Place the cursor in the cell to be split 2 Choose Format Merge Cells Remove Inserting or Deleting Rows Columns Using the Keyboard This is how to insert and delete rows and columns using the keyboard To insert anew column or r
31. 1 Go to the sheet you want to print 2 Choose Format Page The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit file icon on the function bar 3 Select the Page tab Select the Landscape paper format and click OK 4 Choose File Print You will see the Print dialog Depending on the printer driver and the operating system it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape there 5 In the Print dialog under Print range select the pages to be printed All All sheets will be printed Pages Enter the pages to be printed The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards If you see in the Page Break Preview that sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of sheet2 enter 5 6 here 262 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Selection Only the selection will be printed If cells are selected these are printed If no cells are selected all those sheets whose names at the bottom on the sheet tabs are selected will be printed By pressing Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection If under Format Print range you have defined one or more print ranges only the contents of these print ranges will be printed Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page You have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed on four pages The pages will be arranged as follows
32. 275 frames around paragraphs 69 around text 69 formatting 186 inserting for text 107 jumping tonext 115 labeling 152 linking 107 frame wraps 187 freeform lines aligning text with 114 function bar matching 404 function bars editing 408 G Gallery adding graphics 390 copying 390 inserting 388 geometric rows calculating 266 gimmicks 419 Globe 360 goalseek 252 eradients defining 357 eraphics changing paths 35 draganddrop 391 inserting 155 inserting as characters 155 inserting from Draw 155 inserting from Gallery 156 388 inserting via dialog 155 jumping tonext 115 scanning 156 grids printing 261 using 368 grouping database ranges 241 objects 346 groups displaying 347 entering 346 exiting 347 navigating 347 H handles of objects 328 handouts 314 hatching 357 headers changing 162 chapter information 160 inserting lines under 163 left right 159 printing on sheets 263 remarks 159 repeating in tables 148 Headers 184 heading levels switching 429 headings changing formats of 81 entering 80 numbering 128 own Paragraph Styles 128 Help using the 22 Index 449 Help Agent 24 Help text defining for cell input 258 hidden objects selecting 302 hidden paragraphs form letters 177 horizontal rulers inserting 158 HTML in sheet cells 228 sheets 264 HTML and text sections 78 HTML export of draw objects 112 hyperlinks automatic 48 formatting 48 in table of contents 124 hyphena
33. 440 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Index in table cells 203 3D charts 233 3D globe 360 3D objects generating 340 3D rotation objects generating 340 3D sheet references 214 3D text entering 334 A absolute addresses tables 220 absolute references tables 220 actions defining for incorrect input 258 address books registering 375 addresses absolute relative 220 cells 214 addressing automatic 223 by names 222 addressing cells in spreadsheets 220 aligning objects 330 alphabetical indexes creating 120 ambient light 233 anchoring objects 151 Anchoring Frames 187 anchors anchoring objects 151 animation 300 appending sheets 202 appendix 419 areas selecting 434 arithmetic rows calculating 266 arranging objects 330 arrows drawing intext 112 441 assistants auto functions 47 attributes searching for 55 AutoAbstract sending to presentations 395 AutoComplete 105 423 AutoCorrect exceptions 106 URL recognition 48 AutoFill 266 AutoFormat overview 47 sheets 218 tables 216 AutoHide windows 30 automatic addressing tables 223 automatic hyperlink formatting 48 automatic hyphenation 46 170 automatic spellcheck 44 101 169 automatic Styles 86 automatic text replacement 49 automatic URL recognition 48 AutoNumbering objects 152 AutoPilot presentation 288 AutoText as Help tip 105 innetworks 104 using 102 105 axes incharts 235 442 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide M
34. C Presentations Address Book Templates T Documents File You can use this dialog to copy the Styles contained in a particular template or in a particular document individually to another document Look at the illustration If you double click the name of a folder in the left window you will see below it all the templates contained in that folder Double clicking one of these files causes the two categories Styles and Configuration to appear Once again double click to open a list of the objects contained But in the case of a document you will only see the Styles that are actually used in that document If you drag and drop elements from one dialog page to the other you can see how the mouse pointer shows where you can drag the contents to Either the mouse pointer is a circle with a line through it in which case you cannot move the content to that place or the mouse pointer has an insert line that tells you the place where the content will be moved to when you release the mouse button Creating New Styles From Selections You can create a new Style by copying an existing Style as follows 1 Open the Stylist 2 In the document select a formatted text or paragraph the format of which you want to adopt as a Style 3 In the Stylist click the icon F New Style from Selection Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 97 A new Style from Selection can also be made by using dr
35. Cells can be addressed directly by means of their coordinates in the row and column matrix You can use absolute or relative referencing or you can give cell ranges their own names Addresses and References Absolute and Relative Relative Addressing The cell in column A row 1 is addressed as A1 You can address a range of adja cent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell For example the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1 B2 By addressing an area in this way you are making a relative reference to A1 B2 Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas Absolute Addressing Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference e g A 1 B 2 220 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 StarOffice can convert the current reference in which the cursor is positioned in the input line from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift F4 If you start with a relative address such as A1 the first time you press this key combination both row and column are set to absolute references A 1 The second time only the row A 1 and the third time only the column A1 If you press the key combination once more both column and row
36. Click the Maps theme The Gallery shows you the maps 6 Click the rectangular world map named worldmap2 wmf 7 Hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and drag the map of the world onto the sphere This lays the map of the world on the sphere as a texture 8 If the Gallery hides the globe you can fix the Gallery window so that it no T longer overlaps with the document At the edge of the Gallery window click the Stick Floating icon looks like a thumb tack The texture is laid onto the sphere in its original size in the default setting Since the map of the world is much larger than the sphere you see only a small segment as a green area on the sphere This will soon be changed 1 Click the sphere to select it 2 Display the context menu for the sphere and choose Area The Area dialog appears with the Area tab page Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 361 Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors bradients Hatching Bitmaps Fill f Nore Hatching te ag C Gradient Bitmap 1 A WG Bitmap 2 P aiaiel tele fiom Oe Bitmap 3 Sess Bitmap 4 Relative Height 100m Posibiot I Feet os A l d a jox Tle W AutoFit Whiiset Row fl couma 0 Cancel Help Reset 3 Select the Bitmap field removing the mark in the Tile field Close the dialog with OK Now you can see the world map as texture on the sphere StarOffice has automati cally selected the most
37. Drop cannot only be used within a text box but also from and to the outside The Ctrl Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time the text will then have the status it had before the first change StarOffice has a very useful AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and combo boxes For example enter C into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C drive or the equivalent for other operating systems Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL Once you find the program document or directory you want press Enter Chapter 8 Appendix 423 List of General Shortcut Keys in StarOffice The shortcut keys that you can use instead of the menu commands are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command Shortcut Keys Effect Enter key Activates the focused button in a dialog Esc Terminates the action or dialog If in StarOffice Help goes up one level The cursor is positioned in the URL on the Function bar returns the cursor to the document If the URL has been selected you have to press the key twice Spacebar Toggles the focused check box in a dialog Cursor keys Changes
38. Frame icon Ol Draw a frame around the pixel image and enter some text inside this frame 6 You can select this text and assign another color to it The background of the text is automatically transparent 7 Select the pixel image and the text by for example drawing a frame around both On the Status bar you will read 2 draw objects selected 8 Choose File Export and in the Export dialog select the file type JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group and enter a name Mark the Selection check box to export only the selected objects 9 Click Save In another dialog you can now set the options to define the quality of the JPG image Remember that the higher the quality the larger will the file be If you select a graphic object for example an inserted Pixel image in StarOffice Impress or StarOffice Draw you will automatically see the graphic object bar This bar enables you to modify the color tone brightness and contrast of your graphic object You can also change the transparency value of graphic objects At a higher trans parency value the graphic object becomes see through and you can discern objects lying behind it When you save your work as a StarOffice document the transpar ency is saved too When you export it into a graphic format it is only saved if the graphic format supports the transparency and you enable this function at the time of export 350 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting
39. Initials Character Styles Font Font Size Language Frame Styles Position Anchoring Borders Page Styles Header Footer Margins Columns Numbering Styles Numbering Type Outline Bullets Assigning Numbering Styles Hierarchical Styles The Styles can be hierarchically linked to each other You can derive one defined Style from another so that the new Style contains only the changes not found in the basic Style If you decide to change the basic Style later on the text in the deduced Style will also be changed accordingly For example the Paragraph Style text body uses the font Times in 12 point Derived from this Style you have created a Style called indented text in which you only added a left indent but the font and size stay the same If at some point in time you decide to change the font in text body the font will automatically change in the indented text Style Sticking with this example if you redefined the left indentation in the text body it would have no effect on the paragraphs formatted with indented text because in the hierarchy the more closely associated format always has priority Numbering Styles Using the corresponding icons from the object bar you can easily assign bulleting and numbering to your text document As with the icons for bold italic etc you assign direct formatting which is not already determined by the Style When working with Styles the Stylist o
40. New St Boton MA rrr 7 33 111 222 P StarOffice provides a sample document of an organization chart The Organiza tion Chart can be found in the folder Samples Presentations The following example can be adapted for your daily use 316 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating Company Organization Charts First open the sample document Company Organization Chart Choose File New Templates and Documents Samples icon then the Presentations folder These flowcharts provide a fairly detailed overview of the structure of a sample company You can adapt this structure to match the organization of your own company Delete the company name in the document background switch to master view on the horizontal scroll bar and replace it with your own company s name Change the sample address at the bottom of the page as well Now click in the various frames of the organization chart select the contents and overwrite them with your own text Interaction OK Action at mouse click Go to page or abject Cancel Target C Departments Help L Departments Motes C Management L Management Notes L sales C Sales Notes A Purchasina xl Adi Slide Object Handouts Eind Edit Jump Targets In the bottom corners are areas for which you can define an interaction To edit or view the interaction click again in background mode on the area while pressing the Alt key and open the context menu wh
41. P linked areas B Graphics OLE objects A Notes D 2 a ae E E EHETE E ETEHEEE E ETEEN E OTEREN S888 E Insert Cells 1 63 aaa Insert Object x Py ou eo o Draw Functions K Form Functions OJ MM A T d ar EAG Toolbars and Windows in StarOffice Calc Insert floating toolbar 6 Borders floating toolbar Insert Cells floating toolbar T Background floating toolbar Insert Object floating toolbar 8 Navigator window Draw Functions floating toolbar 3 Stylist window Form Functions floating toolbar Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 199 Structure of a Spreadsheet A spreadsheet is made up of individual sheets Each sheet contains various cells arranged in rows and columns Each cell can contain either an arithmetic formula or a text or value of virtually any length A calculation can be entered directly as a mathematical formula e g 4 5 But the main reason for using a spreadsheet is that its formulas can refer to other cells An example of such a mathematical formula might be SUM A1 A8 This calcu lates the sum of the values in cells A1 through A8 and enters the result in the cell containing the formula Additional formulas may also be entered in cells Al through A8 each referring to other cells and their contents and so
42. Reduced Printing of Documents 41 Printing in Black and White 41 Printing Brochures 43 Spellcheck 44 Automatic Spellcheck 44 Checking Multilingual Texts 45 Starting the Spellcheck 46 Excluding Text From the Spellcheck 46 Using Automatic Functions 47 Using AutoCorrect and AutoFormat 47 Creating a Letter Template With the AutoPilot 51 Find amp Replace 52 Finding a Word in Text 52 Searching for Whole Words Only 54 Match Case 54 Searching for Text With Wildcards 54 Searching Backward 55 Current Selection Only 55 Searching for Styles 55 Searching for Attributes 55 Searching for Special Formats 56 The Similarity Search 56 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 57 The StarOffice Writer Functions 57 The StarOffice Writer Window 60 Entering and Formatting Text 61 Entering New Text 61 Inserting Text 62 Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode 62 Entering Text Anywhere ona Page 63 6 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide Selecting and Deleting Text 63 Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard 65 Inserting Special Characters 66 Inserting Protected Spaces Hyphens and Conditional Separators 66 Emphasizing Text 67 Changing the Color of Text 68 Rotating Text 68 Defining Borders 69 Making Text Superscript and Subscript 72 Writing in Uppercase or Lowercase 73 Moving Text Sections in Documents 74 Resetting Font Attributes While Typing 74 Chapters in Navigator 75 Quick Formatting Using the Adjacent Paragraph Form
43. Spellcheck Ctrl F7 Thesaurus F8 Edit points Ctrl Shift F8 Fit text to frame F11 Stylist F12 Outline View Ctrl Drawing View Shortcut Keys During Presentation Show Shortcut Keys Effect Esc End presentation Spacebar Next animated object or next slide Enter Next slide nn x Enter Slide transition to slide number nn Arrow Left Slide transition to previous slide Arrow Right Slide transition to next slide Pos 1 Slide transition to first slide End Slide transition to last slide PageUp Switch to previous page PageDown Switch to next page F5 Run Navigator Chapter 8 Appendix 435 Shortcut Keys in the Drawing View Shortcut Keys Effect PageUp Switch to previous page PageDown Switch to next page Key Zoom in Key Zoom out x Key number pad Zoom in current selection Key number pad Zoom on whole page Shift Ctrl G Group Grouping Shift Ctrl Alt A Ungroup Shift left mouse button Group by pressing Shift until you have finished selecting the objects with mouse clicks Ctrl left mouse button Edit group i e select individual objects of a group for editing by mouse click Shift Ctrl K Combination Shift Ctrl K Split Shift Ctrl Bring to front Shift Ctrl Bring forward Shift Ctrl Send backward Shift Ctrl Send to back 436 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys Specific to Prese
44. StarOffice Calc 217 Layout of Spreadsheets Your sheets do not have to have the look we have defined There are many ways you can apply a different layout for spreadsheets as well as tables in text docu ments Designing Spreadsheets Clearly StarOffice helps you design your sheet in a variety of ways For example here are three different views of the same sheet varying only in layout EA Sales 2001 september October November oa New York 1234 2398 4325 Landon 1024 512 256 a Auckland 999 558 777 Berlin 1233 2397 4324 Total 4490 6195 9682 september October November 1 234 00 2 398 00 1 024 00 512 00 999 00 888 00 1 233 00 2 397 00 4 490 00 6 195 00 If you simply format the sheet with one of the AutoFormats it will look appealing without requiring any further editing on your part 218 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Sales 2007 september October November 1 234 00 2 398 00 1024 00 512 00 999 00 888 00 1 233 00 2 397 00 4 490 00 6 195 00 Here the example sheet has been formatted with certain cell attributes in the Format Cells dialog In addition the view of the gridlines and sheet headers has been deactivated in Tools Options Spreadsheet View and a graphics file loaded as background in Format Page Background An image that you load via Format Page Background is only visible in print or via File Page View If you want to have a background image on
45. StarOffice Help If you only want to print the current sheet go to menu File Print In the Print dialog select the Selection option and click OK Only the current sheet will be printed If however you have selected a certain range of cells only those cells will be printed and done so only in the column width shown in the sheet If you want to simultaneously print various sheets for example Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 select both of them beforehand hold down the Ctrl key and click the sheet tabs The white tabs are the selected ones Now just go to the Print dialog and select the Selection option and only the selected sheets will be printed After having printed the desired sheets remember to click the sheet you are working on while holding down the Shift key so that only that sheet is selected If you don t do this all modifications you then make will apply to all sheets 214 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Formatting a Spreadsheet A spreadsheet is hardly ever used without formatting Cell contents such as texts and numbers are given certain formats and the cells themselves are formatted with different colors borders and other attributes You can either define the numbers format yourself or you can use one of the many predefined formats For cells a wide selection of cell Styles is provided and you can also define your own cell Styles in the same way you do text Styles You may want to give certain values in your spr
46. StarOffice Impress 287 Creating a Presentation With the AutoPilot 1 Choose File New Presentation AutoPilot Presentation Introducing a New Product d Type C Empty presentation introducing a New Produc From template C Open existing presentation Presentations T a Business Report Business Venture Company Finance Report E Introduci ing a New y Product Help Cancel lt Back Next gt gt _ Create The AutoPilot Presentation opens automatically The first page lets you start with an empty presentation a template or the last presentation opened If you click the From template option StarOffice Impress collects all existing presen tation templates and displays them in the list box 2 For the purposes of this example select the template Introducing a New Product and click Next 288 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 On page two of the AutoPilot dialog you can choose another Page Style if you want The selection of presentation layouts available to choose from are from the predefined template directories As on the first page of the AutoPilot all templates are displayed as Page Styles On this page however the default is Presentation Backgrounds AutoPilot Presentation Introducing a New Product Selecta slide desi eee Presentation Backgrounds Y Titk Select an output medium Original Screen i Overhead sheet C Slide W Preview i Pap
47. Text floating toolbar from the main toolbar If you have activated the Asian language support under Tools Options Language Settings Languages you will see additional icons for entering vertical text D Text 2 Fit Text to Frame 332 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Normal Text You can enter normal text by clicking the Text icon Drag open a delimiting frame in your document which sets the position and maximum width the text area should have If your text is long you can extend the frame in order to incorporate the whole text Of course you can later modify the position and the size of the frame using your mouse However you will not be able to make the frame smaller than the text itself Enter the text Select the text by holding down the Shift key while using the arrow keys or use the mouse You can now modify the font and font size as you would in regular text documents When you click the mouse on the document outside the text you leave the Text edit mode If you click the text once again the text will be selected as an object Now you can for example rotate or shift the entire text When you double click the text you can edit it again for example delete charac ters or set additional font attributes Fitting Text to Frames 1 2 With the Fit Text to Frame icon you can draw a delimiting frame which prede termines the position and size of the text Once having done so immediately enter your
48. Writer format in the list box File type When printing the master document all subdocuments texts and indexes will be printed You would like to know if a link exists for all subdocument Position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the corresponding entry The path information of the original document will appear in a small window If the file is no longer found under the original path the warning File not found is shown in red in addition to the path 134 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Importing Lists From Other Text Programs Every text program has its own way of internally organizing bulleted lists and numbering If the import filter of StarOffice fails to evaluate this information correctly this is what you should do 1 Import the document from the other application File Open and then the Files of type list box If the bullets are not applied correctly try saving the docu ment in the other application in RTF format and then import it 2 Select the string of characters which now appears at the start of each list and copy to the clipboard This can be for example an asterisk followed by a tab 3 Start the Find amp Replace dialog 4 Insert the content of the clipboard in the Search for field You can ensure that the search text is only found at the start of the paragraph by inserting before the search text and marking Regular expressions 5 Click on Find All All imported lists are now se
49. a short click while no text is selected then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a watering can Use this watering can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area This text area takes the selected color The function remains active for as long as the symbol is pressed or until you just click without dragging or until you press the Esc key The following applies to all modules Writer Calc Draw Impress Select the text that is to take another color then click the color you want on the floating toolbar Rotating Text If you want to rotate text type it into a text frame af Open the Draw Functions floating toolbar on the main toolbar T On the floating toolbar click on the Text icon The mouse pointer now indi cates that you can open up a text frame Open up a text frame release the mouse button and type in your text Cp Click on the edge of the text frame You will now see the Draw Object Bar which contains the Object Rotation Mode icon Click on it Now if you click on one of the handles in the corners of the text frame and drag the mouse the whole text frame turns with the text In the context menu of the Text Frame you can start the Position and Size dialog by selecting the Rotation tab This allows you to define the precise angle of rota tion numerically 68 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Defining Borders You can define the borders of pages paragr
50. amp Drop If you make a mistake during drag and drop and want to reverse the function position the cursor in your document and choose the Undo command from the Edit menu or via the keyboard p Copying by drag and drop is likewise possible in the other direction A text table or a selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag and drop to a table container in the data source explorer Simpler text can be copied using drag and drop from one document to a data field in the data source view You can read up on how this happens in the StarOffice Help 392 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using data in a text document You can insert a database field in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document This inserts a field for this database field in the document This is especially useful when designing form letters Simply drag the desired fields home address form of address etc into your document The best way to insert a complete record is to select the corresponding header and drag it into the document When you release the mouse button the Insert data base columns dialog appears where you can decide whether to use all database fields and whether to copy the data into the document as text a table or fields All currently selected records will be inserted Applying data to a table document You can insert one or more records into the current sh
51. and end of the connector If you rest the mouse on one of the points a small square appears next to the mouse pointer Press the mouse button and drag the beginning or end point to the desired frame Middle to Middle Connectors If you select a connector from the Connectors floating toolbar and click in the middle of one of the frames a black dashed line border appears around the entire frame Press the mouse button and drag the connector into the middle of another frame which also receives a black border and release the mouse button The advantage of this method is that when you want to move the frames later the connector fits perfectly so that the beginning and end of the connectors lie in the middle of each frame This function will come in handy if you want to switch the position of two frames because you will not have to edit the connectors manually Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 319 Editing Connectors To change the properties of a connector select it and click Connector in the context menu to open the Connector dialog Connector Standard Connector Type DK Line 1 0 00crn Help inez lines Uin spacing Begin horizontal 0 50cm Begin vertical 0 50cm End horizontal 0 50cm End vertical Choose the desired connector type from the list box The Standard Connector is the default You can also modify the line skew and the line spacing in this dialog All chang
52. bar 5 Horizontal ruler 2 Menu bar 6 Main toolbar 3 Function bar J Vertical scroll bar 4A Object bar 8 Status bar 26 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 t The Title Bar The title bar shows the name of StarOffice and usually the file name of the current document If you gave the document a title in File Properties Description you will see this instead of the file name The Menu Bar At the top of the StarOffice window is the menu bar Point with the mouse to a command on the menu bar and press the left mouse button The menu opens allowing you to choose a command from the submenu by clicking it You can also access the menu bar from the keyboard by pressing the Alt key The menus are organized into basic functions On the Edit menu for example are the functions you need to edit the current document cut copy paste undo changes and so on whilst on the View menu are functions that allow you to control your view of the elements displayed on the screen The commands which can be used for editing viewing sequencing formatting and printing etc a document or its contents can only be called up if the docu ment is open and acitve Active means in this case that the document has to be in front of any others on the screen If you want the commands to correspond to an object in the document then that object has to be selected The menus are context sensitive this means that those menu commands will be a
53. bold or in another font style change the text color and background or center the text If you want to visually emphasize a whole paragraph open its context menu and select Paragraph then click on for example the Borders tab Here you can select a border to frame the paragraph and also a shadow if desired If neces sary you can change the interval between the border and the paragraph text under Spacing to contents Enter the text in a Text Frame You have the following possibilities The text can receive a border it can be placed outside of the text margin on the side of the page and you can link text frames if a text should flow from one frame to another Choose Format Paragraph Background to apply a background color to the paragraph Use the Text drawing function With the Text icon on the Draw function floating toolbar from the main toolbar drag open a frame and enter your text This text can be positioned as you like which includes rotating at various angles or curving and slanting your text with the help of Format FontWork Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 67 Changing the Color of Text Click the Font Color icon in Writer and other modules and keep the mouse button pressed to obtain a floating toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors A Font Color Writer fm Font Color other modules The following only applies to StarOffice Writer If you confirm the symbol with
54. called Scan should appear as well as two subitems called Select Source and Scan In The dialogs and functions associated with these items are on the TWAIN driver StarOffice only gives you access to them 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools Configure The Configuration dialog appears 3 Click the Menu tab 4 In the large list box click the command into which you want to integrate the new scan command e g Last Version 5 Click the New Menu button A new item called Menu appears under the last selected item The subordinate item appears as a dash 6 Right click the new entry Menu and enter the new name Scan 402 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 7 Click the subordinate item i e the dash Any new menu item you define here is included as a submenu for scanning 8 Select the Insert function in the left list box and the Scan Source function in the right list box 9 Click New The new menu command is inserted in the large list box 10 Select the Scan Request function in the right list box and click New This item is also inserted 11 Click the dash and then Delete to remove it 12 You can rename the two submenu items if you want by right clicking the items 13 You can change the order of the items by moving the names to the large list box using Drag amp Drop 14 Click OK to close the Configure dialog StarOffice automatically saves the changes The new menu items ar
55. click on the column header NAME and keeping the mouse button depressed drag it into the label This inserts a field Put the fields in order to complete the address in the first label at top left Place the cursor at the last text position after the last field in the first label Open the Fields dialog for example by pressing the shortcut keys Ctrl F2 and go to the Database tab Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 181 Fields Ed Document References Functions Doclnformation Varlables Database Type Database selection Any record El Database Mame Ff biblio Form letter field Condition TRUE karnat Record Aumber Fron database C Userden ined General me e 8 Select the type Next record click on Insert and then on Close 9 You can now synchronize the labels Click on the Synchronize button in the small window 10 In the data source view select the records for which you would like address stickers by clicking on the row headers to the left Use the Shift or Ctrl key in the usual way to select several records at the same time 11 a On the database bar click the Data in Fields icon 12 You can then save and or print the label document J After the last label on the page the command Next Record is effected automati 2 cally Therefore do not insert the command manually after the last label on a page 182 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Newslette
56. connectors dock to the handles in the center of the object pages However using the glue points you can make the connectors dock to any point of an object For detailed instructions refer to the StarOffice Help Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 321 322 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw Using StarOffice Draw you can create drawings with different degrees of complexity This ranges from a simple drawing to an interactive multi page docu ment To create drawings or graphics you can either open an empty document and design all the elements yourself or work with the templates and sample graphics which you can reach by choosing File New Templates and Documents or from the Gallery You can draw and save vector graphics in StarOffice Draw You can also export these graphics as pixel graphics Furthermore it is also possible to insert pixel graphics bitmaps into your drawing pages at any time 323 The StarOffice Draw Functions This section contains an overview of some of the StarOffice Draw capabilities Creating and Publishing Vector Graphics StarOffice Draw is an object oriented vector graphic drawing program The objects can be lines rectangles 3D cylinders or other polygons All objects already have set properties such as size color of the surfaces color of contours linked files associated actions when clicked and much more All
57. deselect the frame by clicking outside it when you want to enter text in the frame click in the very center of the frame The frame should not be selected but the text cursor should be inside the frame 4 Insert the single cell table inside the frame Insert Table Select a row and a column and click OK The cursor is positioned in Table2 Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 145 Define the mathematical formula by entering an equal sign You can see the Calculation Bar Select the cells in Table1 in which the summand formula is positioned keep the button pressed as you drag the mouse from the first to the last cell you want The formula for calculating the total of cells B1 to B10 is lt Table1 B1 B10 gt Close the mathematical formula by clicking the Accept icon on the Calculation Bar You will see the result of the calculation in Table2 After making changes to the summands you can update the result by pressing function key F9 Instead of first inserting the border and then inserting a table inside the border you can start by inserting a single cell table then select the whole of this cell the only way to do this is with the shortcut keys Ctrl A and then click on the Insert Frame icon The border automatically surrounds the table inciden tally this also works with any section of text Now you can set the anchor to character cut the whole table to the clipboard and paste it where you wan
58. determine that from now on all illustrations in text documents receive a caption automatically Defining Number Ranges To number all the elements in your document that belong together for example all the notes warning messages quotations etc you can define a separate number range or sequence for each group Example 1 For example type Quote Number in front of the first quote 2 Choose Insert Fields Other Fields x Document References Functions Dochformation Yariables Database Type Selection Format Drawing lustration a aa aaa Romar ci ltl Roman i ii iii Set page variable Show page variable User Field Numbering by chapter Level Mone Separator Mame Value on PAL Close Help Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 131 132 3 On the Variables tab page select the Number Range field For the Name enter Quote 4 Click Insert and close the dialog The Quote number range enables you to automatically number all the quotes in your document In the field Value you can select a new initial value for the entire number range This is useful when you are dealing with a document in a series of connected documents Number ranges and captions can be restarted at each chapter In the Caption and Fields dialogs you can choose the chapter level at which to begin renumbering Using Master Documents and Subdocuments You can e
59. f 1 10 pt 2 60 pt M Synchronize 3 00 pt bd A oL Black Shadow style Position ojo io E E Hietance fo Ecm Color Gray hi Cancel Help Reset 8 Now select the middle column of the table and again open the Table Format dialog by choosing Table in the context menu 9 Under Line arrangement click the areas representing the right and left lines see illustration 10 In the Style field select the required line thickness and click OK 11 Select the bottom row of the table and again open the Table Format dialog by choosing Table in the context menu 12 In the Style field select the required line thickness previously 2 50 pt and in Line arrangement click the areas representing the top and bottom lines 13 Click OK Now the table is finished Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 71 Making Text Superscript and Subscript You have the following options for superscripting or subscripting text Use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl Shift P and Ctrl Shift B Choose Format Character Position Use the icons Open the context menu of the text object bar choose Visible Buttons and on the submenu mark Subscript and Superscript You will now see the icons on the text object bar Making text superscript subscript while typing Suppose you want to type 1 m superscript 2 1 Type 1 m2 After the 2 press the space bar or another key defining the end of a word m2 automa
60. first cell of the range arranged in rows and the Column field the first cell of the range arranged in columns Calculating with Two Variables Consider columns A and B of the sample table above You now want to vary not just the quantity produced annually but also the selling price and you are inter ested in the profit in each case Expand the table shown above D2 thru D11 contain the numbers 500 1000 and so on up to 5000 In E1 through H1 enter the numbers 8 10 15 and 20 A B C D E F 1 Selling price 10 8 10 2 Directcosts 2 500 000 6000 3 Fixedcosts 10000 1000 4000 2000 4 Quantity 2000 1500 1000 2000 5 Profit B4 B1 B2 B3 2000 2000 6000 1 Select the range D1 H11 Choose Data Multiple Operations With the cursor in the Formulas field click cell B5 gt i le Set the cursor in the Rows field and click cell B1 This means that B1 the selling price is the horizontally entered variable with the values 8 10 15 and 20 5 Set the cursor in the Column field and click in Al This means that B4 the quantity is the vertically entered variable 6 Close the dialog with OK You will see the profits in the range E2 H11 In some cases you must first press F9 to update the table 256 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using Scenarios Scenarios are important aids for making numbers that are dependent on each other and their resulting calculations visible
61. for regular expressions within paragraphs There are many other wildcards that you can use listed in the StarOffice Help 54 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Searching Backward If you want to find in a particular part of a long text a specific word that is used often you would probably enter the word under Search for and then skip each irrelevant location by repeatedly clicking the Find button However you might click Find once too often by mistake In this case select Backward and click again on Find to return to the previous location found Current Selection Only Select the Current selection only option if you do not want to search the entire document The search will be restricted to the range selected in the document If you select a text before activating the Find command the search will automatically take place only within the selected range Searching for Styles This option enables you to quickly reformat all or part of a text For example text formatted with the Style Heading 2 can be replaced with the Style Heading 3 Select the Paragraph Style in the list box under Search for Then select the new Paragraph Style in the Replace with field Start the replacement process with the Replace button All matching strings found in the text will be displayed one after the other You can decide each time whether or not to replace the string found in the text to replace this and all other strings found in the text or
62. functions For example instead of ROUND A1 1 you could also calculate the sine function with ROUND SIN A1 2 The Function AutoPilot assists you with nested functions 210 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Calculating With Dates and Times In spreadsheets you can do more than just display dates and times both taken from the internal clock of your computer You can also perform calculations with dates and times For instance to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours follow these steps as nowo al 2 Since then ithas been AE gars2sapays NOWO AT a 330061 77 Hours AGTA 19803705 97 Minutes AAYE 1188222358 Seconds AS 80 1 Open a new spreadsheet Enter your birthday in cell A1 e g 4 9 64 2 Enter the following formula in cell A3 NOW A1 3 After pressing the Enter key or clicking the Accept icon the green check mark on the formula bar you will see the result in date format Since you would like to see the difference between two dates as a number of days you have to format cell A3 as a number 4 Set the cursor in cell A3 right click this cell i e call its context menu and choose Format Cells 5 The Cell Attributes dialog will appear On the Numbers tab the Number cate gory will appear already highlighted The format is set to General and causes among other things the result of a calculation containing date entries to also be display
63. icon A short click takes you one directory higher A long click opens a submenu with a choice of superordinate directories To only see files containing a certain name enter the name with wildcards in the File name combo box and press Enter If you use txt for example only the files having txt at the end of their names will be displayed If you use s all names beginning with the letter s will be displayed 32 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The Templates and Documents Dialog The Templates and Documents dialog can be regarded as a kind of command center for StarOffice documents It provides easy access to your work directory and to the supplied sample documents Here you can find all document templates both the supplied ones and those you have created yourself To open the dialog choose File New Templates and Documents or press Shift Ctrl N In Windows double click the StarOffice 6 0 Quickstarter icon on the task bar Templates and Documents Samples X a 42 EB EL New Document Presentations Spreadsheets F Text Documents Templates PN My Documents Organize Edit Cancel Help The dialog offers the following areas which you can select by clicking in the left field New Document This is one way of creating a new empty document Templates Choose from the many ready to use document templates we have prepared for you My Documents A quick route to
64. in StarOffice Impress indicate that you are in the drawing view while the buttons at the bottom left indicate that you are in the slide view Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 327 You can draw and edit vector graphics in the drawing view The other views which are only available in StarOffice Impress by clicking the buttons at top right help you create presentations They are introduced in the chapter on StarOffice Impress and are described in the StarOffice Help In the slides view you work on the individual slides of the presentation whereas the master view allows you to define a uniform background for all slides In addi tion you can turn the layer view on and off as you like For example the layer view is where you can manage objects that are not always supposed to be visible The main toolbar contains several floating toolbars When opened these toolbars provide additional related icons The floating toolbars are indicated by small trian gles on icons and are opened by long clicking the corresponding icon on the main toolbar until the floating toolbar appears Since the toolbar is floating you can drag it away from its original position and position it anywhere else in the work area 1 im Long click the Rectangle icon to open the floating toolbar and click on the Rectangle icon The pointer changes to a cross hair symbol with a small square Rectangles M 2 Draw a rectangle on the slide It ha
65. in the Navigator Activate the Navigator by clicking the corresponding item in the Edit menu You can dock the Navigator to the edge of a window by dragging its title bar while pressing the Ctrl key You can dock and undock the window by pressing Ctrl and double clicking in a vacant area of the Navigator Jumping From One Object to Another in Text Clicking the Navigation icon at the top of the Navigator opens a mini navigator which you can for example use to move in your document from one graphic object to the next one or to the previous one To do so you need to first drag the blue title bar of the navigation floating toolbar to position it outside of the Navi gator Now the arrow icons will be visible at the right side Just click the Graphics icon and then either the Previous graphic or Next graphic arrows This also works for tables frames sections and so on iF D po Fo SHES lBs EE Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 115 With the help of the Navigator you can jump to any object in your docu ment Another way to achieve the same result is to use the Navigation button the mini navigator found in the vertical scroll bar at the bottom right hand side of the document window This is a floating toolbar that can be positioned anywhere on your screen In the Navigation window click the object type you want to jump to and then click one of the arrow icons to go to the previous or next obj
66. its own text frame or whether it should be transferred into a spreadsheet cell or into the structure of a presentation If you transfer text via the clipboard you can paste it to the destination with or without text attributes Use the shortcut keys Ctrl C to copy and Ctrl V to paste To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted do a long click on the Paste icon on the function bar Select the format from the submenu To obtain a selection of formats choose Edit Paste Special In a text document you will find in the File menu the command Send Outline to presentation A new presentation document is created that contains the headings from the text document as the outline You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command If you want to also transfer the same headings to the first superordinate para graph or several paragraphs of the text then select the AutoAbstract to pres entation command You must have formatted the headings with a corre sponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command Copying Text Using Drag and Drop If you select a text section and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag amp drop it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse If you drag a text section to the character view of a presentation an OLE object is inserted as a StarOffice plugin If you drag the text to the outline view o
67. management 400 versions comparing 398 comparing documents 398 of a document 400 view multiple sheets 213 View full screen normal 425 views icons 407 Visible buttons 403 visible cells copying 224 W wavy underlines 44 what if tables 254 wildcard search 54 window refreshing 330 windows AutoHide 30 word donot hyphenate 170 word completion automatic 106 AutoText 105 words adding to spellcheck 401 automatic replacement of 100 disabling spellcheck 101 169 finding 52 462 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 work directory changing 35 wrap regions defining 187 writing text 61 X XML file formats 36 XY charts 233 Z Zero enteringa 208 zoom shortcut keys 438 with shortcut keys 436
68. mouse button pressed drag it down or to the right over all the cells into which you want to copy the formula 4 When you release the mouse button the formula will be copied into the cells and automatically adjusted If you do not want values and texts to be automatically adjusted then hold down the Ctrl key when dragging Formulas however are always adjusted accordingly Addressing by Name A neat way of making the references to cells and cell ranges in formulas legible is to give the ranges names You can for example name the range A1 B2 Start Then in the formula simply write S5UM Start Following the insertion or deletion of rows and columns StarOffice also correctly assigns the ranges identified by name Range names should not contain any spaces For example it is much easier to read a formula for sales tax if you can write Amount Tax_rate instead of A5 B12 In this case you would name cell A5 Amount and cell B12 Tax_rate In order to specify range names you must first select the area then choose the command Insert Names Define or the Ctrl F3 key combination Enter the name for the first area and click Add You can also name other cell ranges in this dialog by entering the desired name in the field and then selecting the respective cells Use the Define Names dialog to define names for formulas or parts of formulas you need more often Close the dialog with OK 222 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guid
69. numbers is left justified just like normal text But note You cannot calculate with numbers in text format If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to Text the numbers will remain normal numbers They will not be converted Only numbers entered thereafter or numbers which are then edited will become text numbers If you decide to enter a number directly as text enter an apostrophe first for example for years in column headings 1999 2000 and 2001 The apostrophe is not visible in the cell it only signalizes that the entry is to be recognized as a text This is useful for example if you enter a telephone number or ZIP code that begins with a zero 0 because a zero 0 at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats Numbers You can display one and the same figure in various ways but internally it always remains the same number 1 000 o a I ee t Enter the number 12345 6789 for example You will see that the number appears in the sheet with only two decimal places i e 12345 68 However the exact number with all four decimal places is still remembered by the program You can also enter a fractional number in a cell and use it for calculation Enter 01 5 in a cell without the quotation marks and press the input key In the input line you will see the value 0 2 which will be used for the calculation I
70. of the mouse and click where the second point of the curve should be If you keep holding down the mouse button you can define the direction of the curve from the second point to the next point just as you did from the starting point release the mouse and move to the third point click again and keep the mouse button pressed and so on But when you release the mouse button after clicking on the second point of the curve and then click on another point in the slide the second point is defined as a corner point At a corner point the curve abruptly changes direction thus forming a corner If you also define point three as a corner point in this way you will obtain a straight section between points two and three When you hold down the Shift key the directions will be limited to multiples of 45 degrees When you hold down the Alt key the curve closes and you can draw an additional curve which you can combine with the first one to form a single object 4 To end curve drawing double click the last point to be set You can now continue working with other tools Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 335 The curves you have drawn are B zier curves The points on a B zier curve are called data points Each data point on the B zier curve can be symmetric The curve then has the same curvature either side of the point Or the data point is smooth The curve then has different curvatures either side of the poi
71. of the properties can be modi fied at any time Thanks to the vector technology you can rotate objects in any direction and alter their size without unsightly step effects occurring on the edges Furthermore as all of the objects can be controlled individually you can move and overlap them at will Creating 3D Objects You are not restricted to two dimensions when using StarOffice Draw You can create cubes spheres cylinders and other 3D objects rotate them at will and even illuminate each object by means of various light sources These features together with default or freely defined color gradients enable you to quickly create eye catching company and Internet presentations Manage Organization Charts StarOffice Draw is object oriented The objects could be rectangles for example containing text and linked to each other If you move the rectangles the connectors will automatically follow This makes drawing and maintaining your company or departmental organizational charts much easier The connectors can also be freely placed at glue points which makes the creation of technical drawings with explanatory texts easier Drawing Draw in the usual ways straight lines free lines bezier curves and other types of rectangles and geometrical figures The 3D functions can be used to create 3D objects such as cubes spheres cylinders tori and more You can also rotate your own two dimensional contours in the third dimension Choose c
72. on the function bar All the Stylist functions are explained in StarOffice Help Paragraph Styles Mano Complimentary clase Character Styles alaks Oe Bullet Symbols Default Caption Characters First line indent Hanging indent Definition Heading Crop Caps Heading 1 Emphasis Heading 10 Endnote anchor Heading 2 Endnote Characters Heading 3 Example Heading 4 Footnote anchor Heading 5 Footnote Characters Heading 6 B Index Unk Automatic T At the top of the Stylist are icons for selecting the Style type that you want to display These are from left to right Paragraph Character Frame Page and Numbering Styles The main area of the Stylist lists the available Styles of the selected type But you only see the Styles of the active Style category specified in the list box at the bottom of the Stylist All For example if the word Automatic is selected in the list box StarOffice offers the Styles that make sense in the current context If you want to see all the Styles of a Style type select All Styles from the list box Paragraph Styles fq Select Paragraph Styles if not already selected by clicking the Paragraph Styles icon in the Stylist You will then see a list of Paragraph Styles Double click an entry in the list of Paragraph Styles The paragraph in which the cursor is positioned will now be formatted with that Paragraph Style Double click in the Stylist on another Paragraph
73. or footer as the text which was there at the time of the HTML export whereas StarOffice inserts a field again and updates this as and when necessary However author and sender are only inserted as a field if you yourself are the author or were the last one to modify the document Headers and footers are exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Online Layout mode Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 159 Inserting Page Numbers in Footers 1 3 Insert a footer Choose Insert Footer and select from the submenu the Page Style you would like for the footer The cursor now appears in the footer Choose Insert Fields Page Numbers The page number appears as a field in the footer Select the page number and click on the Centered icon on the object bar If you would like the footer text to be in the form Page 9 of 12 you should also do as follows 1 2 Type the word Page before the field and of after the field Choose Insert Fields Page Count Inserting Chapter Information in Headers In the document header you can insert fields that contain the file name date time chapter headings etc 1 Enter text in a long document and apply the style Heading 1 to chapter head ings Activate the header for the document Format Page Header or Insert Header Click within the header to position your cursor in it Enter Chapter Choose the command Insert Fields O
74. page 29 374 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 a aa t2 iz vr zk vy Pleo Mella a identifier Type Address Annote Author Booktitle Chapter Edition Editor Howpubish Institutn Journal Month R A E Bibliography faly Links Kaarst Biitt Sautter Ka E Queries Kaarst Bitte Seeboerger E Tables M nchen Borges Mal EEJ 3 M nchen Staas Diete D sseldorf Esser Hein Borges Mal ge Mal M nchen Staas Diete M nchen Dangel Day In the Data Sources view on the left you will see the Data Sources Explorer and on the right is the table view In the Data Sources Explorer on the left you can open a data source by clicking the plus sign in front of its name This opens the subordinate containers for links queries and tables As soon as you click a query or table its contents appear in the table view on the right You can create new tables queries and links by clicking the relevant entry in the Data Sources Explorer and right clicking with the mouse to open the context menu Registering an Address Book In StarOffice you can register different data sources The contents of the data fields are then available to you in fields and controls for example The address book which perhaps you already use on your system is such a data source e g an LDAP server or a Netscape address book In the templates and AutoPilots from StarOffice fields are used for the contents of the address boo
75. print options Envelope Envelope Format Printer Addressee Database Database field j Ww Sender Sun Microsystems Inc Insert Cancel Help Reset Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 193 Inserting an Envelope into a Document Click on the Insert button in the Envelope dialog The envelope will be inserted above the first page of the active document In this case before the first page of the personal letter template To continue editing the envelope for instance to change the format again open the Page Style Envelope dialog in the context menu of the envelope click Page and select the Page tab Adjusting the Printer for the Printout The method for printing envelopes depends on the type of printer used Some printers require a special cassette while others have a multi purpose tray that can feed envelopes If in doubt consult the manual for your printer Specify your print options in the Page Style Envelope dialog To open this dialog click an empty spot on the envelope open the context menu and select Page Then select the Page tab Define the desired settings under Paper Format Applying Various Fonts To permanently change the font size and style for all paragraphs with a particular paragraph format you will need to modify the Paragraph Style First position the cursor in the text that you want to modify and select the command Edit Paragraph Style in th
76. printed next to each other on a page in landscape horizontal orientation Both sides of the page will be printed most printers require that you take out the paper after the first half of the printing process and feed it in again with the blank side of the page facing upward StarOffice will automatically print the pages so that you can read them as a brochure StarOffice automatically arranges the pages in such a way that you can read the text continuously if you lay the pages together fold them in the center and staple them To use this function with the current document choose File Print In the dialog that opens click the Options button Mark the Brochure check box Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 43 spellcheck StarOffice has an automatic spellcheck which can be active as you type or which you can open separately Automatic Spellcheck You can turn the automatic spellcheck that works as you type on and off by clicking the AutoSpellcheck on off icon on the main toolbar With automatic checking enabled words recognized as incorrect are highlighted with a wavy red underline A word is recognized as incorrect if all the following conditions are met a spell check module is installed for the language of the word this is enabled the word is not found there and the word is not in any active user dictionary You can create any number of user dictionaries You create a user dictionary by choosing Tools Options Language
77. references are switched back to relative A1 StarOffice Calc shows the references to a formula If for example you click the formula SUM A1 C5 D15 D24 in a cell the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color For example the formula component A1 C5 may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue The next formula component D15 D24 can be marked in red in the same way When to Use Relative and Absolute References What distinguishes a relative reference Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1 B2 The formula to enter into E1 would be SUM A1 B2 If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A the elements you want to add would then be in B1 C2 and the formula would be in F1 not in El After inserting the new column you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet and possibly in other sheets Fortunately StarOffice does this work for you After having inserted a new column A the formula SUM A1 B2 will be automatically updated to SUM B1 C2 Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in StarOffice Calc whenever the referenced area is moved But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted not the abso lute references Absolute references are used when a cal
78. right corner of the cell downwards 3 When you release the mouse button the cells selected in this manner are filled with numbers The number you entered is increased by 1 in each case If you have selected two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers and you drag these together any recognizable arithmetic pattern of the numbers is continued An example If A1 contains the number 1 and A2 the number 3 then joint copying of the two cells by dragging downwards causes the progression to continue with 5 7 9 11 and so on 1 First select the range in the table that you want to completely fill 2 In the dialog which you can now open by choosing Edit Fill Row select the type of progression For example select 2 as the starting value 2 as the incre ment and geometric progression as the progression type In this way you obtain a list of the powers of 2 266 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 128 Direction _ Series type Tie Unit 256 Down C Linear Gay Right Growth Weekday Cancel C Up C Date Month Help lett C AutoFill Year Start value 2 End value Increment fi As you can see in the dialog you can also automatically fill in series of dates and times For example to insert the first date of each month of the year as row headers proceed as follows 1 Enter a date e g 1 1 99 into a cell without the quotation marks Select this c
79. screen as well insert the graphic image by choosing Insert Graphics From File and put the image behind the cells by way of the context menu command Arrangement To the Background To later select the background image use the Navigator Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet 1 Select the text you want to format 2 Choose the desired text attributes from the spreadsheet object bar You can also choose Format Cells The Cell Attributes dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet 1 Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format 2 To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages use the icons on the spreadsheet object bar For other formats choose Format Cells You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 219 Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages Basically you can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells for multiple selection hold down the Ctrl key when clicking and then activating the Cell Attributes dialog via Format Cell In this dialog you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet choose Format Page You can define headers and footers for example to appear on each printed page Addressing Cells
80. selected will be filled If you also hold down the Shift key at the same time the cell format of the input cell will be applied to the whole of the range If after you have created a range and entered a value or a formula you press Shift Ctrl Enter you will create a matrix area in which all the cells contain the same information as the entry The components of a matrix area cannot be modi fied The Ctrl key is used when selecting individual cells with the mouse to enable multiple areas to be defined The cells selected with your mouse as you hold down the control key will combine to give a multiple area If you want to simultaneously edit or print several tables of the document currently active select them together by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking the table tab at the lower edge of the document Light colored table tabs show the selected tables gray table tabs denote tables not selected There is also a command in the context menu for selecting all of the tables If you click the table tab of the current table while holding down the Shift key only this table will be selected Use the shortcut keys Ctrl Enter to directly insert a manual line break in a cell not in the input box at the top of the window You can independent of this activate the check box Line break located under Format Cell Alignment which auto matically breaks the text flow at the right column margin Use the Del key to call the Delete Contents dialog w
81. set directly from the keyboard Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl Shift 1 not on the number pad Two decimal places thousands separator Ctrl Shift 2 not on the number pad Standard exponential format Ctrl Shift 3 not on the number pad Standard date format Ctrl Shift 4 not on the number pad Standard currency format Ctrl Shift 5 not on the number pad Standard percentage format two decimal places Ctrl Shift 6 not on the number pad Standard format Ctrl x x is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad Selects the current area Alt Down Arrow Increases the height of current row Alt Up Arrow Decreases the height of current row Alt Right Arrow Increases the width of the current column Alt Left Arrow Decreases the width of the current column Alt Shift Arrow Key Sets the column width or row height to the optimal width or height based on the contents of the cell currently active 434 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys for Presentations The shortcut keys that can be used when working with presentations are listed in this section Moreover the general shortcut keys in StarOffice also apply Function Keys for Presentations Shortcut Keys Effect F2 Edit text Ctrl F2 Slide show F3 Edit group Ctrl F3 Exit group Shift F3 Duplicate F4 Position and Size F5 Navigator F7
82. such as PC and CD These exceptions can also be automatically incorporated into the tab page To do this use Add Automatically fields on the Exceptions tab page If you have selected these and you then use an idiom in your text that is automatically corrected even though it isn t wrong you need to immediately press Ctrl Z Doing this not only undoes the automatic correction but also sees to it that this particular correction will not be made automatically again AutoCorrect can also be used to replace one word with another for example ASAP with the text as soon as possible although the StarOffice AutoText function is much better suited for such purposes 50 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating a Letter Template With the AutoPilot If you are writing a personal letter the AutoPilot and standard AutoTexts are not essential but in formal business correspondence these aids can save you a lot of time and make your work much easier If you need to produce a standard letter have a look at the supplied templates Simply press the shortcut keys Shift Ctrl N or choose File New Templates and Documents Start the AutoPilot with the File AutoPilot Letter menu command AutoPilot Letter x Select the letter template you want to create Which layout do you preter ie Modern i Classic Decorative Help Cancel Next gt gt Create In this short introduction accept all the defaults provide
83. text Enter your text and afterwards click in any free area of the document You will notice that the text you entered will be scaled so that it exactly fits into the frame Callouts 1 Using the Callouts icon drag your mouse from the point which the callout arrow should point to to the point where the callout text should appear Once you release the mouse button you can edit the size of the frame of the callout As soon as you want to enter text into the callout just double click the line The callout frame will appear with a wide gray border indicating that you are now in the text edit mode 3 Enter the callout text 4 Change the line properties by clicking on the line opening your context menu and clicking on the Line command You can select arrowheads for the lines in the Style combo box on the Line tab page Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 333 Converting Text Into 3D If a text is selected you can transform the text into a 3D body by choosing Convert To 3D from the context menu The 3D body will take on the area you created for your text frame You can rotate the 3D text with the Rotate icon in the Effects floating toolbar in the Main toolbar When you click inside the delimiting frame and drag while pressing the mouse button the object will rotate on all the axes at the same time But when you click one of the eight handles and drag it with a pressed mouse button the object will ro
84. text quite easily by clicking on the footnote anchor Press PgUp to return from the footnote to the text The footnote format can be changed by modifying the Paragraph Style Foot note which is automatically applied to all footnotes in a document To delete a footnote simply delete the footnote mark in the text The footnote text will automatically be deleted as well Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 165 Inserting and Editing Footnotes You can insert a footnote in two ways with an icon or with a dialog This is how to insert a footnote with an icon 1 Place the cursor in the text at the point where the footnote anchor should appear 2 ig Open the Insert floating toolbar on the main toolbar 3 h Click on the Insert Footnote Directly icon This is how to insert a footnote with a dialog 1 Place the cursor in the text at the point where the footnote anchor should appear 2 Choose Insert Footnote to open the Insert Footnote dialog When you insert a footnote with the icon footnote numbering is automatic The Insert Footnote dialog on the other hand allows individual settings for the footnote Tips for Working with Footnotes To edit the text of a footnote click in it and then you can modify it Press PgUp to jump from the footnote area to the footnote anchor in the text To edit the properties of a previously inserted footnote place the cursor in the document immediately befor
85. that the format is like 1 234 00 This notation is more familiar to people in English speaking countries Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 209 Calculating With Formulas All formulas begin with an equals sign The formulas may contain numbers or text and other data is also possible such as format details that specify how the numbers are to be formatted Naturally the formulas will also contain arithmetic operators logic operators or function starts p Remember that the basic arithmetic signs can be used in formulas using i the Multiplication and Division before Addition and Subtraction rule Instead of writing SUM A1 B1 it s better to write A1 B1 Parentheses are also possible The result of the formula 1 2 3 means something different than 1 2 3 Here are a few examples of StarOffice Calc formulas A1 10 Displays the contents of cell A1 plus 10 A1 16 Displays 16 of the contents of A1 A1 A2 Displays the result of the multiplication of Al and A2 ROUND A1 1 Rounds the contents in cell A1 to one decimal place EFFECTIVE 5 12 Calculates the effective interest at 5 annually with 12 payments B8 SUM B10 B14 Calculates the sum of the cells B10 to B14 minus the value of B8 SUM B8 SUM B10 B14 Calculates the sum of cells B10 to B14 and adds the value to B8 It is also possible to nest functions in formulas as shown in the example You can also nest functions within
86. the Shift key so that the sphere remains a sphere 6 Assign an interesting color or color gradient to the sphere by way of the list boxes on the object bar In chapter 3D Globe on page 360 we describe how to place a bitmap as a pattern on a 3D object for example a world map from the Gallery ls zs 5 43 21 thes 4 unsichtbar o 00cm H C Schwarz fy Farbvertaut 1 Radial rat gel R aoe 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 YF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2B 29 30 0 Pr sentation Seite einf gen Seitenlayout ndern Seitenvorlage L 1V e in 3D Seite duplizieren Seite ENWEICENT 30 Objekte E T D L AVE HD ELARRE r Mt w Oli afe rif Seite 1 Seite 2 Ual 3D Szene markiert kz 33 9078 24 1023x1023 53 x seite2 2 Notizen You can now save your presentation by pressing the Ctrl S shortcut keys and specifying the name and location for the file 294 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Switching Presentation Views To the right above the vertical scroll bar there are some icons for switching views and for starting the presentation 4 Drawing View ao y 2 2 Outline View ia i 3 Slide View 4 BE 5 4A Notes View i 5 5 Handout View 6 Start Slide Show To the left of the horizontal scroll bar you see in the drawing view notes view and handout view the following icons 1 Slide View i Lj trey 4 4 2 Master View
87. the data By double clicking on one of the fields in the Data area you can call up the Data Field dialog Use this dialog to select the functions to be used for displaying the data in the data area To make a multiple selection press the Ctrl key while clicking the functions Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 247 Data Freld jr Te Count Mumbers only StoOey Sample StOeyvP Population War Sample Warf Population Mame 1998 The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by simply moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse Replace a button by dragging it to the other buttons When you double click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area you will see the Data Field dialog This is where you can select if and to what extent StarOffice should calculate and display subtotals Exit the DataPilot by pressing OK A Filter button will now be inserted into the table the default position is under the selected area two lines further down the DataPilot table is inserted It has a bold outline 10 000 00 175 000 00 50 000 00 250 000 00 210 000 00 830 000 00 240 000 00 250 000 00 150 000 00 689 000 00 200 000 00 otal Result 600 000 00 370 000 00 1 694 000 00 520 000 00 3 184 000 00 Selecting DataPilot Output Ranges Click the button More in the DataPilot dialog The dialog will be extended You can select a named area in which the Data
88. the last character to be deleted Release the Shift key The text appears selected Press the Delete key to delete the selected text You can also delete selected text by pressing Ctrl X instead of Delete This cuts out the text and places it on the clipboard You can then paste it back in wher ever and as often as you like by pressing Ctrl V Deleting non adjacent pieces of text 1 2 3 Press Ctrl and keep it pressed Left click on the first character of the first piece of text to be deleted Keeping the mouse button depressed drag the pointer to the last character of this piece of text Release the mouse button and the Ctrl key Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each piece of text to be deleted Press the Delete key to delete the selected text 64 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard To navigate and select with the keyboard in addition to the arrow keys you can also use Home End PgUp and PgDn Certain keys have different functions depending on whether they are used on their own or in combination with the Ctrl key The following table provides an overview of the keys used for navigation Key Function Ctrl key Right left Go one character to the left or Go one word to the left or right arrow keys right Up down_ Go one line up or down Move the current paragraph up arrow keys or down Home Go to the beginning of the Go to the beginning of the doc
89. the middle mouse button or drag and drop while pressing the Ctrl key Cells were filtered out by way of AutoFilters All cells including the default filters or special filters hidden ones are moved Move the visible cells for example by way of cut and paste via the clipboard or drag and drop without pressing an additional key Cells were hidden manually by way of the Hide All cells including the command in the context menu of the row or column hidden ones are copied or headers or through an outline moved Copy or move the visible cells 224 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Cursor Positioning via the Keyboard Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to quickly move to another cell A list of all possible shortcut keys can be found in the StarOffice Help Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl Pos1 Positions the cursor in cell A1 Ctrl End Positions the cursor in the last cell containing data on the spreadsheet If the last row containing data is row 10 and the last column in which values are found is column F the cursor will be positioned in cell F10 Pos1 Positions the cursor in the first column A of the row currently selected End Positions the cursor in the last column containing data of the currently selected row Ctrl x Selects the entire range in which the cursor is located x is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad A range is a contiguous area of cells containing data Ente
90. the mouse 30 Effects E El allel ew lluminatior Light source le glee G18 99 Jeesersessnsnsanesenssnenesentansnenesesensanensaneney m E E Gray 20 mi E i 1 Ambient light Gray 60 m Creating Texture on a 3D Object Before we go on please note If you only need the globe shown here and do not want to learn how to create a similar one yourself with just a few clicks of the mouse we have prepared a finished globe for you Open the Gallery and select the 3D Effects theme where you will find what you are looking for Drag the globe into your document To create your own 3D globe first open an empty drawing document insert a globe and then apply the world map worldmap2 wmf from the gallery as a texture to the globe Then you can adjust the illumination 360 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 1 Open an empty drawing document by choosing File New Drawing for example Now you can see the new document and the associated toolbars 2 At the left of the Main Toolbar open the 3D Objects floating toolbar Select Sphere in the floating toolbar 3 Drag open a square to create an exact globe All 3D objects can be opened in this way If you prefer to create an oblong shape press the Shift key while dragging This behavior for 3D objects is opposite to the way other objects such as ellipses and rectangles behave 4 A Open the Gallery The Gallery themes appear as subdirectories D g
91. the predefined text with text of your own If the document is in the Master view mode after you open it you should switch to the Slide view mode using the respective icon in the lower left corner of the document window A document will always be opened in the view in which it was last saved To create a second slide click the Insert Slide command in the small Pres ny e e e e e entation window If the small presentation window is not visible click the Presentation Box On Off icon on the Object bar In the next dialog select a page layout and confirm with OK Mp Slide 1 A als Alternatively you can also click in the area right of the Slide 1 tab to create a new slide without any selection dialog The new slide has the same layout as the current slide 1 You will then see Slide 2 After pressing OK click once on the lower text frame and delete it e g with the Delete key 2 Click in the text frame at the top and enter a title Now you are going to insert a 3D object Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 293 3 ge Long click the 3D Objects icon to open its floating toolbar Select the Sphere icon 4 Click on the slide below the Live in 3D text drag open a 3D rectangle and then release the mouse button You now have a 3D sphere 5 Drag the sphere into the center of the slide and enlarge it by dragging one of the handles in one of the corners When dragging you must hold down
92. the snap line Using Dimension Lines With StarOffice you can insert dimension lines directly into your drawing 44 Drag the snap lines from the ruler into your document and position them so that there is a snap line over every major line in the drawing Then click the Dimension Line icon on the Lines floating toolbar The mouse pointer will turn into a cross and you can drag a dimension line directly from one side to the other or even better from one snap line to another P To obtain an absolutely horizontal or vertical dimension line or one at a 45 angle press the Shift key while dragging the dimension line 370 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 To edit the look of dimension lines select them open the context menu and click Dimensions A dialog appears where you can determine the appearance and position of the dimension lines Dimensioning ine So legd A Line distance 080cm Text position Cancel Guide overhang o 20em H Guide distance Jo cm Left guide poom M Auto vertical Fight guide o 00em H M AutoHorizontal Measure below object Show meas units automatic Iv Parallel to line 15 02 N To increase the space between a dimension line and the measured object move the mouse pointer to one of the points on the dimension line The mouse pointer will turn into another icon enabling you to either expand or reduce the space Working With Multiple Layers The next step is to p
93. to the Insert Index Table dialog choosing the Type Bibliography and clicking the Entries tab For example you will use different entries for magazine articles than for entries concerning books For this reason the bibliography database is divided into different types of sources of literature To edit the bibliography database choose Tools Bibliography Database 122 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 You can also generate a new record in the Insert Bibliography Entry by clicking the New button but these ad hoc records will be saved only in the current docu ment not in the Bibliography Database and then only if you actually insert the relevant new entry When saving a document with bibliography entries all information belonging to the entries will automatically be saved in a hidden field In this way all data will be included when you distribute the document for example on a disk It does not matter whether the bibliography was created in the document or not 1 To insert the bibliography entries into the text position the cursor in the text where the entry is to appear and then choose Insert Indexes and Tables Bibliography Entry The following dialog will appear Insert Bibliography Entry Entry ae Insert From bibliography database i From document content Close Author Help Sautter Karlheinz Title Der bhw Coach StarOffice 5 0 Edit et Short name saus9 nd 2 You should first decid
94. under Slide Show Slide Show Settings Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 311 Slide Show Range All slides From Slide 1 Cancel eE Gustom Side shov Help El Type Options i Default E Change slides manually c Window W Mouse pointer visible C Auto T Mouse pointer as pen Navigator visible Iv Animations allowed T Show loge Iw Change slides by clicking on background In this dialog you can determine which slides to include in the presentation Select any other desired options and click OK Further Information Using Your Mouse as a Pointer Select the option Mouse pointer as pen in the Slide Show dialog in order to high light charts or point to important aspects during a presentation To change slides manually you must double click the mouse Changing Bullet Symbols in Outline View To change a bullet symbol in the Outline view place your cursor in the desired line paragraph and click the Bullets and Numbering icon only visible in the Object bar of the Drawing view A dialog appears where you can choose a different symbol 312 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Presenting a Product Do you need to create an impressive presentation to present a new product Here we show you how to do it We will explain how to achieve a product presentation using a template Creating a Presentation with a Template Choose File New Templates and Documents Select the Temp
95. update History Only for US Dollars This is where you can see the price changes for specific shares over a certain period of time 1 Click the History button to open the dialog in which you specify the share name the start date and end date as well as the split 2 Confirm with OK A new chart will be created with your settings Dividend Payment To take the dividend into consideration click the Dividend Payment button Select the appropriate entry in the list box in our example Airtrans Inc 270 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 In the Dividends Stocks field enter 1 15 or in the Total Dividends field enter 345 300 shares 1 15 Confirm your entries with OK The dividend that has been paid is added in the Realized Profits column and is posted on the Transactions tab in the Dividend Paid column and in Realized Profit This is the current page view To switch back to the portfolio overview again click the Sheet tab of the same name Selling Shares Since Airtrans Inc has actually made some money you ve decided to sell 100 shares We have placed a sell order at the current stock price with the brokerage firm and will proceed based on the execution of the order 1 Click the Sell Shares button to accept this transaction into the portfolio view 2 Select the appropriate entry in the list box in our example Airtrans Inc 3 The entry screen shows you all the relevant values for Airtrans Inc as
96. view or by assigning another Page Style to the slides afa Switch to the master view using the icon in the lower IOa mN F left hand corner of the work area Inthe master view you can edit the background for all slides All objects that you enter in this view whether company logos lines or text are displayed in the background on all slides that use the current Page Style the masterpage This allows you to reproduce headers and footers on presentation slides The objects that you insert in the Master View cannot be modified in the normal Slide View If you want to give a uniform texture to the background this is also possible without having to go into the Master View Choose Format Slide Back ground tab Select a color gradient hatching or bitmap for the background When you quit the dialog you are asked if the settings should apply to all slides or just to the current slide If you answer Yes to the question Back ground settings for all slides the Background Presentation Style will be modified for the current master page All slides that use the same Page Style will have the modified background If you answer No only the background of the current slide will be modified In StarOffice Impress you can modify the Presentation Styles in the Stylist by following these steps 1 In the Stylist click the Presentation Styles icon if it is not already selected Now you can see all existing Styles of this type in the Styl
97. visible or define what is on the toolbars menus or status bar etc All such configura tion options are found under Tools Configure 3 Click Save in the dialog under Tools Configure Another dialog appears in which you can save the configuration 4 In the File Type list box select lt All gt 5 In the large list box of the Save dialog select the file you want to connect to the configuration 6 Click Save A prompt appears asking whether you want to replace the file or not This query concerns only the configuration connected to the document not the actual contents of the document 7 Confirm overwrite The configuration is now connected to the active document You can check this by loading the document and choosing File Document Template Organizer then double clicking the document As soon as you load or open this document the configuration saved therein becomes active The global default configuration is restored when you load or open another document that does not contain custom configuration information You can select manual settings at any time by choosing Tools Configure and clicking the Reset button 406 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Changing Icon Views You can change the icon view between flat icons and 3D icons 1 Choose Tools Options StarOffice 2 In the View register unmark Flat buttons 3 Click OK to confirm the new settings and close the dialog The Flat buttons check b
98. way You can also filter them by the descriptions Wildcards as with regular expres sions in the Find amp Replace dialog are permitted when entering the filter Text document changes that have not yet been accepted are displayed in the list Changes that have been accepted are removed from the list and appear in the text without any further marking Spreadsheet changes that have been accepted are combined in the list in a single entry so that you can continue to see which changes have already been accepted Color coded entries inform you about the result of the filter that is set Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria but have subentries that are included by the filter Gray entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion Green entries do match the filter but in spite of this cannot be accepted or rejected Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 397 Comparing Versions of a Document Perhaps one of the authors who received a copy of your document made changes but did not record them by choosing Edit Changes Record You can compare the delivered copy of the document with your original document Open your original document and then choose Edit Compare Document You see a file selection dialog where you can select the copy of the document Confirm the dialog Now StarOffice combines
99. with OK Overview Your portfolio management template consists of three components the actual portfolio overview the representation of individual movements i e transactions and the fees charged for each transaction In order to work with the stocks manager you first have to enter a few values in your portfolio For the purposes of this description we use the shares from Airtrans Inc ticker number 123456 price 18 300 shares Buying Shares It is easy to apply this transaction to the portfolio overview using this template Click the Buy Shares button Enter the sample values in the boxes for the name of the stock the ticker symbol the quantity and price Confirm your entries with OK A new line is created for this transaction in the portfolio overview where you can see all the pertinent figures A new line is created on the Movements tab D When buying and selling shares you can take shares at the buying price of zero e g free shares or shares at the selling price of zero into account in your port folio overview You will be alerted to this via a separate dialog 268 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Portfolio Overview The portfolio overview gives you a current overview of all individual positions in your portfolio This tab page contains the following columns Column Header Explanation Name This column displays the name and or ticker symbol for the stock
100. words from the spellcheck 1 Select the words 2 Open the context menu of one of the words 3 Choose Character 4 Choose Format Character Font tab 5 Now select the language None Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 169 Removing Words From User Defined Dictionaries 1 Choose Tools Options Language Settings Writing Aids tab 2 Select the user defined dictionary and click Edit 3 Now you will see the Edit User Defined Dictionary dialog in which you can search through an alphabetic list 4 Select the word and click on Delete Hyphenation You can carry out hyphenation in text documents either automatically or manually Automatic hyphenation is an attribute of paragraphs and Paragraph Styles This means that you can switch the hyphenation on or off for a paragraph or for a paragraph format and select its properties Manual hyphenation gives you individual control but is time consuming Automatic hyphenation Automatic hyphenation is turned off by default 1 If you want to switch on hyphenation for one or more selected paragraphs open the context menu and select paragraph If you want to switch on hyphenation for all paragraphs formatted with a certain Paragraph Style open the context menu in one of the paragraphs and select Edit Paragraph Style To use hyphenation in all paragraphs edit the Default Paragraph Style from which the other Paragraph Styles are derived 2 In
101. 002 Moving Text Drawing Lines If you want your text to look good as well as read well you can customize its appearance for maximum impact Inserting Editing and Linking Text Frames Inserting Text Frames Place the text in a text frame On the Insert floating toolbar you can use the Insert Frame Manually icon to do this To insert text in a text frame after you have already typed it in proceed as follows 1 Select the text that is to be in the frame 2 i Long click the Insert icon on the main toolbar and open its floating toolbar On the Insert floating toolbar press the mouse button on the Insert frame manually icon While still pressing the mouse button move the pointer down a bit and select the desired amount of columns by highlighting them in the window that appears Release the mouse button when you have selected the desired number 3 Ifyou now move the mouse cursor into the text document a cross hair symbol indicates that you can drag open a frame If you decide not to do so press the Escape key to change the cursor back to a text cursor again 4 With the crosshairs create a selection frame which defines the new location for the paragraph The selected text is now automatically deleted from the normal continuous text and inserted in a text frame Click the edge of the text frame to select it You can recognize a selected text frame by the eight handles that appear four of which are located in the corners
102. 5 The year in the date details is often stated as two digits Internally the year is managed by StarOffice as four digits so that in the calculation of difference from 1 1 99 to 1 1 01 the result will correctly be two years Under Tools Options StarOffice General you can define up to which year a two digit year xx should be displayed as 20xx This means that if you enter a date of 1 1 30 or higher it will be treated internally as 1 1 1930 or higher All lower years apply to the next century So for example 1 1 20 is converted into 1 1 2020 Formatting Cells and Sheets The distinction between direct and Style formatting holds true for cells as well as for text documents You have the choice for instance between applying a particular font size directly as direct formatting to a cell or defining a Style to apply the desired font size For documents which you expect to work with exten sively it makes sense to use Styles It does not make sense to use Styles for docu ments you only print and discard Using AutoFormat for Tables A quick way to format a table or a cell range is offered by the Format AutoFormat function In your spreadsheet first select the cells to which you want to apply AutoFormatting including the column and row headers and any sum rows or columns At least 3x3 cells must be marked before this menu item is acti vated Then start the AutoFormat dialog AutoFormat Peg a Cancel Jan Fen d North
103. 54 DEPARTMPADDRESS C 254 CITY C 254 STAPOSTALCOPC Ms Patricia Fisher PTH TV 2345 1st St NW Washington DC 20001 3456 L F3 Imr Alan Brown Houseware Inc Controlling 123 Main Street Kissimmee FL 34742 2354 FF Ms Julie Clark ICM ES Mr Peter Smith Motor Works Ltd Sales 1234 Amsterdam Ave New York NY 10025 1234 The first row provides information on the type and length of the individual data fields This information is contained as dBase header in the file When saving a StarOffice Calc sheet with the file type dBase the first row of data is used to create the header information Before working on the data in the spreadsheet we would like to introduce the second method for transferring selected records from the data source view to the StarOffice Calc spreadsheet Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 243 Dragging and Dropping Copies into Spreadsheets This method works with all formats and you have the choice of transferring all or only selected records into the spreadsheet document To use this method you first need to log into the data source in StarOffice 1 Choose Tools Data Sources 2 You will see the Data Source Administration dialog Click New Data Source 3 In the Database type field select dBase to log into a dBase database Click the button and select the folder containing the database file s in dbf format Click OK 4 Inthe Name field enter a name to be displayed for the data sou
104. 6 merging 141 147 references 220 referencing 226 splitting 141 147 time formats 211 validity 258 Cells in Number Format 207 central documents 132 changes accepting or rejecting 396 comparing 398 marking 396 protecting 400 recording 396 399 changing headers 162 Styles 85 toolbars 404 changing page numbers 86 changing size of text frames 107 chapter information headers 160 chapter names in headers 160 chapters finding 75 ordering 75 chapters and sub chapters 115 characters adding special 66 converting to curves 339 uppercase or lowercase 73 Index 443 Character Styles creating 83 charts bars with texture 235 changing valuesin 232 editing axes 235 editing legends 234 editing titles 234 inserting in text 157 labeling 152 marking 231 selecting 231 selecting types 232 Statistics 233 checking automatic 101 169 for validity 258 circle segments drawing 331 clipboard in drawings and presentations 307 color defining 354 not printing in 41 saving and exporting 354 color bar 353 Colored Backgrounds 189 colored shading forcolumns 277 color filter 233 colors color models 354 fill format 68 412 replacing 355 column headers in database ranges 238 columns freezing 278 inserting in text tables 148 multicolumn texts 76 444 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 on text pages 76 repeating when printing 263 Columns 185 Combination Chart 233 combining cell ranges 250 objec
105. 7 text formats copying and pasting 98 databases 379 text frames 108 332 text frames enlarging reducing 107 inserting 107 labeling 152 linking 107 linking for text flow 188 moving 107 scaling 107 text input fields 423 text object bar 84 text sections copying 74 editing 78 moving 74 text tables calculating 147 enlarging cellsin 149 inserting rows or columnsin 148 textures on chart bars 235 thesaurus related words 172 times in cells 211 Tips 23 title bar overview 27 title rows printing on all sheets 263 titles in charts 234 toolbars customizing 403 editing 404 floating toolbars 28 matching 404 moving 404 moving icons 404 overview 28 removing icons 404 separating dashesin 403 totals in text tables 147 turning off automatic correction Writer 100 TWAIN drivers integrating 402 U underlining changing automatically 100 units measurement units 407 unknown words spellchecking 401 updating tables of contents 120 templates 411 updating from selections Stylist 98 uppercase letters changing automatically 100 text 73 URL in Calc 228 user defined colors 354 user defined dictionaries removing words from 170 user defined indexes creating 121 Using texture 360 V validity cell contents 258 defining 279 values changing in a chart 232 consolidating 250 in spreadsheets 203 limiting on input 258 Index 461 vector graphics generating from bitmaps 337 vectorizing bitmaps 337 version
106. 7 scanner commands integrating 402 scanning graphics 156 scenarios creating 258 using 257 screen refreshing 330 searching for attributes 55 for formats 56 fuzzy search 56 Paragraph Styles 55 with wildcards 54 section changes 86 sections columnsin 76 editing 78 inserting 77 ordering 75 remarks 76 sectors drawing 331 segments 331 segments drawing 331 selecting hidden objects 302 multiple spreadsheets 213 text 63 selection of text 65 sending AutoAbstract in presentations 395 documents as e mail 38 documents as faxes 405 outlines in presentations 395 separating dashes in toolbars 403 separation hyphenation 170 separators conditional 66 setting and jumping to reminders 116 sheet areas filling 431 sheet grids printing 261 sheet names 202 sheet references to other documents 228 sheets appending 202 AutoFormat 218 HTML 264 inserting 202 printing 262 263 printing details 261 renaming 202 showing multiple 213 sheet tabs 213 shortcut keys for drawings 438 general 422 in spreadsheets 431 in text documents 426 presentation documents 435 similarity search 56 size changing of object 328 slide layout and structure 299 slides arranging 295 changing the background 298 printing 304 slide table arranging slides 295 slide transitions 300 Index 457 snap grids using 321 snap lines using 370 sorting database ranges 239 sort list 266 spaces protected 66 spacing endnotes footnotes 16
107. 7 special characters inserting 66 spellcheck automatic 44 101 169 dialog 168 disabling 101 169 multilingual 45 starting 46 Spellcheck exclusion 46 spellchecking unknown words 401 spelling thesaurus 172 Spreadsheet format numbers 219 Spreadsheet format text 219 spreadsheet cells referencing 226 spreadsheets addressing cellsin 220 calculating 203 cell referencing 226 copying 275 copying areas to text documents 150 394 filling from data source browser 242 formatting 215 220 layouts for 218 marking 213 saving automatically 35 458 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 selecting 213 shortcut keysin 431 used as databases 236 spreadsheet values 203 StarOffice configuring 401 StarOffice 6 0 Quickstarter 25 StarOffice Calc 197 databases 236 StarOffice Draw 323 StarOffice Help 22 StarOffice Impress 285 StarOffice Writer 57 starting StarOffice 25 statistical values charts 233 stickers from database 181 stock portfolio 267 Styles 78 changing 85 conceptof 79 copying 98 99 creating 83 creating from selections 97 editing 81 example for creating 83 importing 99 loading 99 remarks 96 replacing 55 searching 55 Stylist 80 transferring 98 types 82 updating automatically 86 updating from selections 98 Stylist advantages 85 creating new styles from selections 97 styles 80 updating from selections 98 subscript text 72 subsidiary documents 132 subtotals database
108. Character Font Effects tab and under Effects select Capitals Display in lowercase Select the text and choose Format Character Font Effects tab and under Effects select Lowercase Convert to uppercase Select text then choose Format Case Characters Uppercase Convert to lowercase Select text then choose Format Case Characters Lowercase Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 73 Moving Text Sections in Documents 1 Select the text that you want to move 2 Place the mouse pointer in the selected text then press the mouse button and keep it pressed 3 Drag the mouse until a symbol appears next to the pointer indicating that the selected area will be moved In addition a gray text cursor moves with the mouse pointer indicating where the selection is to be inserted Mouse Pointer Shape Meaning R Moving h Copyin pyns If you do not want to move the text but rather only copy it press Ctrl while performing this action This is indicated by a plus sign next to the mouse pointer You can press and release the Ctrl key as often as you like the action applies to the condition prevailing at the time you released the mouse button Resetting Font Attributes While Typing You may want to apply direct formatting while you are typing text After that you may want to reset all formatting and continue entering text in the default format Enter the text using direct character format
109. Document Calculate Remove the check in the check box in front of Automatically find column and row labels You can also define the names yourself with Insert Names Labels To have names automatically recognized the names must consist of alphanu meric characters and the first character must be a letter If you want to use non alphanumeric characters including spaces enclose the names in single quota tion marks If a single quotation mark appears in a name e g Jan 97 you have to enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark Jan 97 This type of referencing is not compatible with earlier versions of StarOffice StarOffice automatically recognizes an area usually referred to as a range of cells that belong together To determine which cells make up a particular range place the cell cursor in the desired range and press Ctrl Use the from the numerical key pad The range will be highlighted Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 223 Only Copy Visible Cells Assume you have hidden a few rows or columns in a cell range Now you want to copy only the visible cells StarOffice behaves differently depending on how you hid the invisible cells and what you intend to do with them Method Result Cells were filtered out by way of AutoFilters Only the visible cells are default filters or special filters copied Copy the visible cells for example with copy and paste via the clipboard with
110. Edition Text VARCHAR Editor Text VARCHAR Howpublish Text VARCHAR institut Text VARCHAR E Journal Text VARCHAR Month Text VARCHAR Note Text VARCHAR E Number Text VARCHAR Oroanizat Text VARCHAR 1 s id Field Properties Length 5o Default value OSOS Format example FN If you wish you can also enter an optional Description for each field The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view Field Properties Enter properties for each selected data field Depending on the database type it is possible that not all input facilities are available In the Default box enter the contents that you want to have entered for every new record This can of course be subsequently modified In the Entry required box specify whether or not the field may remain empty No matter which field type a list box provides the available types If you want to change the name or type of a data field subsequently please note that the table itself many not be opened during this modification only the design view may be opened Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 381 Form Design Any StarOffice document can be expanded into a form Simply add one or more form functions Form Functions O H Aa C EE GS ee el 2 7 122 Gy A i et oe Ee eye ie Ab E The Form icon of the main toolbar opens a floating toolbar by long clicking the icon
111. Formatting a Frame Put the cursor in the frame deselect the frame first then click inside it and enter your text or graphics The appearance and properties of the frame can of course be modified at any time Select the frame by clicking it call up the context menu and click Frame A dialog with several tabs will appear where you can for example on the Borders tab apply a colored shadow to the frame 186 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Anchoring Frames In the Frame dialog click the Type tab and select the type of anchor under the heading Anchor to If the frame is to always remain on the same page which is important for a table of contents for example select Page If you want the frame to flow with the text e g for small symbols which always appear in the margin accompanying a certain word in the text select To Character If in flowing text the frame should move with the text as a character select As Character To anchor a frame to a specific paragraph select Paragraph You can specify the type of anchor via the context menu Alternatively click the Change Anchor icon in the Object bar to quickly change the anchor Defining a Frame Wrap To define the frame wrap open the Frame dialog context menu Frame and click the Wrap tab Select the desired wrap style and under Spacing define the spacing between the frame and text Finally select the option First Paragraph The First Paragraph field or t
112. In as stand alone words in the text will be found Words like bin or chin will not be found if this check box is selected If you are searching for regular expressions or Styles do not select this option Match Case When this check box is selected the search is case sensitive to uppercase and lowercase letters So if you search for in it will be found but not the word In You can combine a Match case search with the Whole words only option Searching for Text With Wildcards 1 Call the Find amp Replace dialog using Ctrl F 2 Mark the Regular expressions check box 3 Enter the search term with the desired wildcards and click Find Regular expressions are shown in a form that should be familiar to Unix command line users The wildcard for any number of a given character is the character itself followed by an asterisk For example If you enter Hawai as the search word this means than any number of i s may occur after Hawa but do not have to The words Hawa Hawai and Hawaii will be found The wildcard for a single character is the period This is equivalent to the wild card in file names The wildcard for several characters in succession is period and asterisk This is equivalent to the wildcard in file names A paragraph end can be found with the dollar sign and the first character at the beginning of a paragraph with the string caret and period You can only search
113. Insert Slide from the context menu of the slide tab area In the Insert Slide dialog you can assign a name to the new slide and define a layout Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 313 If you want to delete a slide click the tab at the bottom of the work area to activate it and open the context menu Choose Delete Slide Confirm the subsequent warning with Yes to delete the slide To rename a slide activate the respective slide by clicking the name on the tab then press the Alt key and click the slide name again The old name will be selected and can then be overwritten Creating and Printing Handouts If you want to provide handouts to help the audience follow your presentation you can use the Handout View mode Since the handouts contain both the indi vidual slides and space for notes they can be a very helpful presentation aid In the vertical scroll bar click the Handout View icon Open the Modify Slide dialog via the context menu Slide Modify Slide to specify how many slides are printed on a single sheet of paper Modify Slide ane Handouts Cancel Select an AutoLayout Help Four Slides mMeglay M Eackground ma Ubert of backgroud Click OK to create the handouts To print them choose File Print and click Options to open a further window in which you then decide how the handout should be printed 314 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Organizing and Print
114. M o y E 23 10 00 r CN a oe e T oo 10 Transparent Transparency 0 0 00 z o o a The Eyedropper can replace selected colors and to a point similar colors with other colors You can replace up to four colors at one time If you do not like the replacement you can reverse it with one click on Undo on the function bar Use the Eyedropper to match the colors of different bitmaps or to redo a bitmap with the colors of your company logo Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 355 The Transparency attribute also serves as a color You can replace the transpar ency in an image with a color for example with white This is helpful if for example your printer driver is having problems with printing transparent graphics If you want to produce an image on HTML pages to publish in the internet like the illustration of a product for example it usually looks better when you do not see a rectangular picture but rather only the illustration of the product which is then seen against the uniform background of the web page If there is a white background in the picture behind the product use the Eyedropper to replace the color white with Transparent i e no color and save and or export the image in a format that supports the transparency attribute such as GIF When using this method be sure that the illustration of the product itself does not contain any white parts since these would also become transparen
115. Pilot table is to be created from the list box Results to If the required output area does not have a name enter the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area into the field to the right of the list box 248 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Results to You can also click on the appropriate cell with the mouse to have the coordinates entered accordingly If you activate the check box Ignore empty rows they will not be taken into account when the DataPilot table is created If the check box Identify categories is activated the categories will be recognized by means of their headings and assigned accordingly when the DataPilot table is created Editing DataPilot Tables Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer By dragging the button to a different position in the row you can alter the order of the columns If you drag a button from the row to the left edge of the table into the line headings area you can change a column into a row The mouse pointer alters its appearance from the icon for a column heading to that of a line heading To remove a button from the table just drag it out of the table Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a not allowed icon The button is deleted By double clicking on the name of a table element you can hide or show the me
116. Please note however that this function requires a lot of memory space especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly 386 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Copying and Moving Data Using Drag and Drop The easiest way to copy and move data in StarOffice is by drag and drop with the mouse Dragging and Dropping Within a StarOffice Document There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag and drop Selected text text areas draw objects graphics buttons and other form functions hyperlinks table areas and many more can be moved with the mouse Pay attention when dragging using the mouse pointer The mouse pointer shows a plus sign when copying and an arrow when making a link or hyperlink Mouse Pointer Description R Moving Copying h Creating a link gi If you press Ctrl or Shift Ctrl when releasing the mouse button you can usually influence whether the item is copied moved or a link is created Drag objects out of the Navigator in the submenu of the Drag Mode icon specify whether to copy the object insert it as a link or insert it as a hyper link You can cancel a drag and drop operation in StarOffice at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 387 Inserting Objects From the Gallery You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link A cop
117. Polygon In StarOffice Draw choose the command from the Modify menu In StarOffice Impress from the context menu of the selected object In the Convert to Polygon dialog you can set some parameters for the conver sion and preview the result Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 337 Convert to Polygon Settings Number of colors b Point reduction eree Cancel Fill holes Help TWe size 22 Pixel l Preview Ok mau Source picture Wectorized image Progress 3 Clicking on OK replaces the selected bitmap with a vector graphic in a MetaFile format 338 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Converting Text Characters to Curves 1 T Type the text letters or special characters in a StarOffice Draw document Select an adequate font size and a suitable font type so that you do not have to do an unnecessary amount of editing To enter text use the Text icon from the Text floating toolbar on the main toolbar 2 imay With the text object still selected choose the command Modify Convert to Curve The text is converted to a vector object that can be edited 3 ie If your text consists of more than one character the characters will be displayed as a grouped object To edit a single character you have to enter the group To do this use the Enter Group command in the context menu of the group or press F3 Then click the character you want to edit 4 Now click the Edit Points icon on t
118. S Ro SUN microsystems StarOffice 6 0 Sun Microsystems Inc 901 San Antonio Road Palo Alto CA 94303 U S A 650 960 1300 Part No 816 4283 10 March 2002 Revision A User s Guide Copyrights and Trademarks Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems Inc 901 San Antonio Road Palo Alto California 94303 U S A All rights reserved Sun Microsystems Inc has intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in the product that is described in this document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed at http www sun com patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and in other countries This document and the product to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use copying distribution and decompilation No part of the product or of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Third party software including font technology is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers This product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group The FreeType Project and the Catharon Typography Project Portions Copyright 2000 SuSE Inc Word for Word Copyright 1996 Inso Corp International CorrectSpell spelling correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V A
119. Second Revised Edition Copyright Macquarie University NSW Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohib ited International CorrectSpell Catalan correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from Catalan word list Copyright 1992 Universitat de Barcelona Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Czech correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from word list supplied by Jan Hajic Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Finnish correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from word list supplied by University of Helsinki Institute for Finnish Language and Dr Kolbjorn Heggstad Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell German correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from word list supplied by Langenscheidt K G Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Italian correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from word list supplied by Zanichelli S p A Reproduc
120. Settings Writing Aids When you proofread your text the wavy underlines will draw your attention to possible spelling mistakes Of course the Spellcheck function won t be able to catch spelling mistakes that form other recognizable words such as fun instead of run As long as the automatic spellcheck is activated the red markings can be seen on the screen but will not be printed the pga Tole betas eke darted off to the left and almost TaS h can lying in the middle of the way ale ness and suddenly stiffened it w the wal Spellcheck steps got louder and louder he s around Add the and of the lne he thought pre trying 1 Ignore All sible in the dark was all that pla rippin aa alleys f he could smell the f next to him with abately alley queak a door swung lt Could this be the haven he d prayed for Slowly he slid tow more inte the wall inte the dark away from his enemy Wo alley The easiest way to correct a red underlined word is to right click it This opens a context menu that offers you several alternative words to choose from If you click one of the alternatives the red underlined word will be replaced with the alterna 44 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 tive If you want to include the red underlined word in your user dictionary because it is correctly typed you can do this via the context menu as well When you replace a red underlined word with a suggestion from the spellcheck via th
121. Sheets in HTML 264 Formulas and Values as CSV File 265 AutoFill 266 Applying Sort Lists 266 Automatically Calculating Rows 266 12 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide Managing Your Stock Portfolio 267 Selecting the Currency 268 Overview 268 Buying Shares 268 Portfolio Overview 269 Internet Update 270 History Only for US Dollars 270 Dividend Payment 270 Selling Shares 271 Stock Split 271 Movements 272 Brokerage Fees 273 Completing the Stocks Document 273 Further Information 275 Shift Plan Duty Roster 276 Creating a Shift Plan witha Template 276 Creating Individual Shift Plans 277 Further Information 280 Calendar 281 Creating a Calendar witha Template 282 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 285 The StarOffice Calc Window 286 A Basic Presentation 287 Creating a Presentation With the AutoPilot 288 Creating a Simple Presentation Without the AutoPilot Switching Presentation Views 295 Arranging Slides 295 Incorporating Slide Show Effects 296 Showing a Presentation 296 Editing a Presentation 297 293 Contents 13 Defining Background Colors 297 Switching Page Styles 298 Presentation Styles 298 Slide Transitions Effects and Animation 300 Individual Presentations 302 Exporting Printing and Presenting 304 Printing a Presentation Slide 304 Exchanging Data via the Clipboard 307 Business Report 307 Creating a Business Report in Presentation Form 307 Creating a Slide Show 311 Further Information 312 Presenting a Pro
122. Style and the formatting of the current paragraph changes accordingly If you want to format a paragraph as a heading for example here is how to do it 1 Type the line to be formatted as a heading and press the Enter key 2 Set the cursor in the line 80 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 Open the Stylist for example by pressing the F11 key 4 Double click the Paragraph Style Heading 1 This one paragraph now has the paragraph format Heading 1 If you want to know which attributes are included in this paragraph format click Heading 1 in the Stylist then right click to open the context menu Then choose Modify to open the Paragraph Style Heading 1 dialog which tells you everything about the prop erties of this Paragraph Style If you don t want to modify this Paragraph Style close the dialog by clicking the Cancel button But if you want to modify this Paragraph Style define the corre sponding modifications and close the dialog with the OK button These modified settings will now apply to all paragraphs old and new having the Heading 1 Paragraph Style You can also apply the changes to all Paragraph Styles that are derived from the Paragraph Style Heading 1 The Paragraph Styles Heading 1 to Heading 10 are all hierarchically derived from the Paragraph Style Heading If you switch to a hierarchical view in the Stylist by selecting Hierarchical from the list box at the bottom of the Stylist you ca
123. Table in the context menu of the selected cells 3 Inthe Table Format dialog click the Background tab Table Format Table Text Flow Columns Borders Background E BERRET g nN Mo Fill Cancel Help Reset Notice the two list boxes at the top of the dialog In the left box you can choose a color or graphics as the background In the right box you can define whether to apply the background to the selected cells the whole row or the entire table Cell formatting takes priority over row formatting 4 Click OK when you have made your choice You can design your tables with even greater impact using thematically appro priate backgrounds Background colors and graphics are always inserted behind text and values in a table Graphics and other objects can also be inserted into the table 1 Place your cursor in the cell where you want the object to appear 2 To insert graphics choose Insert Graphics From File 142 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 In the Insert Graphics dialog select the desired graphics file Click Open 4 Click on the inserted graphic object and select the Graphics command in the context menu or double click on the graphic object In the Graphic dialog you can define various settings for the graphic and its function in the docu ment For example you can define a text wrap and determine if the text should flow around the graphic object and on w
124. a StarOffice Calc document position the cursor in the cell starting from which you want to insert the external data 2 Choose Insert External Data The External Data dialog appears 3 In the dialog enter the URL of the document or Web page Write the URL in the following way fictional example http www my bank com table html You can enter a file name from the local or network file system in the usual way i e like in the File Open dialog StarOffice loads the Web page or file in the background that is without displaying it In the large list box of the External Data dialog you can see the name of all the sheets or areas you can choose from 4 Select one or more sheets or areas if you want activate the automatic update function every n minutes and click OK The contents will be inserted as a link in the StarOffice Calc document 5 Save your spreadsheet When you open it again later StarOffice Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry 6 Under Tools Options Spreadsheet General you can choose to have the update when opened automatically carried out either always upon request or never The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit Links In the sample spreadsheets in StarOffice you will find a currency converter that downloads the current exchange rates from the Internet Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 229 Using Charts Data from spreadsheets can be re
125. a hand symbol you can simply click the graphic to select it 4 Once the graphic is selected release the mouse button Click again on the graphic image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds to copy the graphic image to an internal memory 5 Without releasing the mouse button drag the graphic into the Gallery Draw objects that you have created with the Draw functions floating toolbar cannot be incorporated in the gallery 390 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Copying Graphics Between Documents You can copy a graphic from one document to another by drag and drop If you plan to publish your document please observe copyright laws and for safety obtain the consent of the authors of the original 1 2 J Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic Click the graphic while pressing the Alt key to select it without executing any hyperlinks it may refer to Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to your clipboard Drag the graphic into the other document If the documents are not visible side by side first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document Keep the mouse button pressed The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor indicates the positi
126. a page break whether you enter it manually or it occurs auto matically the Next Style will be taken as the Page Style In the example described here for the Page Style Title page you can select the Next Style Table of Contents The Table of Contents Page Style is then always applied to the next page after the title page This saves you from having to go through the procedure described below involving the Manual Break dialog Please note that you should always choose the Table of Contents Page Style as the Next Style to follow the Table of Contents since you cannot be sure how many pages long your Table of Contents will be Now place the cursor at the beginning of the page where the Table of Contents should begin Go ahead and enter a manual page break with a change of Page Styles Choose Insert Manual Break The Insert Break dialog appears Select as Type the Page break option In the list box select the Table of Contents Page Style which will then begin at this point in your document Click OK Place the cursor at the beginning of the first line in your main text Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 89 6 Choose Insert Manual Break The Insert Break dialog appears Insert Break Type Line break iC Column break Cancel i Page break ddi Help Style Main Text 7 Select as Type the Page break option In the combo box select the Main text Page Style which should be applied after t
127. a printer or first print them to a file that you then copy to a printer With StarOffice Impress Player you can also run your presentation on a computer on which StarOffice is not installed Printing a Presentation Slide In StarOffice you can easily print the current document by clicking the Print File Directly icon in the function bar It will be printed immediately according to the printer default settings without a dialog appearing There is an exception in text documents when you have selected a certain area of text In this case a dialog will appear after you have clicked the Print icon This dialog asks you to confirm if you want to print the whole text or only the selected area When you print via the Print dialog StarOffice lets you choose whether to print only a selected range of pages only certain pages identified by their page numbers or all pages of the document Take a look at the print dialog which you can open with File Print or by pressing Ctrl P Print Printer Name Merox DocuPrint M24 NS2 N40 P52 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type xerox DocuPrint Natas Mg P52 Location Iprz Comment I Print to file P Print range J AAH Copies i All Number of copies fi i Pages fi Je J colate o Selection Options Cancel Help 304 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The appearance of the Print dialog may vary according to the selected printer However you will al
128. adsheet and only then look for help or select the help you need from the combo box at the top of the Help window The combo box at the top of the Help window sets the search function to the current section 22 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Tips Tips should always be switched on in the Help menu Tips should be marked Then for example when you let the mouse pointer rest on an icon you will see its name displayed You can see tips in a lot of other places in StarOffice besides For example when you scroll through a table the tip shows you the row or column Turning tips on and off Choose Help Tips Extended Tips At least for the first few weeks you use StarOffice we recommend that you switch on the Extended Tips Long click here to open the floating toolbar py containing various functions for inserting frames Graphics tables and other objects A short click activates the tool shown as icon This gives you a brief description of each item on the screen when you allow the mouse pointer to rest there for a moment Chapter 1 StarOffice Documentation and Help 23 Turning extended tips on and off Choose Help Extended Tips to turn extended tips on and off The command is marked if the Extended Tips function is switched on Rg Press Shift F1 to turn Extended Tips on temporarily The pointer turns into the Extended Tips pointer You now see the Extended Tips for any element on the
129. ag and drop 1 Choose the type of Style to be used Paragraph Style Character Style etc by clicking the corresponding icon at the top of the Stylist 2 Select that part of the paragraph text or object which is to form the basis of the new Style 3 Drag this to the main Stylist area and release the mouse button over a free area when the insertion line is no longer visible Transferring Formats With Fill Format Mode Applying a new Style in Fill Format Mode 1 Open the Stylist 2 In the Stylist select the Style you want to copy 3 Click the Fill Format Mode icon 4 Position the watering can on the object to apply the Style currently selected and press the mouse button There is an exception to this procedure when applying a Character Style in the Fill Format Mode select the character with the mouse watering can while holding down the mouse button instead of only clicking To quit the fill format mode click the icon again or press Esc If the watering can icon is activated a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last watering can action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep t Updating Styles From Selections This is how to update a Style 1 Open the Stylist 2 In the document select a formatted text or paragraph the format of which you want to adopt as a Style 98 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 In the Stylist select the Style you
130. again If the Show Logo check box is marked you will have the Created with StarOffice logo displayed on the pause page The Default presentation type runs the presentation from beginning to end with manual slide transition e g by mouse click 8 Click Next 290 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 AutoPilot Presentation Introducing a New Product Describe your basic ideas What is your name or the name of your company a What is the subject of your presentation a Further ideas to be presented Help Cancel sa Back Enter additional text which you want to have appear in your presentation on page four Click Next On the fifth and final page of the AutoPilot you can determine the number of the slides you want to have in your presentation You also see the list of names of all the slides in your presentation If there are some slides you want to remove from your presentation click the Page icon with the green check mark next to the name The check mark will disappear which indicates that that slide will not be included in your presentation You can reverse this action by clicking the page icon again Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 291 AutoPilot Presentation Introducing a New Product Choose your pages introducing a New Produc aleh Long term Goal Ei Customer Wishes aleh Fulfilling Customer Meeds Ei Cost Analysis Ei Strengths and Advantages Ei Next St
131. age of using a field You can save the form letter as a template and if you later want to write a new form letter based on that template the date will automatically be updated Ifyou choose the variable date the date will be updated every time you open or print the document Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 175 Apart from the date there are various other fields which you can also use in your form letter The most important fields are the ones which determine where the different elements of the recipient s address are to be placed These fields have a direct connection to the database table which contains your address list A field will be inserted in the form letter for each data field i e name street city etc When printing StarOffice Writer inserts the desired data fields in the fields for each record If you want to create a completely new document containing the necessary form letter fields you can use drag and drop to do so Open the text document and press F4 to show the desired database table Point to a column header and holding down the mouse button drag it into the document The field for inserting this item from this database table is automatically placed in the docu ment Choose File New Templates and Documents to open a document based on the Elegant Letter template from the Business Correspondence category A form letter based on the Elegant Letter template will be displayed I
132. ail E Apply to all similar texts E Match caise E whole words arily 1 To edit an entry place the cursor immediately before or inside this entry 2 Then choose Edit Index Entry 3 You can alter the text in the Entry text box 4 Click on the Delete button to delete this entry from the list If you modified the displayed text of the entry the altered text will be inserted into the generated index You will now only see a thin gray mark in the document where the entry was If you want to edit an entry such as this place the cursor directly after the thin mark and choose Edit Index Entry Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Index Entry dialog to switch to the next or previous entry of the same index type Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 119 Creating a Table of Contents 1 Place the cursor where you want to create the table of contents 2 Choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables The Insert Index Table dialog appears Click the Index Table tab and select Table of Contents as Type the first time you start this dialog this tab page and type are already selected 3 Click on OK if you want to generate the table of contents from the headings and entries you have defined 4 If you want to insert additional paragraphs of another Paragraph Style into the table of contents mark the Additional Styles check box and click the icon next to the box A dialog will open where you can defin
133. ain a b c contain one of the specified expressions a b c TRUE TRUE has the value the field name has the True value True FALSE FALSE has the value the field name has the false value false Examples Ms returns field names with the field content Ms LIKE H llo returns field names with field content such as give and gave LIKE S returns data fields with field contents such as Sun BETWEEN 10 AND 20 returns field names with field content between the values 10 and 20 The fields can be either text fields or number fields IN 1 3 5 7 returns field names with the values 1 3 5 7 If the field name contains an item number for example you can create a query that returns the item having the specified number NOT IN Smith returns field names that do not contain Smith Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 385 Remarks about possible wildcards and operators can be found in the Help about Query Design If you enter filter conditions into several fields they will be joined by the Boolean AND lf on the filter bar you click the Apply filter icon the filtering is performed in the database You see the form bar and can navigate the habitats If you click on the button Close in the filter bar then the form will be displayed without a filter In the form view click the Apply Filter icon to change to the filtered view ii J The filters that have been set can be remo
134. ais International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Certaines parties ont t adapt es a partir du Dicionario Academico da Lingua Portuguesa Copyright 1992 de Porto Editora Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Acquisitions f d rales logiciel commercial les utilisateurs gouvernementaux sont soumis aux conditions g n rales standard de la licence LA DOCUMENTATION est fournie TELLE QUELLE et TOUTES LES CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU TACITES Y COMPRIS TOUTE GARANTIE TACITE CONCERNANT LA QUALITE MARCHANDE L APTITUDE A UN USAGE PARTICULIER OU LA NON VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS SERONT REJETEES EXCEPTE DANS LE CAS OU L EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DE TELLES GARANTIES NE SERAIT PAS AUTO RISEE PAR LA LEGISLATION EN VIGUEUR Contents StarOffice Documentation and Help 19 Using this Guide 19 Structure of this Guide 20 Icons and Conventions 21 Using the StarOffice Help 22 The StarOffice Help 22 Tips 23 Extended Tips 23 Help Agent 24 Working With StarOffice 25 The User Interface 25 Starting StarOffice 25 The StarOffice Writer Window 26 Opening and Saving Documents 31 Opening Documents 31 The Templates and Documents Dialog 33 Saving Documents 34 Changing Your Work Directory 35 Saving Documents Automatically 35 Printing a Document 39 Displaying Print Previews 40
135. al to the content of the field is identical to the indicated expression The operator will not be displayed in the query fields If you enter a value without any operator the operator will be automatically adopted lt gt not equal to the content of the field does not correspond to the specified expression gt greater than the content of the field is greater than the specified expression lt less than the content of the field is less than the specified expression gt greater thanor_ the content of the field is greater than or equal to the equal to specified expression lt less than or the content of the field is less than or equal to the equal to specified expression Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 383 StarOffice command SQL command Meaning Condition is satisfied if IS EMPTY IS NULL is null The field name is empty For Yes No fields with three states this command auto matically queries the undeter mined state neither Yes nor No IS NOT IS NOT NULL isnot empty the field name is not empty EMPTY LIKE LIKE is an element of the data field contains the A indicated expression The placeholder placeholder placeholder indicates whether for any for any number the expression x occurs at the number of of characters beginning of x at the end characters Placeholder _ for of x Orie the field placeholder exactly on
136. aleigh NC Richmond VA Savannah VA Portland OR Sacramento CA SalemOR San Francisco CA Seattle WA E a ka E EJ EA Ea EA Em Eeg Era EE KA EA mm EA em EH EA EA EA 28 a EA laik 230 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 This example shows the number of times people of different age groups in various cities go to the movie theater annually If you would rather put the age groups than the towns on the horizontal axis you can tilt the chart subsequently As long as the chart remains selected the main toolbar contains a Data in Columns icon Click on it You are free to make other changes to the individual elements of the chart You can either double click on the individual parts of the chart or with the chart selected choose the individual functions from the Format menu For example if you double click on the color preview in the legend you can automatically reformat all relevant data points On the other hand if you click on the back ground in the box of the legend you just format the background to the legend If you created the chart from the data of a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet the data series that you click on in the chart are highlighted of Suppose you placed the chart in your StarOffice Calc spreadsheet in the background and now you are wondering how to select it for further editing Open the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar and select the first t
137. all the parts Boolean OR 348 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shapes Subtract All other polygons selected are subtracted from the undermost polygon This entails the other poly gons first being merged and then subtracted from the polygon posi tioned under behind all the others Holes will be taken into account Logically this operation corresponds to the following formula You can also choose Shapes Subtract and Shapes Intersect to cut parts out of a bitmap for example The illustration shows examples A B1 Bn Shapes Intersect The selected polygons are joined into one single polygon that corresponds to the intersection area Boolean AND Only the area where all polygons overlap remains Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 349 Graphic Objects in Drawings and Presentations StarOffice Draw and Impress use a vector graphic format You can also insert pixel graphics or bitmap graphics into your presentations or drawings and export a document or certain sections of a document in a pixel graphic format Applying Text to Bitmaps To apply text to a pixel image in JPEG format for example follow these steps 1 Open a new drawing document 2 Insert the pixel image by choosing Insert Graphics 3 Deselect the image by clicking somewhere else in the document 4 Open the Text floating toolbar from the Main toolbar and select for example the Fit Text to
138. an display the differences between versions with color markings In the dialog to open a document you can select from a list box which version of this document you want to open 400 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Modifying and Customizing the User Interface of StarOffice You have a lot of freedom to configure menus toolbars and keys to suit your pref erences Configuring StarOffice You can customize your StarOffice to suit your needs You are free to change the items on the menu bar You can delete items add new ones copy items from one menu to another rename them and so on The toolbars may be freely configured You can drag and drop icons in Windows while holding down the Alt key You can change the shortcut keys as you want To change these choose Tools Configure to open the Configuration dialog Configuring the Keyboard You can add all unknown words in a text document to the active user dictionary with a single command However you yourself first have to assign the command to shortcut keys or to a separate icon 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools Configure The Configuration dialog appears 3 Select the Keyboard tab to specify a key combination Select the Toolbars tab to specify an icon for this function 4 Here we describe the procedure for modifying the shortcut keys To find out how to reconfigure a toolbar see the instructions for creating a fax icon 5 Select the To
139. and one in the middle of each side Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 107 Editing Text Frames Once you have selected a text frame you can change it by dragging and dropping with the mouse button pressed By dragging the edge not one of the handles you move the whole frame Dragging one of the handles changes the size of the frame The corner or side opposite the one you are dragging stays in the same place Dragging a handle on one of the sides enlarges or compresses the text frame in one direction only whereas dragging a corner handle enlarges or reduces it in both dimensions If you hold down the Shift key while dragging one of the eight handles the frame will retain the same proportions in other words the side ratios remain constant The options in the context menu of a selected frame allow you to make further adjustments Arrange O Left Anchor O Centered Wrap 0 Right Top per Caption m o Center 4 m 4 Cut Stra k ay Copy Stra C From the context menu of a text frame you can select for example the Alignment relative to other frames drawing objects graphics etc Use the Wrap submenu to choose whether and on what side the normal text of your document should wrap around the text frame Clicking on Frame in the context menu is the same as choosing Format Frame from the menu bar This opens a dialog giving you access to all properties of the frame The fu
140. anges combining 250 recognizing URLs AutoCorrect 48 recording changes 399 records dragging into spreadsheets 244 in spreadsheets 236 protecting 400 selecting 244 Index 455 red lines inmargins 399 redlining recording changes 396 reduced printing 41 reduced printing of multiple pages 41 references absolute relative 220 byname 222 calculating in text tables 146 in formulas 226 in table formulas 210 marking by color 220 master document 134 to cells 220 to multiple sheets 214 URL in cells 228 refreshing the screen 330 refs calculating in text tables 146 registering address books 375 Register true 184 regression curves charts 233 regular expressions 54 related words thesaurus 172 relative addresses tables 220 relative distribution of table cells 150 relative references tables 220 remarks on cells 212 Rename 202 renaming sheets 202 456 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 repeated columns printing 263 repeated rows printing 263 repeating table headings after page breaks 148 replacing styles 55 resetting fonts 74 review function comparing documents 398 recording changes 396 rotating objects 329 text 68 row calculating 266 rows inserting in text tables 148 repeating when printing 263 rulers default settings 410 inserting 158 measurement units 410 running titles headers 160 S saving configuration with document 406 documents 34 sheets in HTML 264 scaling text frames 10
141. aph Numbering or to the Paragraph Style Doing it this way ensures greater flexibility as you can exclude a paragraph from the line numbering or restart the numbering at a paragraph with any starting value Line Numbering for All Paragraphs 1 Choose Tools Line Numbering 2 Mark the Show Numbering check box Now all the paragraphs in the document will be numbered Line Numbering for Particular Paragraphs 1 Enable the line numbering for all paragraphs as described above 2 Open the Stylist and click the Default Paragraph Style 3 Right click to open the context menu where you then choose Modify The Paragraph Style Default dialog appears 4 Go to the Numbering tab page 5 Remove the mark in front of Include this paragraph in line numbering As all Paragraph Styles are derived from the Default Style no paragraph will be numbered unless a subordinate Paragraph Style was modified accordingly 6 In the document select all the paragraphs that are to be numbered 7 Choose Format Paragraph Numbering mark the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box and click OK Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 137 Tables in Text Calculating in Text You can have tables and spreadsheets in your text documents You can choose either normal text tables or spreadsheets imported from StarOffice Calc using drag and drop or from a data source view Inserting Tables There are various ways of insert
142. aphs tables and other objects in two places Choose Format object name Borders Borders floating toolbar on the object bar if the object is selected does not apply to all objects Choose Format from the menu bar Borders tab page To set a border you can also use the Borders icon on the object bar This opens a floating toolbar from which you can select predefined borders Icon on the Object Bar CI Border Floating Toolbar The border is previewed in the lower field The four outer edges are marked in this field with small angles To edit an outer margin click in the appropriate position between the small angles For tables there are two additional pairs of brackets indicating the horizontal and vertical lines between cells Click in the center of the preview field to define a border for both horizontal and vertical lines The selected border elements will be indicated by black triangles If you now choose a line style or a color it will be applied to the selected part of the border If you select an empty line in the preview that is to say if of the three conditions Line Gray Line and No Line the condition No Line appears this means that the relevant part of the border will be deleted Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 69 Clicking repeatedly on an element in the Borders dialog will switch between three alternative modes The element is displayed as a Clicking OK will apply
143. aphs down one paragraph Tab The heading in format Heading X X 1 9 is moved down one level in the outline Shift Tab The heading in format Heading X X 2 10 is moved up one level in the outline Ctrl Tab At the start of a heading Inserts a tab stop To change the heading level with the keyboard first position the cursor in front of the heading Shortcut Keys in Tables Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl A If the active cell is empty selects the whole table Otherwise selects the contents of the active cell Pressing again selects the entire table Ctrl Pos1 If the active cell is empty goes to the beginning of the table Otherwise first press goes to beginning of the active cell second press goes to beginning of the current table third press goes to beginning of document Ctrl End If the active cell is empty goes to the end of the table Other wise first press goes to the end of the active cell second press goes to the end of the current table third press goes to the end of the document Ctrl Tab Inserts a tab stop only in tables Ctrl Shift Arrow Up Start of table Ctrl Shift Arrow Down End of table Alt Arrow Keys Increases decreases the size of the column row on the right bottom cell edge Alt Shift Arrow Keys Increase decrease the size of the column row on the left top cell edge Alt Ctrl Arrow Keys Like Alt but only the active cell is modified Chapter 8 Appendix 429
144. appear at the bottom of the screen Click the tab of the slide you want to edit e g Over view and then click the Outline View icon above the vertical scroll bar 308 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Entering Text in the Outline View To establish an outline use the Outline View mode With the icons in the object bar you can either promote or demote an outline point one level or move it up or down in the hierarchy You can also use icons in the main toolbar to determine which outline levels you want to have displayed In the Outline view all slides in the presentation document are listed hierarchi cally and the title of each slide is preceded by a slide icon Enter the desired text and use the icons in the Main toolbar to structure your outline You can create a subsection to a slide by placing the cursor at the start of the respective line and pressing the Tab key Use the Shift Tab key combination to move the line up one level in the hierarchy After you have finished editing the presentation outline click the Drawing View icon directly above the Outline View icon to return to the normal view Changing the Slide Layout To change the slide layout you must be in the Drawing View the first icon in the vertical scroll bar Double click the tab of the slide you want to modify and select the desired layout from the pre defined layouts Designing Slides To design a slide you have to be in the Drawing View as well a
145. appropriate projection method as you can see clearly if you click twice on the sphere and then rotate it In Tools Options StarOffice View tab mark the appropriate box if you want 3D objects to refresh during interaction Using Illumination Now you need to provide illumination for the world globe Select an overall blue illumination for example so that the oceans will have a blue color and a yellow highlight that will shine on the side of the earth facing the sun 1 Select the world globe since the illumination preferences you set always refer to the currently selected object 2 oF Open the 3D Effects window by clicking the 3D Controller icon at the bottom of the main toolbar 362 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 ime In the 3D Effects window click the Illumination button That is where you can change the default setting of the light source to blue and move it down and to the left Then click Assign You can also have a second light source in yellow shine on the earth from the above right Further Information Take a look at the 3D Effects window The individual tabs and icons are described in detail in StarOffice Help We give just a brief overview here 3D Effects Favorites This is where you can see a few special 30 Effects effects that you can use on the 3D object If you want to save a few interesting See effects so that they are available for selec tion on this tab file the appropriate 3D ob
146. aptions 152 combining 347 connecting 347 cross fading 345 duplicating 343 grouping 346 intersecting 347 labelling automatically 130 153 merging 347 mirroring positions of 151 moving 430 pivot points of 329 positioning 151 rotating 329 selecting 302 ODBC data inserting in spreadsheets 242 offset page numbers 87 OLE objects inserting tablesin 138 opening documents 31 sheets in HTML 264 optimal column width 203 Index 453 ordering chapters 75 organization chart 316 organizing templates 96 outline numbering 128 outlines sending to presentations 395 outline view presentations in 309 Outline View 299 overviews printing 41 overwrite mode 62 P page breaks as paragraph formats 92 page number correction 86 page numbers changing 86 continuation pages 163 formats 93 page previews 41 pages bordersof 69 continuation pages 163 jumping to 117 numbers and countof 160 printing 304 Page Styles 184 Page Styles applying 89 changing 162 editing 91 next style 162 page numbers 86 summary 94 454 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 page views displaying 40 paragraph formats applying 76 page breaks 92 paragraphs bordersof 69 bulleted 126 common formatting 85 frames around 69 inserting before tables 140 moving 429 numbering 128 setting tab stopsin 408 Paragraph Styles creating 83 searching 55 password protecting contents 413 paths work directory 35 patterns 357 performing calculations in text do
147. arch 2002 B background defining colors 297 of aslide changing 298 backgrounds for each slide individually 298 Bar Chart 233 B zier curves drawing 335 editing 336 bibliographies creating 122 bitmaps converting to vector graphics 337 inserting and editing 351 blank paragraphs in form letters 177 bookmarks in text 116 borders around text 69 changing automatically 100 choosing style of 69 of cells 69 of paragraphs 69 text 67 Brochure 305 brochures printing 43 bulleted lists turning on and off 126 bulleting interrupting 136 bullet lists importing 135 bullets automatic 130 business cards creating 178 buttons big small 407 flat 3 D 407 C calculating across multiple text tables 146 formulas 200 in spreadsheets 203 in text 144 in text documents 143 144 in text tables 147 rows 266 with formulas 210 calculations in text 143 144 Callouts 333 capital letters changing automatically 100 captions automatic 130 153 defining 152 deleting 152 editing 152 numbering 130 153 objects 152 cell formats 206 cell names addressing 222 cell notes 212 Cell ranges recognition of 223 cells adapting the width of 150 addresses 214 AutoFill 266 bordersof 69 calculating 266 changing text number format 208 checking cells for validity 258 copying 224 currency formats 208 date formats 211 defining input help 258 enlarging and reducing in text tables 149 formatting 215 Internet references 228 in text format 20
148. ars When operating your application you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the ALT key Once the menu is opened you will again find underlined characters You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog usually shown by a broken frame This element which can be either a button an option field an entry in a list box or a check box is said to have the focus on it If the focal point is a button pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar If an option field has the focus use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one use Shift Tab to go in the reverse direction Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes If you place the focus on a button not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button but also a thicker shadow under the button selected This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself 422 StarOffice 6 0 User s G
149. at 76 Using Sections 76 Inserting Sections 77 Editing Sections 78 Formatting Text With and Without Styles 78 Direct Formatting or Formatting With Styles 78 The Style Concept in StarOffice 79 Page Styles and Page Numbers 86 Page Styles Summary 94 Defining Default Templates 95 Templates and Styles 96 Creating New Styles From Selections 97 Transferring Formats With Fill Format Mode 98 Updating Styles From Selections 98 Copying Styles into Documents 99 Entering and Formatting Text Automatically 100 Turning Off AutoCorrect Function 100 Automatic Spellcheck 101 Contents 7 Using AutoText 102 AutoText With AutoComplete 105 Exceptions in AutoCorrect 106 Moving Text Drawing Lines 107 Inserting Editing and Linking Text Frames 107 Using Text Animation 110 Drawing Lines in Text 112 Editing Text With FontWork 113 Aligning Text With Lines 114 The Navigator 115 Jumping From One Object to Another in Text 115 Jumping From One Reminder to Another 116 Jumping to a Specific Page 117 Other Navigator Features 117 Indexes and Tables of Contents in StarOffice Writer 118 Defining Index Table of Contents Entries 118 Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries 119 Creating a Table of Contents 120 Creating Alphabetical Indexes 120 Creating User Defined Indexes 121 Creating Bibliographies 122 Updating Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents 124 Editing the Format of an Index Table of Contents 124 Indexes Covering Multiple Documents 125 Headin
150. ate dialog Consolidate Function Sum x Cancel Consolidation areas Help Source data area undefined Sheet ati PERI Copy results to undefined sheet ati l More gt 3 From the Source Data Area list box select an area as a starting point to consoli date with other areas E H 250 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 If the area is not named click in the field next to the Source Data Area A blinking text cursor appears Type a reference for the first source data area or select the area in the sheet with the mouse Click Add to insert the selected area as a Consolidation Area Select additional areas and click Add after each selection Specify where you want to display the result by selecting a target area from the Copy results to list box If the target area is not named click in the field next to Copy results to and enter the reference of the target area or the top left cell in the target area Alternatively you can select the area using the mouse or simply position the cursor in the top left cell of the target area Select a calculation rule for determining how the values of the consolidation areas should be linked The sum function is the default setting 10 Click OK to consolidate the area If you do not want to create a new sheet independent from the source areas but would prefer to retain links to the source areas or if you want to consolidate areas in whi
151. ati cally starts an AutoPilot to help you produce an attractive HTML presentation A number of HTML pages are created that are connected to one another by hyper links and in which the graphics are saved as GIF or JPEG images You can work on these HTML pages in the text module of StarOffice to give them headings and additional hyperlinks for example 1 Choose File Export 2 Select the file format HTML 3 Enter a file name and click Save 4 This opens the HTML Export AutoPilot This is described in detail in the StarOffice Help In the HTML Export AutoPilot you can choose whether the created Internet pres entation should contain frames whether you want to navigate with graphic buttons or with text links and whether a link should be offered on the home page allowing the user to download the original StarOffice Impress presentation Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 305 Automobiles that Move the World In addition to the export of default HTML documents and HTML documents with frames you can now export Impress documents as WebCast and in the automatic mode During the WebCast export scripts for web servers with Perl or ASP support are generated automatically examples can be found in staroffice6 0 share config webcast This allows a presenter e g during a tele phone press conference with accompanying slideshow over the Internet to change the slides on the viewers browsers The automatic
152. atting you edit the the field directly as follows 1 Double click the field with the page number You will now see the Edit Fields Document dialog Edit Fields Document Type select Format OK Cancel Help ril q gt z M Offset n 2 Select the field format Now click OK Normally you would determine the page number format as a property of the Page Style 1 Open the context menu on the page and select Page Then you will see for example the Page Style Default dialog Instead of Default the title bar of the dialog contains the name of the current Page Style 2 Go to the Page tab 3 In the Numbering combo box determine how you want the numbering to look on all pages with this Style Then close the dialog with OK 4 Now select the As Page Style format for the field which shows the page number see the description of direct formats above Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 93 If you want to change other properties in the footer e g the font you need to edit the Footer Paragraph Style so that the changes will apply to all footers Place the cursor in the footer Call the context menu and choose Edit Paragraph Style If you want to increase the spacing of the footer from the text above this is a format attribute of the Page Style Change the Page Style in the Stylist with the Modify command in the the context menu In the Page Style dialog you can determi
153. awing Functions floating toolbar from the Main toolbar and click the Text icon 2 Draw a text frame on your page and then type in text GOSE for example FontWork bhli DE 3 Choose Format FontWork This opens the FontWork IE TCD E Bo Sesh window from which you select the desired effects 4 Click the upper left icon with the semicircle to display the text as a curve Jo oocm Jo oocm 5 Click Vertical in the Shadow options Specify 0 10 inches for the x axis shadow distance The text should now appear similar to the illustration 6 Since the first and last letters are not very easy to see insert two blank spaces before and after the text Double O 2 0 click the text edit it and then click outside the object E o ooem H 7 When you select the FontWork object eight handles EI appear To change the size and shape of an object simply drag one of the handles in the desired direction Additionally you can copy the finished object to the clipboard and paste it from there into other documents where you can also modify its size and other attributes Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 113 Aligning Text With Lines Aligning text with freeform line 1 Draw the freeform line Draw Functions floating toolbar 2 Double click on the line 3 Enter the desired text or copy it from the clipboard 4 Choose Format FontWork 5 Click for example on the Rotate icon Alig
154. ayed for one minute 3 Select a desired effect from the Effects list on the object bar 4 Click the small button to the left underneath the second slide to preview the selected effects 5 Save your presentation again using Ctrl 5S Showing a Presentation No doubt you would like to take a look at your finished presentation now To run it click the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar and the presenta tion will start automatically in default mode that is to say in full screen mode If you click once the second slide will be displayed preceded by the defined tran sition effect After the last slide you will see a black slide which means that the presentation is over End the presentation by pressing the Escape key also used to stop the presentation before the end if necessary Feel free to add more slides to your presentation or try out other effects 296 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Editing a Presentation Here we show you how to use the versatile features of StarOffice Impress to fine tune your presentation Many of the methods available in StarOffice Draw can also be used in StarOffice Impress You can input text and convert it into 3D turn objects into curves and polygons edit connectors and glue points and so on Please also refer to the chapter on StarOffice Draw Defining Background Colors You can draw and create the background of a slide in a presentation or drawing document either in the master
155. ays stated first within the parentheses It can be entered directly as here or as a reference If the amount is for example in cell D2 you can enter D2 in the formula as the first part of the function The other parts of the func tion name the unit of the amount and the unit into which it is to be converted All three parts of the function are separated from each other by semicolons Using the formula CONVERT 50 EUR USD you will obtain the number of US dollars for 50 Euros If in column D from D2 to D20 you have a number of USD sums and in column E from E2 to E20 you want the same sums in Euros proceed as follows 1 Click in cell E2 2 Enter the following CONVERT 3 Click in cell D2 D2 is now defined as the first part of the function The cursor remains at D2 in the formula 4 Enter the following text USD EUR enter the text with both semicolons and the quotation marks and press the Enter key 5 This completes the entire formula which now reads CONVERT D2 USD EUR Cell E2 now contains the result of the calculation Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 205 6 Click cell E2 then the small filled square in the bottom right hand corner of cell E2 and pressing the mouse button drag down to cell E20 Release the mouse button there 7 You have now copied the formula from E2 to E20 The references have been automatically adapted so that they always refer to the neighboring cel
156. background of the legend From the combo box select Gradient Select a gradient from the list Click OK In your document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode You can define your own gradients hatching bitmaps and colors in StarOffice Draw 234 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 To select the legend first double click on the chart see step 1 then click on the legend You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse If you move the legend over another object of the chart you can no longer open its Properties dialog by double clicking on it To open the Properties dialog either use the Format menu or click once on the legend then open the context menu and select Object Properties The same applies to all other objects of the chart Adding Texture to Chart Bars Assign a bar type to a bitmap instead of for example a full color 1 You switch to edit mode by double clicking on the chart Double click on the corresponding bar all bars of this color are now selected Inthe context menu select the Object Properties entry then the Area tab page Ee WO N Click on Bitmap You can now select a bitmap in the list box as texture for this bar By clicking OK you accept the setting Editing Chart Axes Suppose you have inserted a chart in a StarOffice Calc document and you want to change the scale of the vertical Y axis 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the cha
157. bar with which you opened the floating toolbar You will see that the icon you used before is still there If you now click the Insert Graphics icon you will see that icon at the top of the main toolbar instead A short click opens the directly visible function whereas a longer click opens the floating toolbar again The document window At the top left hand edge of the document window are the toolbars that you need in your work and that vary depending on the document type and context At the bottom edge is the status bar The status bar contains different fields displaying information appropriate to the type of document Some of these fields give you access to special functions either by double clicking or by opening the relevant context menu For more detailed explanations refer to StarOffice Help Docking windows Some windows in StarOffice are dockable windows e g the Stylist the Navigator and the Gallery You can move these windows re size them or dock them to an edge On each edge you can dock several windows on top of or alongside each other then by moving the border lines you can change the relative proportions of the window To undock and re dock double click in the window while pressing Ctrl Double click a vacant area of the window in the Stylist double click a gray part of the window e g next to the icons You can hide or show the window with the arrow button The second button switches between a fixed and floati
158. bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique tch que International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots fournie par Jan Hajic Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique finlandais International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots fournie par le University of Helsinki Institute pour la langue finlandaise et par le Dr Kolbjorn Heggstad Il est interdit de repro duire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique allemand International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots fournie par Langenscheidt K G Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incor por s Systeme de correction orthographique italien International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots fournie par Zanichelli S p A Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique portug
159. bles Suppose you want to delete a whole table from your text document You have the following options Select from the end of the paragraph before the table to the start of the para graph after the table Press Del or Backspace Or place the cursor in the table select all cells for example by pressing Ctrl A open the context menu and select Row Delete This method also works at the beginning or end of a document Inserting Paragraphs Before Tables at Start of Page Suppose you have inserted a table at the very beginning of a text document or immediately after a fixed page break and now you want to insert text before this table 1 Place the cursor in the first cell of the table right at the start of any content in that cell 2 Press Enter The table now moves down a line To delete this line before the table place the cursor in this empty line and press Delete 140 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Preparing Tables in Text Documents When you insert a table in a text document you have several ways of formatting it Inserting Tables in Text Documents 1 For this example open a new text document with File New Text Document 2 Place your cursor at the position in the text document where you want to insert a table 3 Long click the Insert icon on the main toolbar to open a floating toolbar which contains the Insert Table icon Drag the floating toolbar into your document Cancel 4
160. both documents in your original document All text passages that occur in your document but not in the copy are identified as having been inserted and all text passages that are missing in your original document are identified as deletions You can now accept the insertions in which case the relevant texts stay in their original form or you can accept the deletions in which case the marked text contained in the copy are not inserted in your document Merging Versions It is not always one and the same document that is edited by different authors and passed from one to the next author It often makes more sense to give a separate copy of the document to each author In our example this means you ll receive three copies back in addition to the original document with different changes in each copy It is easy to merge these documents into your original The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes all normal text must be identical 1 Open your original document in which you want to merge all the copies 2 Choose Edit Changes Merge Document You ll see a typical file selection dialog in which to select a copy of the document 3 After you merge the documents you will see the designated changes from the copy in the original document 398 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Recording Changes The review function is available in StarOffice for text documents and
161. ce URL Fabcadaress outlookexp me Apply Cancel Help 3 Under Database type choose the Address book entry 4 Click the button to call the Data Source dialog Choose a data source address book aig SREP AVE CANO Sa est ROEM Fhe dS Rist Se E E Rb na MS Outlook Windows address book Help 5 Select the data source and click OK If you selected LDAP address book the Data Source Administration dialog will display a LDAP tab page where you enter the LDAP server and its parameters 6 Go to the Tables tab page Mark the tables that should be visible in StarOffice 7 On the General tab page enter a name for this data source in the Name box Close the dialog by clicking OK 378 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format If you want to exchange data with a database which does not have an ODBC link and which does not allow dBase import and export it is often possible to exchange the data via a common text format Importing Data Into StarOffice To exchange data in a text format use the StarOffice Calc import export filter 1 Export the desired data from the source database in a text format The CSV text format is highly recommended since it separates data fields by using commas and records by inserting line breaks Open the data with the Text CSV file filter Select this file filter in the Open dialog in the Files of type list box Select the fil
162. ce Writer can make various corrections automatically while you type For example it can automatically start every sentence with a capital letter Word completion The automatic word completion helps you enter text If you often use the same long word StarOffice Writer will suggest the recognized word Press Enter or you can define another key to accept the suggestion Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 61 Inserting Text 1 Open an existing document 2 Using the mouse or the arrow keys place the cursor at the point where text is to be added and enter new text By default you are in Insert mode text after the insertion point is moved on as you enter the new text If you would like the existing text at this point to be overwritten with the new text select Overwrite mode Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode With the keyboard Press Ins to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode The current mode is displayed on the status bar With the mouse On the status bar click on the button indicating the current mode to switch to the other mode INSRT Insert mode is enabled The text cursor is a blinking vertical line Click in the field to enable overwrite mode a OVER Overwrite mode is enabled The text cursor is a blinking block Click in the field to enable insert mode 62 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Entering Text Anywhere on a Page The direct cursor enab
163. ces and to break up solid areas of prose it is usual to apply special formatting to sections of text Direct Formatting or Formatting With Styles When working with StarOffice you can choose between direct formatting and formatting with Styles to apply text attributes such as bold italics font type and font size A direct format is obtained by directly applying a certain attribute to a text area For example by clicking the Bold icon on the text object bar you directly apply the bold format to a selected text area On the other hand you can use Styles to indirectly apply attributes to text A Style is a named set of default settings for formatting text Direct formatting is more appropriate for one time use If for example you want to make a word bold just position the cursor in the word and click the Bold icon This works quickly and intuitively Indirect formatting with the help of Styles is always preferable when you want to format lengthy texts in a uniform way Styles require more advance preparation 78 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 though First you must create the Style then you apply the Style to the text Both tasks are best done using the Stylist Assume you have formatted each of the headings in a long text with a 24 point Helvetica font If you need to change all the headings to a 20 point Times font and in bold it would take a long time to make each change by hand But if you had defined the format as a S
164. ch the order of rows or columns varies click the More button in the Consolidate dialog Consolidate Function OK Sum Cancel Consolidation areas Help 5heetS A 1 EF10 Source data area undefined sheet3 as E10 Copy results to undefined sheet SA 14 l Consolidate by ait 10818 A E Row labels E Link to source data x omm e Add po eee f an E Columa headers Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 251 1 Select Link to Source Data to insert only the formulas that generate the results in the target area rather than the actual results If you link the data any values modified in the source area are automatically updated in the target area The corresponding cell references in the target area are inserted in consecutive rows which are automatically ordered and then hidden from view Only the final result based on the selected calculation rule is displayed 2 Under Consolidate by select either Row Labels or Column Headers if the cells of the source area are not to be consolidated corresponding to the identical position of the cell in the area but instead according to a matching row label or column header To consolidate by row or column headers the text must be contained in the selected source areas or included in the selection with the mouse P The text in the headers or labels must be identical so that rows or colu
165. chased are represented by positive numbers and shares sold are represented by negative numbers Price Actual buying or selling price Commission Costs of buying or selling Yo The current commission for the transaction calculated as a percentage Min Minimum commission applying to this transaction Fixed Fixed costs of this transaction Paid Commission actually paid for this transaction Costs Summary of costs number of shares current price fees Proceeds Proceeds realized number of shares selling price fees Bought Number of shares purchased Sold Number of shares sold On Hand The number of shares purchased minus the number of shares already sold Costs of On Hand Proportional costs for purchasing the remaining shares held i e on hand Proceeds Realized The sales proceeds after deducting the commission Dividends paid The total amount of dividends paid Profit Made In this column you can see profits hopefully already real ized from previous sales and dividends paid 272 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Brokerage Fees In order to buy or sell stock you need to have access to a market stock exchange where the shares are traded Since only brokers have this access it is customary in the United States to submit your orders through and pay fees to your brokerage company In many other countries banks and savings and loans institutions are more closely associated with such transa
166. choose whether the cells are protected against acci dental changes whether the formulas can be viewed whether the cells are visible and or whether the cells can be printed Protection can be provided by means of a password but it does not have to be If you have assigned a password protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered Please note that the cell protection for cells with the Protected attribute is only effective when you protect the whole table In the default condition every cell has the Protected attribute Therefore you will remove the attribute selectively for those cells where the user may make changes You then protect the whole table and save the document Turning on protection For cells Select cell range Choose Format Cells Cell Protection tab For spreadsheets Choose Tools Protect Document Sheet For documents Choose Tools Protect Document Document Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters Turning off protection For spreadsheets Choose Tools Protect Document Sheet For documents Choose Tools Protect Document Document Where a password has been assigned enter the correct password 414 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Protecting Sections in StarOffice Writer Any section of a StarOffice Writer text document can be protected against changes with a password Turning on protection Turning off protection Select the sect
167. cking on a color Choose View Toolbars Color Bar The Color bar displays all predefined colors with their respective names in the same order as in the list box of the Object bar If you define colors these will appear at the end of the Color bar and the bottom of the list box XK CER EEEe d Cee dLv he EBBEN EE a E The field at top left of the color bar is for the color Invisible You can change the size of the color bar with the mouse Alternatively hold down the Ctrl key and double click in the gray part of the color bar to obtain a movable variable size window Then you can manipulate the color bar in the same way as most other windows For example you can move it by dragging the title bar and change its size by dragging the edges or corners of the window To dock the window again hold down Ctrl and double click on a gray area of the floating color bar Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 353 Defining Your Own Colors You can define any number of colors assign them names and save in color palette files 1 Ina drawing document choose Format Area to open the Area dialog 2 In the dialog click the Colors tab al X BERR d CEE dLv RLM hd EBBEN En Here you will find everything you need to modify the color of a selected object You can also define and organize new colors If you want to apply a color which is not yet in the col
168. color tolerance in the spin button Then click Replace 356 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Gradients and Patterns for Objects and Background The objects in your drawings and presentations do not have to have uniform colors They can also have color gradients transparency gradients patterns and hatching effects You can also define a color a gradient or a pattern for a back ground that is visible in all slides of a presentation Defining Gradients To assign a predefined gradient to an object proceed as follows 1 Select the object 2 From the context menu or under Format on the menu bar choose Area 3 Select the Gradient option then make your selection from the gradient list Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Fill C Mone f Hatching C Color Cc Bitmap PR Gradient 1 ncrements A aa aaaa E saan I Automatic He Gradient 4 Gradient 5 PY Gradient 6 Cancel Help Reset Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 357 Defining Your Own Color Gradient You can define your own color gradient save the current color gradient list as a file or load a different list from another file If you have selected an object and then define a new gradient the new gradient is immediately assigned to the selected object If you do not want immediate assign ment you must undo the selection before opening the dialog for defining gradi ents To d
169. command Edit Index Table In the dialog that appears go to the Index Table tab page and unmark the Protected from manual changes check box Editing the Format of an Index Table of Contents In the Insert Index dialog on the Entries tab you can also edit the format of the index Amongst other things you can alter the way in which entries tab stops and page numbers are arranged On the Styles tab you can assign other Paragraph Styles For detailed instructions refer to the StarOffice Help Insert Index T able X Index Table Entries Styles Columns Background Table of Contents Level Structure n T Lies Sass E LIENEN EEEE IE EEN EEEE EEEE EEEE NEE 1 pice na P UD cosas occas eens cscs soso cscs EE 1 2 E tami Lee lf L Gy e ll levels Hep E EE AREE AAE AEE ARARE SRA EE EEEE 1 Heading 1 2 eeeseseoesecosossessoesoeesesosessessosseeesesoeessessessesocesosessesoessosocesoessesssessossossoessesss o 1 Chapter no Entr y te Ar Tab stop Heading 1 5 m This is the content from the birst chapter This is auser directory entry Character Style None a 7 Edit Heading t t amp This is the content from chapter 1 1 This is the erdry for the table of contents A Heading t 2 Format ee IV Tab position relative to Paragraph Style indent TOX 2 Tris idk 2 Sise Cancel Help Reset a Preview 124 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 You can automatically assign hyperlinks to the entries in the table of
170. contents Todo this go to the Entries tab page place the cursor in the structure row before the entry lt E gt click the Hyperlink button then place the cursor after lt E gt and click Hyperlink again In the list of contents of your document you can then click a hyperlink to go straight to the first occurrence The table of contents must be generated from headings Indexes Covering Multiple Documents There are several ways of creating an index covering multiple documents You can create an index in each individual document then copy the indexes into a document and post edit them Amore elegant solution is to select each individual index as a section Insert Section and insert these sections in a common index document as a link Ifyou are working with a master document common indexes are possible across all sub documents More information about master documents can be found starting on page 132 Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 125 Headings and Numbering In large text documents you can profit from the automatic functions for headings and numbering Numbering and Numbering Styles You can apply numbering in your text either as direct formatting or by using a Style just as you can with other paragraph attributes such as Justified or Line Spacing The icons on the numbering object bar and the options in the Format Numbering Bullets dialog apply direct formatting Direct formatt
171. cordingly in the Stylist Switch the Stylist to the All Styles view or to the hierarchical view Editing or deleting captions A caption is normal text which is placed together with an object in a common frame Edit the caption text just like normal text Delete the caption text just like normal text 152 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting an object in a number range Suppose your document contains illustrations as linked graphics and these are labeled in a number range called Illustration Now you want to add a drawing obtained with the drawing tools as a further illustration Extend the automatic number range Illustration as follows 1 Below the additional illustration insert a new line and apply the Paragraph Style Illustration 2 Start the Fields dialog by pressing Ctrl F2 for example 3 On the Variables tab select the Type Number range Under Selection select Illustration 4 Click Insert and close the dialog box If you move illustrations with your captions by hand so that the sequence changes it may be necessary to update the numbers by pressing F9 Numbering Illustrations by Chapters To number illustrations by chapter so that illustrations are labeled Illustration 1 1 Illustration 1 2 etc in the first chapter and Illustration 2 1 Illustration 2 2 etc in the second proceed as follows 1 Organize your document by chapters if you have not already done so Cho
172. ct You can choose Tools Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values Additional details about Data Validity can be found in the StarOffice Help 258 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using Cell Contents Validity 1 Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule You can select multiple cells by clicking on all respective cells while holding down the Ctrl key The validity rule is a component of the cell format To copy the validity rule to other cells choose Edit Copy and Edit Paste Special and select Format Albany fio E z U Aa OF on 0 ag te gg m E OF Al i Go hia es ee ea eae ae E Miarni ay Enter a name The name specified here cannot exceed 30 characters Validity x eM Criteria Input Help Error Alert is M Show input help when cell is selected C naz nec Contents Title enter a name inh i Input help e name specified here cannot exceed 30 characters ye A Z zZ aA x oh LI LI RI RIP RI By Poy Bop Boy Bo Boy Bo Cancel Help Reset 2 Choose Data Validation The Data Validation dialog appears 3 On the Values tab page enter the conditions for new values entered into cells Values you have already entered will not be affected Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 259 In the field Allow All Va
173. ct to move it to another position on the slide Click the Rotate icon that in StarOffice Draw can be found on the main toolbar under Effects and directly on the main toolbar in StarOffice Impress If you position the mouse pointer over a handle the pointer indicates that you can rotate the object by dragging the mouse In the middle of wees the object a small circle indicates the pivot point It can z be moved to any other position with the mouse When l you drag the corners of the object with the mouse the eC object rotates around the pivot point Dragging the middle points on the sides slants the object in relation to the opposite edge 1 1 I 1 1 L i z wet Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 329 Click on the object once again to display the eight handles If you double click within the object the handles change and the text cursor appears positioned in the middle of the object You can now enter text which is automatically connected to the object Some interference may appear on screen Press Ctrl Shift R You can then refresh the screen Arranging and Aligning Objects Arranging Objects If your objects are overlapping and you want to position individual objects in the foreground or background use ct either the context menu commands or use the icons on the Arrange floating toolbar Click on an object which you want to move either in front of or behind other objects Then cl
174. ction is explained in detail in the StarOffice Help To define the line attributes and direction yourself use the Line drawing object as follows 1 On the main toolbar long click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Draw Functions floating toolbar and click the Line icon The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair symbol with a line beside it 2 In your document click where the line should begin hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where you want the line to end If you also hold down the Shift key you can draw only horizontal vertical and diagonal lines 2 Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length You can then draw more lines End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Selection icon from the Draw Functions floating toolbar 4 After clicking the Selection icon you can select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key This multiple selection enables you to assign all of them a common color width or any other attribute These lines and other draw objects which you insert in text are not defined in the Internet page description language HTML and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format Instead they are exported as graphics 112 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Editing Text With FontWork The FontWork program module is used for graphical text effects This is what you do 1 Open the Dr
175. ctions Whether the order is placed through a bank or a brokerage company you will invariably pay a brokerage fee for each transaction This tab takes these fees into account Here you will find a breakdown of the applicable brokerage fee you must pay to your brokerage firm or credit institution Traditionally this fee has been a percentage of the total value of the transaction although flat rate fees are now common in the United States In our example the fee is 1 of the total transaction Sometimes a minimum commis sion applies in our example 25 Your credit institution or brokerage company can provide you with all of this information Finally a fixed amount is often charged in addition to other fees for telephone expenses etc All of these fees are taken into consideration when you calculate the actual return This allows you to see the actual profit or loss you have realized at any time including fees Completing the Stocks Document The document is now completely created and can be saved In the following section we use several examples to describe how you can make further adjust ments to this sheet Protecting Sheets If you want to prevent the values entered in a sheet from being modified by another person you must protect the sheet To do this display the Protect Sheet dialog Tools Protect Document Sheet Enter a password then click OK You can also protect the entire document Then it is only possible to open it by e
176. culation refers to one specific cell in your sheet which contains a percent value for example If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell the reference will also be moved down if you didn t define the cell coordinates as absolute Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet Assume for example you entered the formula SUM A1 AQ9 in row 10 If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right simply copy this formula to the cell to the right The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to SUM B1 B9 Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 221 There are various ways to copy a formula One suggested method is 1 Select the cell containing the formula 2 Choose Edit Copy or press Ctrl C to copy it 3 Select the cell into which you want the formula to be copied 4 Choose Edit Paste or press Ctrl V The formula will be positioned in the new cell If you want to copy a formula into multiple cells there iss a quick and easy way to copy into adjacent cell areas 1 Select the cell containing the formula 2 Position the mouse on the bottom right of the highlighted border of the cell and continue holding down the mouse button until the pointer changes to a cross hair symbol 3 With the
177. cuments 145 permitted cell contents checking 258 pivot points of objects 329 pixel images inserting and editing 351 points editing 336 polygons intersecting 347 merging 347 subtracting 347 portfolio management 267 PostScript files creating 305 presentation with AutoPilot 288 presentations 285 creating 293 drawing view 328 exporting in HIML 305 individual 302 layer view 328 master view 328 saving automatically 35 sending as e mail 38 shortcut keys 435 showing 296 Stylesin 298 zoom functionin 436 previews print layouts 40 printers default printer 39 printing black and white 41 brochures 43 column as table heading 263 defining options 40 details 261 formulas 261 landscape 262 multiple pages per sheet 41 presentations 304 previews 40 reduced 41 row as table heading 263 sheet grids 261 sheets 261 262 263 sheet selection 262 slides 304 to file 39 305 Printing aspreadsheet 214 printing entry tickets 179 printing in black and white 41 printing lottery tickets 179 printing small 41 Printing spreadsheets 214 print layouts checking 40 printout to file 305 print previews displaying 40 programming sample macros 419 proportional distribution of tables 150 protected contents in StarOffice 413 protected spaces 66 protecting recorded changes 400 sheets 273 protection contents 413 Q Quickstarter 25 quotation marks changing automatically 100 R Range of cells 223 r
178. d You also can use the and wildcards as in the Find and Replace dialog You can find addi tional information about the database search function in the StarOffice Help 382 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Searching With a Form Filter 1 Open a form Switch off the design mode Just an example Open an empty text document and press F4 open the bibliog raphy database table biblio in the data source view While pressing Shift Ctrl drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created there 2 Turn off the design mode To do this open the Form Functions floating toolbar and click the Design Mode on off icon so that it does not appear to be pressed 3 On the form toolbar click the Form based filters icon The current document is displayed with its inserted form functions as an empty edit mask At the bottom edge you will see the filter bar 4 Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields When formulating filter conditions various operators and commands are available to you Apart from the relational operators there are SQL specific commands that query the content of database fields If you use these commands in the StarOffice syntax StarOffice automatically converts these into the corresponding SQL syntax You can also enter the SOL command directly The following tables give an over view of the operators and commands Operator Meaning Condition is satisfied if equ
179. d Configuring StarOffice for Faxing 405 Saving Configuration With Document 406 Changing Icon Views 407 Changing the Look of the User Interface 407 Selecting Measurement Units 407 Moving Deleting or Copying Icons 408 Switching Object Bars With the Context Menu 408 Inserting and Editing Tab Stops 408 Changing Default Templates 410 Changing the Color of Text 412 Protected Contents in StarOffice 413 8 Appendix 419 Sample Macros Provided 419 Calling the Sample Macros 419 Editing the Sample Macros 420 The Sample Macros 421 General Shortcut Keys in StarOffice 422 Using Shortcut Keys 422 Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys 422 Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs 422 Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions 423 Practical Text Input Fields 423 List of General Shortcut Keys in StarOffice 424 Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys 425 Contents 17 Shortcut Keys in Plug Ins 425 Shortcut Keys for Text Documents 426 Function Keys Used in Text Documents 426 Shortcut Keys Specific to Text Documents 427 Shortcut Keys for Spreadsheets 431 Navigating in Spreadsheets 432 Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets 433 Formatting Spreadsheets Using Shortcut Keys 434 Shortcut Keys for Presentations 435 Function Keys for Presentations 435 Shortcut Keys During Presentation Show 435 Shortcut Keys in the Drawing View 436 Shortcut Keys Specific to Presentations 437 Shortcut Keys for Drawings 438 Function Keys for Drawings 438 Shortcut Keys for Drawings 438 Sho
180. d by the AutoPilot without changing them and then print the result You could click on the Create button right away but to familiarize yourself with this function you should click Next on each dialog page so that you have seen every page at least once Have a look through the AutoPilot pages for creating a letter template You don t have to enter data or modify options on each page but you can if you want to Each page allows you to make modifications according to your preferences Of course sender and recipient addresses can also be entered manually because although predefined elements will appear you have the final say as to which elements you want to include in your letter The sender information is automatically taken from the details that you entered at the time of installation You can change these details at any time by choosing Tools Options StarOffice User Data and entering new details Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 51 You do not need to go through all the steps of the AutoPilot each time you want to write a letter Although the AutoPilot does produce a document that you can immediately fill in print and send the main purpose of the AutoPilot is to help you create a customized document template The AutoPilot creates a template which can be edited and then used as a custom ized template for all your letters This ensures that your correspondence will have a consistent format This also applies to other types of docu
181. d if a frame already has a next link Also two frames can only be unlinked with the Unlink Frames icon from the first frame The linking of frames is not allowed under the following conditions The target is not empty An automatically captioned frame is not empty and can therefore not be the target of a link The target already has a previous link Source and target are in different sections e g one frame is in a header and the other frame is in a footer The source already has a next link Source and target are the same Closed chains or chains from the inside out or from the outside in are also not permissible The latter is the case if you inserted a frame into another frame and want to link them with each other Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 109 Using Text Animation Suppose you want to compose an application with colored animated text suitable for a simple web site This is how to do it 1 Open anew blank StarOffice Writer document 2 Select Format Page to select a background for the whole page 3 Open the Draw Functions floating toolbar from the main toolbar and click the Rectangle icon 4 Create a rectangle in the center of the page jC y o e O Sual Lae l 3R iy a Continuous oo0 4 D Black 2 color m Blue 7 G ae T ler Sere Pca hoor et er ieee cen lee ert pe ae CG 5 Ma oo zp ao ena ee 4 Wea eee Sloe ba
182. d with a printer Sending a Fax via Dialog Print the current document with the fax machine as a printer 1 Open the Print dialog by choosing File Print and select the fax driver in the Name combo box Clicking OK opens the dialog of your fax driver where you can enter the fax recipient Configuring StarOffice for Faxing via Icon You can configure faxing from StarOffice in such a way that a single click on one icon is sufficient to send a fax 1 2 3 Choose Tools Options Text Document Print Select the Fax combo box of your fax driver and close the dialog by clicking OK Open the context menu on the function bar and click Visible Buttons You see a list of immediately configurable buttons for this toolbar All buttons that are currently visible have a mark In the context menu click to mark the Send Standard Fax button The button is now visible on the function bar By clicking on it the fax driver entered in step 2 is activated to send the current document Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 405 Saving Configuration With Document You can set a global configuration so that it applies to all documents of this type or you can connect the configuration to a specific document which must exist as a file 1 Load the document you want to connect to the configuration or open any docu ment of the same type 2 Set the configuration For example select the toolbars you want to have
183. de March 2002 Inserting Graphics There are several ways of inserting a graphic object in a text document Inserting Graphics via Dialog ie 2 3 Place the cursor at the position in the document where you want to insert the graphic Choose Insert Graphics From File You will see a dialog Insert Graphics Select the desired graphic and click on Open By default the graphic is inserted so that it is centered above the current paragraph Inserting Graphics From StarOffice Draw or Impress You can copy a graphic object from one document to another by drag and drop If you plan to publish your document please observe copyright laws and be sure to obtain the consent of the authors of the original page L 2 3 Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic object While pressing the Alt key click the graphic object This selects the object without activating a hyperlink that may be connected to it Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to the clipboard Drag the graphic object into the other document If the documents are not visible side by side first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document Keep the mouse button pressed The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor ind
184. diately in the lower preview box 354 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 If you do not want to specify the values with the spin buttons but would rather select them from a color spectrum click Edit This opens the Color dialog In this dialog it is also possible to specify the color in the HSV or HSB Hue Satu ration Value Brightness model Select the color and click OK 4 Once you have chosen a new color you must specify whether it should replace the original color or be defined independently Click Modify if you want to replace the color displayed in the upper preview box We suggest however that you only replace custom defined colors 5 To set the new user defined color assign a name to the color in the Name field and click Add and OK Your new color will immediately be added to the palette of existing colors If you close the dialog with Cancel the color of the current object will not change However the modifications in the color palette will remain in effect You can find further instructions in the StarOffice Help on saving and loading the color palette and other palette files Replacing Colors With the Eyedropper You can edit images inserted in a bitmap format e g GIF JPEG and metafile images e g WMF in StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress using Eyedropper Open the Eyedropper by choosing Tools Eyedropper You then see the Eyedropper window Colors Source color Tolerance Replace with
185. displayed If you only wish to view a particular layer you should deactivate the Visible field on all the other layers Modify Layer Hame oK Layout Properties Cancel Iv Misible Help adi W Printable T Locked After you have completed your drawing you can save and print the document Further Information Using One Color per Layer If more than one layer at a time is displayed apply an identical color to all elements on the same layer for a better overview 372 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER f Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice This is where you find instructions on topics mainly of interest to advanced users of StarOffice This includes information on the revision marking function redlining in StarOffice Writer and StarOffice Calc working with data sources in StarOffice and customizing the user interface of StarOffice Data Sources in StarOffice You can register various types of data sources in StarOffice To register a data source for viewing and or editing in StarOffice choose Tools Data Sources This command opens the Data Source Administration dialog which is described in detail in the StarOffice Help Data 5 ource Administration New ost source fe Bibliagrapriy General dBase Tables Queries Links Hame Bibliography Connection Database type a Base Peper file 0 Star Offices O user database biblio
186. dit mode Choose Edit Paste Special to open the Paste Special dialog where you have several options to choose from The same options can also be found on the submenu of the Paste icon on the Function Bar Options Is inserted as StarOffice 6 0 Spreadsheet or OLE object as with Ctrl V or drag and Star Embed Source drop GDIMetaFile Graphic Bitmap Graphic HTML HTML table Unformatted text Text only tab stops as separators Formatted text RTF Text table DDE link Table structure and contents without only under Windows formatting With updating Inserting from StarOffice Calc using drag and drop 1 Open your text document and a StarOffice Calc document from which you want to insert a range of cells 2 Select a range of cells from the spreadsheet Click in the selected range of cells and hold down the mouse button Wait a moment 3 Without releasing the mouse button drag the selected range of cells into the text document If the text document is not visible first move the mouse pointer to the text document icon on the task bar and wait a moment until the text document opens In the text document a gray insertion cursor follows the mouse pointer showing you where the table can be placed 4 Release the mouse button when the gray insertion cursor is in the place where you would like the table to be inserted Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 139 Deleting Ta
187. documents You can define the structure and appearance of the indexes and tables according to your individual needs Live hyperlinks and bookmarks let you jump directly to the corresponding items in the text Desktop Publishing with StarOffice Writer StarOffice Writer contains numerous functions to assist you in creating perfectly styled documents Text can be formatted multi columnar and have text frames graphics tables etc integrated into it The text frames can be linked all over the place even beyond page limits to create a newspaper format Functions such as making lines register true flow of contours through and around graphics and defining of characters paragraphs and tables in any color complement your tools to lend your documents a professional look Calculations Text documents in StarOffice have an integrated calculation function that helps you execute sophisticated calculations or logical links You can easily create a table in a text document in order to perform calculations Creating Drawings A handy drawing tool lets you create drawings graphics legends etc directly in text documents 58 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting Graphics You can insert pictures with different formats into a text document including eraphics with a JPG or GIF format The most common formats can be edited directly in a text document with the image editor In addition the Gallery provides a collection of clipart graph
188. drawings and clipart in your text document or you can distort text with FontWork Positioning Objects There are various ways of anchoring the objects on a text page such as graphics and text frames We will describe the various options based on the example of a frame Anchoring Effect as a Character Frames are placed in the document like any other character hence they have an impact on the line size of the line and the line break to Character Frame is with its X and Y coordinates associated to a character for example in the X direction always to the margin and in the Y direction always to the height of the character marginal frame The frame should be set at Flow to Paragraph Frame is associated to a paragraph changes its position with the paragraph on the Page Frame has always the same position in relation to the page margins on Frame Frame is inside the superior frame in a fixed position The position in relation to the anchor can be chosen through various possibilities For example it is possible to set the frame on a fixed position in relation to a page margin toa paragraph margin to a text area etc The frame position on even pages can be automatically mirrored so that a fixed position in relation to the right side of the page produces a corresponding position on the left side of the page For example you can position a graphic always inside the outer edge of pages Where the graphic is say an arrow poi
189. duct 313 Creating a Presentation witha Template 313 Inserting Deleting and Renaming Slides 313 Creating and Printing Handouts 314 Organizing and Printing Notes 315 Further Information 315 Organization Chart 316 Creating Company Organization Charts 317 Further Information 321 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 323 The StarOffice Draw Functions 324 The StarOffice Draw Window 326 Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses Entering Text 327 Rotating Objects 329 Arranging and Aligning Objects 330 Drawing Sectors and Segments 331 Entering Text 332 Converting Text Into 3D 334 14 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide Drawing Editing and Converting Curves and Objects 335 Drawing Curves 335 Editing Curves 336 Vectorizing Bitmaps 337 Converting Text Characters to Curves 339 Converting to Curves Polygons 3D 340 Working With Objects 343 Duplicating Objects 343 Cross Fading Between Two Objects 345 Working With a Group of Objects 346 Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes 347 Graphic Objects in Drawings and Presentations 350 Applying Text to Bitmaps 350 Inserting Editing Saving Bitmaps 351 Inserting Bitmaps 351 Editing Bitmaps 351 Saving Bitmaps 352 Working With Colors 353 The Color Bar 353 Defining Your Own Colors 354 Replacing Colors With the Eyedropper 355 Gradients and Patterns for Objects and Background 357 Defining Gradients 357 Organizing the Attribute Tables 359 3D Globe 360 Creating Texture on a 3D Object 360 Using Illumination 362
190. e March 2002 Recognizing Names as Addressing StarOffice can correlate names with areas for the most part automatically as long as you have entered the row and column coordinates Refer to the following illustration E6 vy Bt 5UMME B6 06 G i Juli August September 3 New York 1 234 00 2 398 00 4 325 00 7 957 00 cA London 1 024 00 512 00 256 00 1792 00 E FS Auckland 999 00 898 00 777 00 2664 00 Ee Berin 1 233 00 2397 00 _ 4324 00 ah 8 Summe 4 490 00 6 195 00 9 692 00 i The automatic formula recognition allows you to enter for example the formula SUM July in cell B8 This formula can then be copied to the right Cell C8 automati cally shows the formula SUM August cell D8 SUM September and so on This feature also works for horizontal calculations Try it out by entering the formula SUM London in cell E4 The New York entry is a special case Because this name contains a space it must be enclosed in single quotation marks SUM New York Automatic recognition does not work with formulas You cannot enter the formula SUM sum in cell E8 Instead you must enter SUM B8 D8 or SUM E3 E6 The latter formula will also be inserted automatically if you place the cursor in cell E8 and click the Sum icon in the Formula bar This function is active by default If you want you can turn it off under Tools Options Spreadsheet
191. e changes at a later time 310 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating a Slide Show A few additional steps are necessary before your presentation is complete Defining or Changing Slide Order a To change the slide order click the Slide View icon above the vertical scroll bar In this mode all slides in the presentation document are displayed in reduced size Click the slide you want to move and drag it with the mouse to the desired position The position where the slide will be inserted is indi cated by a vertical black bar Creating Cross Fade Effects To apply cross fade effects you have to be in the Slide View or Drawing View Effect Fade From Centei Medium Transition Semiautc ef G E Slides Click on the slide when in the Slide View mode Set the effect and transition period that is to apply to the slide Transition using the two left list boxes When you are in the Drawing View choose Slide Show Slide Transition A dialog appears in which you can define slide transition effects In the Slide Transition dialog select the option Manual Transition You can then switch from one slide to the next in your presentation by clicking the mouse or pressing the right arrow key Starting Presentations za To start a presentation click the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar or choose Slide Show Slide Show The on screen presentation starts imme diately Presentation settings can be adjusted
192. e enter DT and press F3 to insert a dummy text which can be used to check the look of a page filled with text and other objects Enter FN and press F3 to insert a StarOffice Math formula with sequential numbering at the right border Choose Edit AutoText Insert Close Help Ewi with Film Roll Ew with Initials Ewi with Quill Pen Buy Circuit Board Buy Classic BW Cogwheels Ewi Elegant Ew Gray Circle Ew Modern AutoText T Categories PH Path Save links relative to E File system E Internet m Show preview The AutoText dialog contains a number of AutoTexts As you will see AutoTexts can even contain graphics and tables Long click on the Edit AutoText icon on the main toolbar and select an Auto Text You can also use the AutoComplete function Directions for using this function are found in the StarOffice Help 102 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 B Standard Move the mouse pointer to the AutoText that you want to insert in the text at the cursor position When you release the mouse button the text is inserted Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 103 Defining AutoText Write the desired text It may contain formatting and embedded graphics Select the text Now click briefly on the AutoText icon in the Main Toolbar In the large list box select the category e g Default assign a name for the new text compo nent in the tex
193. e other labels on the sheet Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings you have entered 7 Print the new document Printing Labels With Serial Numbers If for example you want to print lottery tickets or entry tickets with serial numbers on them this is how to do it L 2 3 4 5 Choose File New Labels This opens the Labels dialog On the Labels tab under Format select the format in which you want to print These label tags or rolls available from specialist suppliers are often made from stiff paper with tear off perforations or they are self adhesive labels on a backing material If you want to define the format yourself select the Format tab On the Options tab mark Synchronize contents Click on New Document A new document is now created divided up in the way you want You only have to edit the top left label then press Synchronize labels to make all labels appear the same The button is only visible if you previously marked Synchronize contents on the Options tab Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 179 10 11 12 19 14 I5 180 StarOffice 6 0 Synchronize Labels m 1 Type Selection Format S Standard E Invitatic 1234 12 ee 1 234 Hel Or 1 234 12 Tep Additional formats t4 Invitatic ID I I Invisible Name Value 9 Number Number 1 rv x Tr tt ati Tnwitation ta Crand Tr 74
194. e places and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits If however you have imported an entire column with numbers in text format i e in the form of 000123 which you now want to turn into real numbers again without zeros in front of them i e in the form of 123 proceed as follows 1 Select the column in which the digits are found in text format Set the cell format in that column as Number Call up Edit Find amp Replace In the Search for box enter 0 9 In the Replace with box enter amp Put a check in front of Regular expressions Put a check in front of Current selection only oo ee P oe Click Replace All Cells in the Currency Format In StarOffice Calc you can give the numbers any currency format When you click the Currency icon in the object list to format a number the cell is given the default currency format set in StarOffice under Tools Options Language Settings Languages Without currency formats the international exchange of StarOffice Calc docu ments could lead to misunderstandings Imagine that your StarOffice Calc docu ment is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format 208 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 In StarOffice Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as 1 234 50 still remains in euro in another country and does not become dollars for example Cell Attributes Numbers Font Font Effects A
195. e Protect check box Access to servers via WebDAV and FIP protection Some passwords in StarOffice can be saved This saving applies according to context and dialog either for the duration of the current StarOffice session or it is permanently stored in a file Passwords are stored permanently for access to WebDAV services functions and FTP provided that in the corresponding dialogs you check the Save pass word box and enter a master password If you do not enter a master password the passwords are only saved for the duration of the current StarOffice session Ifthe saving is permanent in a file the file is protected by the master password If in a new StarOffice session you access a permanently saved password for the first time you are automatically first asked for the master password If you enter it correctly all permanently saved passwords are known and are not asked for again in the current StarOffice session Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 417 418 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 8 Appendix Sample Macros Provided We have provided a number of sample macros to help you in programming macros but also to serve as useful aids that you can use immediately These macros are only available in English regardless of the installation language Calling the Sample Macros 1 Choose Tools Macro The Macro dialog appears 2 In the middle field double click Gimmicks The Gimmic
196. e and click Open You will see the Import text files dialog Here you can decide which data to include from the text document Once the data is in a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet you can edit it as you want You have two ways of saving the data in a StarOffice data source Save the current StarOffice Calc spreadsheet in dBase format in the folder of a dBase database To do this choose File Save As then select the File Type dBase and the folder of the dBase database Check the data range in the StarOffice Calc spreadsheet and drag the area into a table container in the data source view The table container is the area on the left of the database explorer that is designated Tables see diagram An AutoPilot is started automatically me tHe vy eK Y aj Be se ah E amp Bibliography faly Links Kaarst Biitt Sautter Ka E Queries Kaarst Butte Seeboerget E Tables M nchen Borges Mal biblio M nchen Staas Diete D sseldorf Esser Hein Haar Borges Mal Haar Borges Mal M nchen Staas Diete M nchen Dangel Day Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 379 Exporting in CSV Text Format You can export the current StarOffice spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications 1 Choose File Save as 2 In Save as type select the filter Text CSV Enter a file name and click Save 3 This opens the Export of text files dialog in which you can select the character
197. e char content x You can enter as for exactly one character acter a placeholder in SQL queries either the SOL character or the familiar file system placeholder in the office name interface The or placeholder stands for any number of characters The question mark in the officename interface or the underscore _ in SQL queries is used to represent exactly one character NOT LIKE NOT LIKE Is not an element of the field name does not contain the specified expres sion BETWEEN x AND y BETWEEN x AND y falls within the interval x y the field name contains a value that lies between the two values x and y 384 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 StarOffice command SQL command Meaning Condition is satisfied if NOT NOT BETWEEN Does not fall the field name contains a BETWEEN xANDy within the value that does not lie x AND y interval x y between the two values x and y IN a b c IN a b c contains a b the field name contains one C of the specified expressions a Note that the b c Any number of expres semicolons sions can be specified and the are used as result of the query is deter Separators pe mined by an Or link The all value lists expressions a b c can be either numbers or characters NOT NOT does not the field name does not IN a b c IN a b c cont
198. e context menu You will see the Paragraph Style dialog with various tabs Click on the Font tab and specify the type size and style of the font p If you want to emphasize a particular passage in a letter just select the text and click the Bold or Italic icon To format only a single word simply place the cursor anywhere in the word and click Bold or Italic Make any other necessary changes then click the Save Document icon and close your document template When creating a template remember not to type a text for a particular letter The main purpose of a template is to define the general layout of a document Use the documents based on the template to add text for a letter 194 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating and Printing a Letter With an Envelope Once you have created a customized template for personal letters you will surely want to try it out and write and print a letter 1 2 gt 2 e Choose File New Templates and Documents In the dialog that now appears select your new template and click OK StarOffice will create a document based on the template though the template itself remains unchanged no matter how you modify the document Enter the text of your letter in the document Check if the addressee information on the envelope is correct If you plan to print or edit this document later on save it and enter a name Place an envelope in your printer Select the command File Pr
199. e context menu you will find your work is made much easier when it comes to dealing with frequent typing errors When you click the suggestion StarOffice not only replaces the red underlined word with the suggestion you clicked it also remembers this replacement for the remainder of this StarOffice session As soon as you make the same typing error StarOffice automatically replaces the mistyped word with the word you replaced it with previously Checking Multilingual Texts StarOffice Writer can manage spellchecking plus thesaurus and hyphenation in several languages In the StarOffice setup program during Custom Installation and later with the Modify option you can choose which language modules you want to install You select the language of your entire text document with Tools Options Language Settings Languages If applicable mark For the current document only For all paragraphs formatted with the same Paragraph Style you can apply a language via the Paragraph Style You can select a language for individual words via Character Styles or directly with Format Character In Tools Options Language Settings Writing Aids you can mark the option Check in All Languages Now the spellcheck will take all installed languages into account Words that are correctly typed in any of the installed languages are regarded as correctly typed irrespective of their language attribute In multilingual texts the automatic checking tha
200. e document is the main toolbar This varies depending on the document type text spreadsheet presentation drawing or formula Other toolbars such as the option bar and color bar will be described later It is easy to modify the toolbars For example if you would rather have the main toolbar on the right edge of the document instead of on the left simply hold down Ctrl and drag it there If you want to change the sequence of icons on a bar you can drag the icons to the new location whilst pressing the Alt key in the Windows version You can find more information about adapting StarOffice starting on page 401 Many icons open what we call floating toolbars These icons have small triangles to indicate that you can open the floating toolbar with a long click These icons behave differently depending on whether you do a short or long click on them see page 28 Using Floating Toolbars The Insert icon is at the top of the main toolbar of a text document Do a long click on this icon This opens a floating toolbar containing further icons You now have a choice Either click the icon that you want to activate or seize the floating toolbar by its title bar and drag it away from the main toolbar while 28 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 holding down the mouse button You first have to release the mouse button other wise you cannot seize the title bar with the mouse Now look at the icon at the top of the main tool
201. e function Count taumbers only StDev Sample 5tOevP Population Var Sample VarP Population Cancel Help Reset Delete As soon as you press Enter or click OK the sheet will be grouped according to the subtotals For every group of entries with an identical date a subtotal is calculated The grand total is displayed at the bottom Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 241 pee a a D ate Item Amount 01 02 00 Flowers 12 80 3 otM2 00 Sum 12 80 El 4 01 0200 Breakfast 2 48 5 o703 00 Sum 2 48 El 6 01 0400 Software 49 50 7 otH400 Sum 49 50 El a 01 0500 Newspaper 0 60 9 jotMsfoo Sum 0 60 10 01 0600 Fishing Trip 2 50 11 jotMeoo Sum 22 50 01 0700 Hat 6 25 ia 0107 00 Sum 14 01 0800 Shoes 6 25 99 40 15 O70S 00 Sum B09 Ff 16 Grand Total Coes Notice the controls to the left of the row headers They enable you to view which records rows have been summarized If you click on a minus sign only the row with the results is shown The easiest way to control the display is with the small digits above the group area If you click on 1 only the grand total is displayed 2 reveals the subtotals and 3 shows all elements Transferring Data From a Data Source to a Spreadsheet You can transfer individual spreadsheets from the data source browser into your StarOffice Calc spreadsheet document You have a choice of two different methods f
202. e if you want to select the entry from the records contained in the bibliography database or from the entries that are contained in the current document and which can differ from entries of the same name in the bibliography database An entry in the document content can be identical to an entry in the Biblio graphy Database The entry in the document has precedence 3 If the required entry already exists as a data record select it in the list box Short name and click Insert If the desired entry does not yet exist create a new entry If you use the New button to do this you can define a new record but this will only be recognized in the current document If the record should be included in your bibliography database choose Tools Bibliography Database enter the new record and then insert the bibliography database entry in the document Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 123 Updating Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents 1 Place the cursor in the index table and call the context menu 2 The context menu contains commands for updating editing or deleting the current index or table of contents By default they are protected from changes You can only set the cursor in an index or table of contents when under Tools Options Text Document Formating Aids the Cursor in protected areas Enable check box is marked To now edit the index or table of contents call from the context menu the
203. e master document the entry Text is shaded gray because consecutive texts are always combined to one single text Between individual inserted documents you can insert new text The new docu ments or texts are always inserted above the current entry However you can easily change their order with Drag amp Drop or with the icons Move down and Move up The inserted documents are inserted in the master document as protected areas That means that you cannot edit the documents within the master document It is possible however to navigate through the document with the cursor in order to read them All indexes are created directly in the master document i e in the sxg file They automatically include all subdocuments Ps If you change one or more subdocuments after creating an index you should update the indexes in the master document To do this click the icon Update on the Navigator for master documents and select the entries to be updated from the submenu References work between Master Document and subdocuments as well as within subdocuments when these are definite in all documents involved Therefore if the figures in a subdocument are numbered from figure 1 to figure 10 the figures in the next subdocument can start with figure 11 If you want you can save the master document together with all its parts as a combined StarOffice Writer document To do this choose the command File Save as and choose a normal StarOffice
204. e now available Changing Toolbars Ifyou want to copy an icon say from an object bar to the function bar so that it is always visible simply hold down the Alt key and drag the icon to its new location StarOffice automatically remembers the configuration of the toolbars To delete an icon hold down the Alt key while dragging it out of its toolbar and drop it outside of the toolbars If you want to have a separating dash on the toolbar drag an icon slightly to the right while holding down the Alt key To delete a separating dash drag the icon to the right of the separating dash slightly to the left while holding down the Alt key The context menu of the toolbars contains a Visible Buttons command This opens a submenu with a list of predefined icons Icons with ticks beside them are visible on the toolbar in question Click on an item to switch the icon from visible to hidden and vice versa You can also use the Visible buttons command in the context menu of the toolbars to have a quick overview of the icon names and their functions Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 403 Inserting Moving and Deleting Icons on Toolbars We will show you later how you to deal with all the functions possible in StarOffice including self writing macros to connect a function as an icon in a toolbar 1 Open a document of the type for which you want to modify the toolbar If you want to modify the text object bar fo
205. e selected grouped combined merged subtracted and intersected Selecting several objects at the same time has a temporary effect as soon as you click elsewhere on the page or slide the area will be deselected Grouping and combining are valid until the group or the combination is dese lected with the command from the context menu or the Modify menu You can also combine these commands for example to group together several groups add a combination and combine the results as a group or combination Grouping Objects You can combine several objects into a group To do this select them together and call the context menu where you choose Group All changes made to a group will have an effect on all objects in the group In particular groups can be moved rotated etc as a single object For example if you want to draw a bicycle you can first construct a wheel composed of a tire rim spokes and hub and then you can group these objects together This makes it easy to rotate the wheel duplicate it and move the second wheel to the appropriate position Finally draw the frame and the rest of the bicycle and form a new group To edit an object that is part of a group you do not need to redefine the group you simply need to enter the group You can edit an object in the group and exit the group when you are finished Entering Groups You enter a group by first selecting either click it or use the keyboard see in
206. e the footnote character and choose Edit Foot note or double click immediately before the footnote character To define general settings applied automatically to footnotes in the document choose Tools Footnotes to open the Footnote Settings dialog You can format footnotes with Page Setup by choosing Format Page Foot note In multicolumn pages the footnote is inserted in the column where the footnote anchor is situated You can also use the mouse to jump from the footnote anchor to the foot note The mouse pointer changes its appearance as soon as it is over the footnote anchor 166 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Spacing Between Footnotes If you want a bigger distance between the different footnotes or endnotes you can add an invisible white line as the lower border to the corresponding paragraph format 1 oO eA WwW N ON Place the cursor in a footnote Open the Stylist Click on the Paragraph Style to be modified footnote Open the context menu and select Modify On the Borders tab page select a top and a bottom line and give them both the color white In the Spacing to contents area unmark the Synchronize check box Increase the value of the upper or lower spacing Click OK Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 167 opellcheck Dictionaries Hyphenation Controlling the Spellcheck via Dialog Often a little trick is necessary in order t
207. e to one factor of calculations composed of several factors For instance see how changing the period in a loan calculation affects the interest rates or repayment amounts Furthermore you can manage larger tables by using different predefined scenarios Dynamic Charts StarOffice Calc lets you display spreadsheet data in a clear way by selecting the data to be displayed and clicking the Insert Chart icon Drag open a frame at the required position define specific chart settings in the dialog that appears The chart is inserted at the selected position and if the source data is modified will be dynamically updated Importing and Exporting Data You can import data from other spreadsheets programs edit them in StarOffice Calc and if you want output them in different export formats Referencing Data in Networks and Internet Instead of having a fixed value or formula that refers to other cells in the sheet each StarOffice Calc cell can also contain a reference to contents in other docu ments The documents referred to do not have to exist on your local computer they can also be stored in a network or anywhere in the Internet 198 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The StarOffice Calc Window BB untitled StarOffice 6 0 ee JEREC pew Mih ei pus N g AAAA T r Background Navy igato Y A a a B E E BE E i Range names FAA Database Ranges
208. e which Paragraph Styles are also to appear in the table of contents and on which level they are to be shown If you later want to change the headings rearrange their sequence or insert new chapters you will have to update the table of contents Place the cursor in the table of contents Call the context menu and choose Update Index Table You can also select Tools Update All Indexes and Tables to update all the indexes and tables of contents in a document Creating Alphabetical Indexes 1 Place the cursor where you want to create the index 2 Choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables The Insert Index Table dialog appears 3 On the Index Table tab select Alphabetical Index as Type 4 To generate the alphabetical key word index using the default settings click OK You have the options of whether letters under which entries exist are to be high lighted as subtitles alphabetical delimiter in the Entries tab or if case sensitivity is to be taken into account when sorting and much more If you want to change the formatting of the individual lines in the index it is best to edit the Paragraph Styles in the Stylist All direct formatting will be overwritten at the next update 120 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using a Concordance File If required you can add index entries from a concordance file A concordance file contains a number of key words and information as to how these words are t
209. ea Draw Functions ql RBNM RK CeeTIL ana I E Ba Line fy Area Text Position and Size Arrange Alignment Wrap Anchor pier Caption Group amp cut Strg X Ba Copy Strg C 4 GB paste Strg dfe gt gt 4 5 Open the context menu for the selected drawing object 6 Choose the Area command to assign a color or pattern to the area inside the rectangle 7 On the left side of the Area tab page select the option Gradients and choose e g gradient 4 Close the dialog with OK 8 Open the context menu once more and select the Line command to define the border properties of the rectangle 110 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Line Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Line properties Arrow styles Style Style Continuous none none Color Width E Light red 4 85cm a 85cm A Width Center 1 Center Transparency os Synchronize ends Cancel Help Reset 9 For the line choose a color and a width Close the dialog with OK 10 Double click in the middle of the rectangle and type your text It does not matter if the text extends beyond the width of the rectangle 11 Click again on the border of the rectangle in order to select it Then open the context menu and select Text 12 In the Text dialog click the Text Animation tab Under Text Animation select Effects and in the co
210. ea Data source URL 373 To register a data source in StarOffice click New Data Source in the top left corner of the dialog Then choose the type of data source in the Database type combo box You can choose from the following database types depending on the operating system Database type Meaning Adabas A slightly scaled down version of the well known rela tional database system Adabas is installed with its own setup program JDBC Link to databases contacted via a JDBC driver ODBC Link to databases contacted via an ODBC driver dBase DBase files can be edited directly with the driver for direct access in the file system ADO Link to databases contacted via the ADO driver Text You can register text files such as comma separated CSV files read only Spreadsheet You can register StarOffice Calc and MS Excel spread sheets read only Address Book This address book driver allows you to register the system address book or another address book source read only It also ensures that data fields are correctly assigned to the templates supplied by us in form letters for example How to register a new data source of a particular database type is explained in the StarOffice Help Choose View Data Sources to view and if necessary edit the data sources with your spreadsheets and queries At the upper edge is a window which you can show or hide move around and dock to another edge see
211. eadsheets particular emphasis e g in a table of turnovers show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red You can do this with Conditional Formatting for spread sheet documents see page 278 Formating Numbers Enter a number into the sheet for example 1234 5678 This number will be displayed in the default number format with two decimal places You will see 1234 57 when you confirm the entry Only the display in the document will be rounded off internally the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point 1 Set the cursor at the number and choose Format Cells to start the Cell Attrib utes dialog 2 On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format 3 In this dialog you can define other attributes in addition to number formats which apply to the selected cells or cell contents On the Font tab page for example you can define a font size and color a If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed the easiest method is to use the Number Format Add Decimal Place or Number Format Delete Decimal Place icons on the object bar As you can see from the list of options you can format the date and time any way you would like Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 21
212. eate new Page Styles 2 Apply Page Styles 3 Edit Page Styles 4 If you want you can format the page numbers in the Paragraph Style of the footer 86 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Do not use the Offset box under Insert Fields Other Document tab to change the page number of a page The offset is only used for example at the end of a page to display the number of the next page i e to offset the display it does not change the page number itself The manually entered page number in contrast to the automatically numbered page numbers is an attribute of that particular page This property is set as direct formatting in the first paragraph of that page Create Page Styles 1 Open the document in which you want to enter or change the page numbers You can also begin with a new text document although you need to first enter some text and page breaks to be able to follow the steps described here 2 abe Open the Stylist 3 Select the Page Styles view in the Stylist Page Styles ill 12 EL Hew Modify elete Footnote HTML Index Left Page Right Page 4 Call up the context menu of one of the Page Styles and select the New command You will see the Page Style dialog with the Organizer tab page The cursor will be blinking in the Name text box where you can directly enter the name of the first new Page Style Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 87 Page Style
213. ect of this type in your document ddi ler If the Navigator arrows in the scroll bar in the lower right corner appear black you can scroll through the pages of your document If the arrows appear blue you can scroll to each object of the same category you have selected in the Navigator e g to each table or bookmark and so on In the main section of the Navigator there are entries for Headings OLE objects Hyperlinks References etc A plus sign in front of one of the entries means that there are corresponding objects in the selected document and that you can have the list of the objects of this type shown by clicking the plus sign or double clicking the entry Double click one of the object names to display it in the document and move the cursor to that position By the way the names of the elements in the Navigator can be easily modified In the context menu of the name right click the name you will find the command for renaming Jumping From One Reminder to Another In the Navigator you can also set temporary reminders that stay in effect until you close the document This method makes it easy to move between particular loca tions in the document for example if you want to look up or add something later 1 Position the cursor at the position in the text where you want to set a reminder 2 Click the Set Reminder icon in the Navigator The reminder will not be visible in the document 3 If you want to jump to a remind
214. ed as a date If you want to make a number be displayed instead set the number format to 1 234 for example and close the dialog with the OK button 6 You should now see in cell A3 the number of days between today s date and the specified date 7 Experiment with some additional formulas in A4 enter A3 24 to calculate the hours in A5 enter A4 60 for the minutes and in A6 enter A5 60 for seconds Press the Enter key after each formula The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 211 formula and pressed the Enter key This value is not automatically updated although Now continuously changes of course In the Tools menu the menu item Cell Contents AutoCalculate is normally active however automatic calcu lation does not apply to the function NOW If it were your computer would be solely occupied with updating the sheet Canceling the automatic calculation function is only necessary if your spreadsheets contain a very large amount of data or very complicated formulas which you want to modify before viewing the calculation results Calculation time naturally becomes longer as the complexity and size of a spreadsheet increases Inserting and Editing Notes You can assign a note to each cell by choosing Insert Note The note is indicated by a small red s
215. eet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet The data is inserted in the place where you release the mouse button Inserting controls in a text form When you create a text form linked to a database you can generate controls by drag and drop from the data source view When you drag a database column into the text document you insert a field If you hold down Shift Ctrl while dragging a text field is inserted grouped with an appropriate label field The text field already contains all the database informa tion that you need for the form Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 393 Copying Sheet Areas to Text Documents 1 2 3 Open both the text document and the spreadsheet Select the sheet area you want to copy Point to the selected area and press the mouse button Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment then drag the area into the text document If the documents are not visible next to each other first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button Continue to hold down the mouse button The document addressed in this way is displayed and you can move the mouse pointer within the document Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area release the mouse button The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object You can select and edit the OLE object at any time To edit the OLE object si
216. egister true select Activate Editing Headers To edit a header click in the header field in your document With the context menu Page activate the Page Styles dialog Select the Headers tab and click Options In the Borders Background dialog choose a background color and click OK then confirm the following dialog as well 184 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Editing Columns To change the number of columns or create a dividing line between columns acti vate the Page Styles dialog via the Page context menu Click on the Columns tab Change the number of columns in the spin box Amount and modify the distance between the columns in the spin box Spacing Make sure that the Automatic Width field is selected To create a dividing line select a narrow line from the Line list box under Sepa rator set the Height to 75 and define the position as Centered Finally click OK to close the dialog Page Style Default Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Columns Footnote Settings Columns Z Width and spacing Column l Width Spacing IY AutowWidth Separator line une apt Height 75 Position Centered ii Cancel Help Reset fet To place headings or subheadings that are more than a column wide into a multi column text we suggest you put them in a text frame You can freely scale and position your text frame on the page You can inse
217. elected On the Error Alert tab page select the action to be carried out in the event of an error If you select Stop as the action invalid inputs will not be accepted and the previous cell contents will be retained Select Warning or Information to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled the cell value will be retained or accepted even if the new value violates the validity rule If you select Macro then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be carried out in the event of an error 260 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Sample macro Function ExampleValidity CellValue as String TableCell as String Dim msg as string meg inva lad value ss Cellvaluc ss msg msg amp in table amp amp TableCell amp MsgBox msg 16 Error message End FUNCETON After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK you must first select another cell before the change takes effect Printing or Exporting Spreadsheets There are many print options for putting your spreadsheets on paper Another way of distributing your data is to publish it on the Internet in HTML format Printing Sheet Details When printing a sheet you can select which details are to be printed Row and column headers Sheet grid Notes Objects and graphics Charts Drawing objects Formulas To choose the details proceed as fol
218. ell and the 11 cells below it Choose Edit Fill Series a e In the dialog select Date and Month Click OK The first date of each month automatically appears in the selected cells Managing Your Stock Portfolio This template will be of interest to anyone who owns shares StarOffice Calc port folio management offers you a complete overview of your shareholdings any movements buying prices market values and much more besides In the following we explain how easy it is to manage your own portfolio with StarOffice You can always find out the current daily stock prices for your shares from news papers but they are much more current if you get them online over the Internet StarOffice comes with a template that you can easily fill with your data You will find the StarOffice Calc Stocks Manager file in File New Templates and Documents Finances category First open the Stocks Manager template delivered with StarOffice We will be working with this document in the following section Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 267 Selecting the Currency In the Portfolio Currency dialog in the Currency Stock Exchange list box select the currency you prefer In this dialog specify the currency for your portfolio as well as the stock exchange used for an Internet update of the values P To use more than one currency for your portfolio create a second document using the template Confirm your selection
219. entering data text and numbers obtaining results modifying source data or formulas and how to view results of new data or formulas StarOffice provides you with various sample spreadsheets and templates which you can fill out and use according to your needs Besides the four basic arithmetic operations you can enter other operators nested brackets and many other functions The AutoPilot Functions is there to help you with the inputting of functions 204 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using a Function Based on the Example of Euro Conversion If you enter a formula e g 4 5 or A3 A4 100 in a cell and then press the Enter key the end result of your calculation will appear in the cell You can also enter functions in your formula An example could be SIN 1 which shows you the result of sine of one rounded to two decimal places StarOffice Calc has several other functions too and you can add additional func tions yourself using StarOffice Basic or AddIns The StarOffice Help shows you how to do this In most cases though the standard functions provided in the program are enough to fulfill your needs The function with the Syntax CONVERT arguments will be introduced here as an example If you want to convert a sum of 100 into euros you can write the following formula in a cell CONVERT 100 USD EUR The result you obtain will be the number of Euros for 100 US dollars The sum to be converted is alw
220. ents This section contains a list of the shortcut keys that are of interest for work with text documents Moreover the general shortcut keys in StarOffice also apply Function Keys Used in Text Documents Shortcut Keys Effect F2 Formula Bar Ctrl F2 Insert Fields F3 Complete AutoText Ctrl F3 Edit AutoText F4 Open Data Source View F5 Navigator on off Shift F5 Go to next frame Ctrl Shift F5 Navigator on F7 Spellcheck Ctrl F7 Thesaurus F8 Extended Selection Ctrl F8 Field shadings on off Shift F8 Additional Selection F9 Update fields Ctrl F9 Show fields Ctrl Calculate Table Ctrl Shift F9 Update Input Fields Ctrl F10 Nonprinting Characters on off F11 Stylist on off Shift F11 Create Style Ctrl Shift F11 Update Style F12 Numbering on Ctrl F12 Insert Table Shift F12 Bullets on Ctrl Shift F12 Numbering Bullets off 426 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys Specific to Text Documents Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl A Select All Ctrl J Justify Ctrl D Double Underline Ctrl E Centered Ctrl F Find and Replace Ctrl Shift P Superscript Ctrl L Align Left Ctrl R Align Right Ctrl Shift B Subscript Ctrl Y Style Catalog Ctrl 1 Single Line Spacing Ctrl 2 Double Line Spacing Ctrl 5 1 5 Line Spacing Ctrl Calculates the selected area e g 3487 3456 The result is cop
221. ents 398 objects 347 polygons 347 mirroring object positions 151 mouse pointers when using drag and drop 387 moving icons 408 text sections 74 toolbars 404 multicolumn text 76 multi page view of document 41 multiple documents indexes 125 multiple operations applying 254 cross classified tables 256 multiple sheets references to 214 multiple spreadsheets 213 multiplying objects 343 multiselection 53 my documents work directory 35 N names as addressing 223 as captions 152 in tables 222 names of chapters in headers 160 natural language addressing tables 223 navigating in text 65 Navigator mini Navigator 116 networks AutoTextin 104 next page pagenumbers 163 next style Page Styles 162 Next Style 89 non breaking dash 66 notes incells 212 in presentations 315 inserting in cells 275 printing 261 notes for cells 212 number formats incells 215 numbering automatic 130 152 chapters 128 continuing 136 interrupting 136 lines 137 named 126 Numbering Styles 82 126 raising the level of 135 text lines 137 turning on and off 128 number of pages changing 86 number ranges defining 131 152 numbers changing text number format 208 formatting intables 215 line numbering 137 Numbers in Cells 207 Numbers starting witha zero 208 O object changing sizes 430 object bar matching 404 object bars moving 404 switching 408 objects aligning 330 anchoring 151 arranging 330 borders of 69 captioning 152 c
222. eparate template known as the default template This default template will be used every time you open a new text docu ment by choosing File New Text Document for example l 2 Create or open a document that contains your favorite Styles and formatting You can delete the text of the document if you want so that only the Styles and other settings remain Save the document as template by choosing File Templates Save Doing so saves the document as a template in staroffice6 0 user template Choose File Templates Organize In the left list box of templates double click Default The name of the default template you have saved will appear Click the name Open the context menu and choose Set as Default Template Close the dialog This template will now be used as the default template Reset Default Template 1 2 3 Choose File Templates Organize Open the context menu of one of the list boxes or open the submenu of the Commands button Choose Reset Default Template This command opens a submenu in which you see every document type for which you have selected a default template Select the document type you want to assign the default settings to Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 95 Templates and Styles The templates in StarOffice are files you can use as basis for creating your own documents Templates can contain text logos other graphic objects etc In addi tion every tem
223. eps of Action il Preview Create summary Help Cancel lt lt Back Hext zs 10 If you click the plus sign in front of a slide the headings from the first outline level will be shown 11 If you check the Create summary check box the Auto Pilot will create an addi tional last slide with a summary of all the titles of the previous slides in the presentation Normally this is not necessary since most templates already include such a page 12 Click Create and your presentation will be created You can click Create on any of the AutoPilot pages You don t always have to go through all the pages of the Auto Pilot You can now edit save and print or run your presentation etc To start a presentation on a computer screen just press Ctrl F2 key or click the Presentation icon on the main toolbar 292 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating a Simple Presentation Without the AutoPilot This section explains with the help of a simple example how to create a presenta tion based on one of the existing templates Open anew presentation document based on one of the supplied templates by choosing File New Templates and Documents or with Shift Ctrl N Inthe Templates and Documents dialog that now appears click the Templates icon on the left and then double click Presentation Backgrounds Double click one of the templates such as Note Pad You now see a slide in which you can replace
224. er Help Cancel lt lt Back On this page you can select the presentation medium for your presentation Slide Overhead Screen or Paper The dimensions margins and orientation of your presentation will depend on your selection To continue following this example do not change the background or medium of your presentation Click Next Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 289 Page three of the AutoPilot deals with the slide transition AutoPilot Presentation Introducing a New Product Select a slide transition Effect Speed Medium ii Select the presentation type introducing a New Product Default C Automatic DUSTIN of page 00 00 10 DURATION OT patse 00 00 10 If Preview z show loga Help Cancel lt lt Back Create 4 Inthe first list box select the slide effect Cross Fade From Left Select the default Medium for the speed of change 5 Select Automatically as the presentation type i e repeatedly runs through presentation with fixed time lapses until the Escape key is pressed Now you can determine further parameters 6 Use the Duration of page spin box to determine how long each slide is shown before the next one appears Once you have finished your presentation you can set a different duration for each slide individually 7 Use the Duration of pause spin box to determine how long the pause will be at end of the presentation before it starts
225. er select the Reminder entry in the mini Navi gator You can now move through the reminders by clicking the Previous and Next arrows 116 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Jumping to a Specific Page One of the functions of the Navigator is to allow you to move quickly to particular pages in long documents There is a very handy way of doing this even if you have not yet opened the Navigator All you need do is double click the current page number on the status bar and the Navigator opens Double clicking the display field on the status bar closes the Navigator again At the top of the Navigator is a spin button where you can enter the number of the page you want to go to After entering the page number press Return and the cursor is automatically placed on that page There is also a keyboard shortcut to do the same thing Press Ctrl Shift F5 to move the cursor to the spin box in the Navigator where you directly enter the desired page number Now press the Enter key You do not have to change to the new page with the cursor Enter a page number in the Navigator spin box and wait one or two seconds The respective page will appear If you enter another number that page will appear The cursor is placed on the page only when you press the Enter key Other Navigator Features The Navigator can be very helpful particularly in longer documents when you want to know about the objects in the document For example if you have an
226. er 31 1999 umber Currency Dec 31 99 Dec 31 1999 m near 1999 1127 01 scientific xl 21 ees 1000 hd pits Mecina places fo E Hegative numbers ren leading zeroes fo E Thousands separata Format code Phm oS O Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 237 Defining Database Ranges 1 Select the three column area and define the selected area as a database range by choosing Data Define Range 2 The selected range already appears in the Define Database Range dialog Be sure to mark the check box Contains column headers so that the first row is correctly taken into account This box becomes visible when you click the More button 3 Enter a name for the range and close the dialog with OK Define Database Range Mame Database OK Cancel Help HH lete ue Range lt lt Sheet ad C 32000 Options W Contains column headers Insert or delete cells Keep formatting Don t save imported data SOUPCE Operations The selected range is now defined as a database range which among other things means that the rows records can be conveniently sorted Sort lists and filters you have defined for the database range will be updated 238 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Sorting Database Ranges You have selected a range of cells and defined these as a database range by choosing Data Define Range Set the cursor in the database range and choose Data So
227. er be automatically hyphenated Excluding Text From the Spellcheck If you do not want certain areas words or tables to be checked by the spellcheck function because they are for example in a foreign language for which you have no module then specify Unknown as the language You can either use direct formatting to do this select your text and then choose Format Character Font or modify the corresponding Style for the text open the context menu and choose Edit Paragraph Style 46 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Using Automatic Functions StarOffice has all kinds of intelligent assistants to help you in your work all of which have names beginning with auto Here we introduce you to just a few of these auto functions For detailed explana tions refer to the StarOffice Help Using AutoCorrect and AutoFormat If you want it to StarOffice will format your documents as you type or thereafter and correct any typing errors you may make Once you have gotten used to using the AutoFormat and AutoCorrect functions while you type you will be able to draft your documents much more efficiently Here are a couple of examples AutoCorrect functions are helpful if you often make the same typing errors If for example you tend to capitalize not only the first letter of some words but also the second simply select the AutoCorrect function that corrects mistakes of this sort while you type AutoFormat formats your tex
228. ere you can choose the Interaction command A The Interaction Gallery theme contains additional buttons you can drag to your pages using the mouse This way your slides can contain interactive objects without additional programming You can link your own graphic objects 3D Objects and object groups with Inter action Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 317 Modifying Object Size If you want to change the object size drag a selection frame around the respective objects P Instead of using a selection frame you can also click on the individual objects and press the Shift key at the same time to make a multiple selection After you have selected the frames open the Position and Size dialog from the context menu In the tab Size you can apply the same size to all selected frames under the group box Size Creating Additional Objects If you need additional objects you can copy one and simply insert it as often as necessary Then position the rectangles in your document and align them with the snap lines P To display vertical and horizontal snap lines click on the respective ruler and drag a snap line from the ruler to the desired position Working with Connectors H In addition to the individual frames connectors are important components of an organization chart because they help represent the relationships within the organization StarOffice provides a variety of connector types Click on the Connect
229. erence Instead of referring to A 1 StarOffice Calc refers to Sheet1 A 1 If you want to address the first cell from both Sheet1 and Sheet2 in a single reference for example summarize the 3D formula will read SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet2 A1 The sum function has one addend here namely the range from Sheet 1 A1 to Sheet 2 A1 In this range there are two cells as long as no more cells are included between Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 The simple formula not a 3D formula would only list two addends SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet2 A1 If you also want to include any subsequently inserted sheets found between Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 the formula would then be SUM Sheet1 A1 Sheet2 B2 The full address of a cell also contains the complete path and file name of the spreadsheet document So in its full form the reference to cell A1 in sheet1 of the document name sxc on drive C is file c name sxc sheet1 A1 Note the single quotes surrounding the file name and the character that describes the location within the file in accordance with URL convention Printing Spreadsheets E If you click the Print File Directly icon in the Function bar all the sheets in your document will be printed However if you have selected a print range then only that part will be printed You can set the print range by selecting the cells that you want to print then use the Format Print Ranges Define command You can find further information on this topic in the
230. ers at line end and Characters at line begin to ensure that hyphenated words have at least three characters at the beginning or end of a line For text alignment in columns choose Justify on the Alignment tab 190 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Letters With Envelopes With StarOffice Writer you can write a letter in no time We will show you how easy it is There are two really easy ways for you to get the result you want You can use one of the many supplied letter templates or use the AutoPilot to create a letter template tailored to your needs Using a Ready Made Letter Template 1 Press Shift Ctrl N to open the Templates and Documents dialog Templates and Documents Samples E EE Formulas Mew Document Presentations Spreadsheets a Text Documents Templates My Documents Samples Organize Edit Cancel Help 2 Select a template e g from the Personal Correspondence and Documents cate gory 3 Enter the details required for the various wildcards such as the salutation Type in the remaining text Templates use your user data that you can enter and modify whenever you like in Tools Options StarOffice User Data Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 191 Creating a Letter Template Using the AutoPilot 1 To start the AutoPilot choose File AutoPilot Click Letter in the submenu and you will see the first page of the AutoPilot for Letter
231. ert Section You can define other settings for the section in the dialog 3 Click Insert You can insert other documents or sections from other documents In this case Links must be marked You can enter a file name in the text box or click to search for a file You can select a named section of the document in the Section combo box When you open a document that contains linked sections you will be asked whether you want to update these sections If you answer yes the current versions of the linked sections will be updated Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 77 Under Windows you can also use the DDE method to keep inserted sections up to date with the current status of the original files You can also have sections as files in HIML documents The inserted sections are automatically updated when StarOffice loads the relevant HTML document again Web browsers show the content of the sections as at the time the content was saved as an HTML document Editing Sections You can edit the sections in your text document by choosing Format Sections This dialog allows you to protect sections unprotect sections reveal hidden sections change the conditions and remove sections i e turn them back into normal text Formatting Text With and Without Styles Text often appears monotonous unless you apply visual effects to it To give struc ture to the text to emphasize individual words quotations or referen
232. es available in other docu ments you need to create a template The template contains all the Styles from the current document 1 If you want you can delete all text from the current document leaving only the Styles You can apply Styles from one text document to another text document Choose Format Styles Load 2 Call the menu command File Templates Save 3 In the dialog Document Templates select the category in which you would like to save your template In the New Template text field enter the name for your template and click OK Later you can open a dialog with File New Templates and Documents and select a template to be used in creating a document The defined Text and Para graph Styles will then be available for the new document 84 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The Advantages of the Stylist Above we have shown you how to apply the Styles in the Stylist to your text and you also know how to apply your own Styles Styles have the advantage that they do not have to be redefined every time In this way you can apply the desired formatting to your document quickly and easily But the Stylist offers you still more possibilities Formatting Multiple Paragraphs In the work described in this section you applied the same Paragraph Style Heading 1 to several paragraphs The Stylist can save you a lot of time on this task 1 In the Stylist select the Style you want to apply to multiple paragra
233. es will be shown in the small Preview window ril Je To apply a different color to the connector open the Line dialog with the context menu Changing Font and Font Size If you want to change the font and font size you should do so using a Style so that you only have to make these changes once Click in one of the frames and open the Stylist The Graphics Style Object with shadow is selected In the context menu choose Modify to open the Graphics Style Object with shadow dialog and click on the Font tab to define the desired font type and size After you click OK the text in all of the frames will be displayed according to your settings 320 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Modifying Colors To assign a different color to a frame use the mouse to drag a selection frame around the respective frame Select Area in the context menu to open the dialog of the same name Select a color on the Object Fill tab Further design options are available with the various color schemes in the Gradients tab Choose one of the existing color gradi ents all of which can also be edited and modified Further Information Using a Snap Grid To work with greater precision you can also use the grid function To display a erid click the option Use Snap Grid under Tools Options Presentation Grid In addition you can also select Visible Grid to help you position the objects more easily Editing Glue Points By default the
234. essful The result is indicated for you to use if you want to Click Yes to enter the result in cell A5 Applying Multiple Operations Multiple Operations in Columns or Rows If the data of a data range is one above the other for columns or next to each other for rows select the data range together with the cell or cell range next to or below it as the target range In the Column Row field enter the cell reference to the first cell in the data range In the Formula field enter the cell reference to the cell with the formula that applies to the data range Examples You produce toys which you sell for 10 each Each toy costs 2 to make in addi tion to which you have fixed costs of 10 000 per annum How much profit will you make in a year if you sell a particular number of toys Consider the following table A B C D E F 1 Selling price 10 Annual sales Annual profit 2 Directcosts 2 500 6000 3 Fixed costs 10000 1000 2000 4 Quantity 2000 1500 2000 5 Profit B4 B1 B2 B3 2000 6000 254 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Calculating With One Formula and One Variable l To calculate the profit first enter any number as the quantity items sold in this example 2000 The profit is found from the formula Profit Quantity Selling price Direct costs Fixed costs Enter this formula in B5 In column D enter certain annual sales one under the other e g in step
235. etter You can format it with a character set of your choice Then set the font size to about 400 pt This font size is just to let you check when you convert to 3D the text will take up exactly the space you have drawn for the text independent of the font size you selected rz Pe seEe TIES 7 Siieectieat Saice z PIPETTE ES rz tise 7 ezez F F h at ojej a l iNT Step 1 5ep2 Steps Step 4 S5 w Draw the text box using the Text icon on the floating toolbar of the same name from the main toolbar Select the letter and then manually enter 400 in the Size field on the text object bar You may then select another typeface such as bold Step 2 Select the text field with the letter and choose Convert To 3D on the Modify menu You can modify the color of the object by selecting Area on the Format menu Of course it is also possible to assign a gradient or a bitmap graphic to the object Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 367 After you have moved on to step 2 in the Workshop document click in the other window and select the letter S again Step 3 The 3D object can be modified in a different way Select the object and then click the Format 3D Effects menu item The options available include options for setting the depth of the object and the focal length of the camera In addition you can set the individual illumination and the texture model The sample object was given its special shape by adjusting t
236. evant cell and choose Insert Note You will see a shadowed area in the document where you can enter text To make this note visible all the time click in the relevant cell cells with notes have a small red dot in the corner provided Note Indicator in Tools Options Spreadsheet View is marked open the context menu and choose Show Note Otherwise you only see the note when you move the mouse pointer on to the cell Inserting a sheet into another document Select the cell range and copy it to the clipboard Copy icon on the function bar Open the document into which you want to insert the sheet generally a text docu ment and insert the sheet Insert command Displaying formulas To display the references in your spreadsheets choose Tools Options Spread sheet View and mark Formulas The best way to examine an individual formula is to click the cell containing the formula and then click the AutoPilot Functions icon on the formula bar Using print ranges Print ranges have been used in the sample document to print specifically targeted cells Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 275 Shift Plan Duty Roster Using a variety of functions in StarOffice you can produce a shift plan with a minimum of effort A shift plan is a greatly extended timetable combining the schedules of several employees into a common spreadsheet By creating links to other spreadsheets the information contained in the shift p
237. executed 336 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The object bar contains several icons with which you can among other options change the type of the selected point A detailed explanation of the various options can be found in the StarOffice Help 4 If you want to convert the type of data point select the point The object bar shows the type of point corner point smooth transition or symmetric transi tion 5 Click one of the icons to change the type of point Of course you can also edit curves in the conventional manner i e changing width color and in the case of a filled curve the object fill The options for changing these attributes are found in the Object bar However if the Edit points icon is not pressed you can use the context menu or the Format and Modify menus Also try out the other icons on the Curves floating toolbar When you finish a filled curve by double clicking it is automatically closed and all internal areas are filled Vectorizing Bitmaps With StarOffice Impress or StarOffice Draw you can also transform pixel images so called bitmaps into vector drawings One of the advantages of vector graphics is that they look good in any scale when printed This is different when printing scaled bitmaps since unattractive effects may appear such as missing or zigzag lines etc 1 Select the bitmap you want to vectorize for example by clicking once on the object 2 ix Choose Convert To
238. export takes over the settings for the viewing length of each page in the presentation A default HTML presentation is the result in which the pages are turned automatically The sound reminders for turning the pages can also be exported if desired The sound files would then be copied in the target directory and played back when a HTML page is loaded 306 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Exchanging Data via the Clipboard Objects in a drawing or presentation document can also be copied to the clipboard and then inserted elsewhere The objects are stored as vector graphics on the clip board using the following procedure 1 Select an object in the current document and copy it to the clipboard with Ctrl C 2 Switch to the application where you want to insert the object 3 ES Insert the contents of the clipboard at the desired location with Ctrl V Business Keport Here we explain how to create a business report for a presentation In the following example we assume that you want to show the presentation on a computer Creating a Business Report in Presentation Form A template for a business report is provided which you can fill out with your own text and data Go to the Menu bar and select File New Presentation The AutoPilot for Presentations will appear Select From Template on the first page Now select Presentations in the list box and then in the field beneath it Business Report Click Create A
239. f a presentation it will be inserted where the cursor is Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 395 Revision Marking Function The revision marking function in StarOffice Writer and Calc highlights changes to documents so that you can see who changed what and when Recording and Displaying Changes When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet the review function marking changes redlining makes it possible to document who made which changes so that this is clear to everyone On the final edit of the document it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected Imagine you are an editor and are delivering your latest report But before publica tion the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader and both will add their changes Perhaps the senior editor writes clarify after one para graph and crosses out another entirely The proofreader checks the spelling of your document and notes two cases where explicit references to the gender of an imaginary person could be reworded to avoid gender entirely The edited document comes back to you and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers Let s say you also e mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past You asked for a few suggestions and the document is now returned by e mail with your col
240. f you enter 0 1 2 AutoCorrect causes the three characters 1 and 2 to be replaced by a single character The same applies to 1 4 and 3 4 This replacement is defined in Tools AutoCorrect Replace tab If you want to see multidigit fractions such as 1 10 you must change the cell format to the multidigit fraction view Context menu of the Cell choose Format cells You can then enter fractions such as 12 31 or 12 32 the fractions are however automatically reduced so that in the last example you would see 3 8 You can select other display options by choosing Format Cells All the defined formats are lists on the Numbers tab A preview shows you how the result will Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 207 look In this dialog you can define your own formats that you can then apply to numbers or other content of your spreadsheets There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero Enter the number as text The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe for example 0987 The apostrophe will not be entered in the cell and the number will be formatted as text Because it is in text format however you won t be able to calculate with this number Format a cell with a number format such as 0000 This format can be assigned in the Format code box under Format Cells Numbers tab and defines the cell display as always put a zero first and then the integer having at least thre
241. few lines in your text you can search for them using the options in the Text Format Search dialog If you want to replace the found attribute with another first position the cursor in the Replace with field Next click the Format button and then choose the replace ment attribute The chosen attributes will be listed under the Search for and Replace with fields If you do not indicate the replacement for the attribute found in the text the default settings are automatically applied The Similarity Search This function looks not only for the search term but also for similarly typed words You yourself can specify the degree of similarity when you click the button opposite the Similarity search check box 56 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer In this section you will learn about the StarOffice word processing module called StarOffice Writer First basic instructions are given then more sophisticated func tions are described At the end of the chapter we explain some of the templates and sample documents supplied with the module Further important information on working with texts in StarOffice Writer can also be found in the other chapters of this guide The general use of menus windows floating toolbars and so on is described in the chapter The User Interface starting on page 25 Information about customizing the user interface of StarOffice wor
242. ffers various Numbering Styles You apply these by double clicking the name of the Style 82 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating New Character Styles or Paragraph Styles You can create a new Style on the basis of an existing Style as follows 9 First of all apply new direct formatting to any characters or any paragraph which will become the Style To do this either use the text object bar or open the Format menu and choose Character or Paragraph Select the text or paragraph containing the new formatting For words or para graphs simply position the cursor in the respective word or paragraph At the top of the Stylist click the Paragraph Styles icon if you want to create a new Paragraph Style Click the Character Styles icon to create a new Character Style At the top of the Stylist click New Style from Selection This opens the Create Style dialog Enter a name for the new Style and click OK As you can see in the Stylist you have created a new Style in the Custom Styles group Now you can use your new Style for indirect formatting in your document You can also create a new Style without using an existing Style as the starting point 1 2 3 4 In the Stylist choose whether you want to create for example a Paragraph Style or Character Style by clicking the respective icon Call the context menu of the Stylist click right mouse button Choose New Enter the data for the desired S
243. fice to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing there are several ways of turning off this feature 48 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Undo URL recognition When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink press Ctrl Z to undo this formatting If you do not notice this conversion until later select the hyperlink and choose Format Default Turn off URL recognition 1 Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recogni tion If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents open a text document Choose Tools AutoCorrect In StarOffice Writer choose Tools AutoCor rect AutoFormat In the AutoCorrect dialog select the Options tab If you unmark URL Recognition words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks In StarOffice Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition The field in the first column is for later post editing and the field in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type Other AutoCorrect functions The AutoCorrect dialog includes a Replace tab containing many instances of auto matically replaced text This is where you can enter your most frequent typos and have AutoCorrect replace them with the right word You can also use this feature to enter characters that normally take time to enter from the keyboard For example when you type C this is immediately turned i
244. files or from the Gallery In a chart you can select individual data series or data points by clicking on them then open the context menu to find numerous options for formatting the view Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 233 Editing Chart Titles Suppose you have inserted a chart in a StarOffice Calc document and want to change the title 1 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart Double click on the default title text A gray border appears around the text and now you can change it Press Return to create a new line If you single click on the title instead of double clicking you can move it with the mouse Choose Format Title Main Title to edit the formatting of the main title This opens the Title dialog Select for example the Characters tab if you want to change the font Click OK In your document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Editing Chart Legends Suppose you have inserted a chart in a StarOffice Calc document and want to apply a color gradient to the legend 1 4 Double click on the chart A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart Choose Format Legend or double click on the legend This opens the Legend dialog Select for example the Area tab if you want to modify the
245. floating toolbar 2 Text floating toolbar 10 Arrange floating toolbar 3 Rectangles floating toolbar 1 Insert floating toolbar 4 Ellipses floating toolbar 12 Effects window 5 3D Objects floating toolbar 13 Presentation window 6 Curves floating toolbar 14 Navigator window 7 Lines floating toolbar 15 Stylist window 8 Connectors floating toolbar 16 Color bar A Basic Presentation In this brief step by step example we show you how to create a presentation document For more information on the dialogs used refer to the StarOffice Help As with text documents there are various ways to start creating your presentation Open the AutoPilot Presentation by choosing File AutoPilot Presentation The AutoPilot will start automatically each time you create a new presentation although you can switch off the automatic mode on the first page of the AutoPilot if desired The AutoPilot is described in detail in the StarOffice Help If you turn off the AutoPilot in Tools Options Presentation General you can start with a new empty document e g by choosing File New Presenta tion Alternatively you can open a document that you modify how you want and save under a different name The supplied sample documents may be suitable for this purpose Or you can use one of the many templates available in the Templates and Documents dialog You can open this dialog by pressing Shift Ctrl N Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With
246. for branches and years Use the DataPilot to quickly find the data you are interested in A B E D E E i Sales _ _ Em ES Article Area Sales pers on 1998 1999 2000 4 video New York Fisher 200 000 00 197 000 00 220 000 00 5 JAudio New York Fisher 350 000 00 235 000 00 420 000 00 6 JAccessories New York Fisher 50 000 00 60 000 00 70 000 00 7 Video New York Fisher 300 000 00 180 000 00 310 000 00 8 Audio New York Fisher 270 000 00 200 000 00 270 000 00 9 JAccessories New York Fisher 25 000 00 50 000 00 40 000 00 10 Video New York Fisher 189 000 00 320 000 00 234 000 00 41 Audio New York Fisher 210 000 00 240 000 00 290 000 00 12 JAccessories New York Fisher 100 000 00 80 000 00 90 000 00 13 Video Miami Brown 150 000 00 160 000 00 180 000 00 14 Audio Miami Brown 210 000 00 250 000 00 300 000 00 MS Accessories Miami Brown 10 000 00 20 000 00 15 000 00 16 video Kissimmee Clark 250 000 00 300 000 00 340 000 00 17 Audio Kissimmee Clark 250 000 00 290 000 00 350 000 00 18 Accessories Kissimmee Clark 100 000 00 120 000 00 130 000 00 19 video washington Smith 200 000 00 220 000 00 250 000 00 20 Audio washington Smith 240 000 00 260 000 00 300 000 00 21 Accessories washington Smith 80 000 00 60 000 00 90 000 00 EA 23 Filter 25 Kissimmee New York Washington 100 000 00 10 000 00 175 000 00 80 000 00 365 000 00 ES 250 000 00 210 000 00 830 000 00 240 000 00
247. g in text 65 keyboard commands general 422 L labeling images 350 labels creating 178 from database 181 numbered 179 synchronizing 178 landscape printing 262 languages spellcheck in different 45 layouts for spreadsheets 218 for tables 218 leading zeros 208 legends incharts 234 letters converting to curves 339 form letters 174 letter templates 51 lexicon thesaurus 172 light source 233 limiting value specifying on input 258 line numbers 137 lines aligning text with 114 around text 69 changing automatically 100 drawing 335 drawing in text 112 inserting 158 numbering 137 under headers 163 Lines in Organization Charts 318 linking frames 107 links formatting 48 lists importing 135 logarithmic representations charts 233 LOOKUP master document 134 lowercase letters text 73 Index 451 M macro carrying out for incorrect input 258 Macros interupting 424 samples 419 main toolbar matching 404 main toolbars moving 404 manual hyphenation 170 marginal frame 151 marginal numbers text pages 137 marking changes 396 master document indexes 134 LOOKUP 134 master documents 132 masterpage defining 297 masterpages defining 298 switching 298 match case 54 matching toolbars 404 matrix area filling 431 measurement units documents 407 rulers 410 Memo field 380 menu bar overview 27 menus configuring examples 402 452 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 merging docum
248. gement in 2D levels For example in 3D the stars from the European flag stand out vividly from the blue background of the flag You can convert just about all objects to 3D Groups can be converted as long as they contain convertible objects Bitmaps will be laid as a texture over a rectangular object of adequate size Metafiles will be broken down into a group of polygons and then converted Draw objects with text on them display the text in raised form on their surface e g a rectangle which you have double clicked and put text on 342 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Working With Objects You can select copy cut and paste the individual objects in a presentation or drawing document in much the same way as words in your texts You can also perform other actions that are only available for graphic objects For example you can duplicate cross fade or group these objects Figures placed in the drawing area rectangles circles lines etc are treated as objects Duplicating Objects Duplicating an object allows you to easily make a set number of copies of an object which differ in consistent degrees from one copy to the next in position orienta tion size and color If you want to draw a stack of coins for instance you can use the duplicate func tion Your basis consists of the bottom coin 1 Draw an ellipse or circle at the bottom of the slide 2 Choose the Edit Duplicate command to open the Dupl
249. gs and Numbering 126 Numbering and Numbering Styles 126 Turning Bullets On and Off 126 Turning Numbering On and Off 128 Outline Numbering 128 Automatic Numbering Bullets 130 Numbering Illustrations by Chapters 130 8 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide Defining Number Ranges 131 Using Master Documents and Subdocuments 132 Importing Lists From Other Text Programs 135 Changing Numbering via the Keyboard 135 Interrupting and Continuing Numbering 136 Numbering Lines 137 Tables in Text Calculating in Text 138 Inserting Tables 138 Deleting Tables 140 Inserting Paragraphs Before Tables at Start of Page 140 Preparing Tables in Text Documents 141 Calculating in Text Documents 143 Calculating in Text 144 Calculating With Formulas Located in Text 144 Performing Calculations With Tables in Text Documents 145 Calculating Across Multiple Tables 146 Calculating Cell Totals in Tables 147 Merging and Splitting Cells 147 Inserting or Deleting Rows Columns Using the Keyboard 148 Repeating Several Heading Rows in Tables 148 Enlarging and Reducing Cells in Text Tables 149 Adapting Table Widths 150 Copying Sheet Areas to Text Documents 150 Images Drawings Clipart and FontWork 151 Positioning Objects 151 Captions and Number Ranges 152 Numbering Illustrations by Chapters 153 Inserting Graphics 155 Inserting a Chart From StarOffice Calc 157 Inserting Decorative Horizontal Lines 158 Headers Footers and Footnotes 159 Contents 9 Remarks Concerning Headers a
250. h drag the icon in the same way to the side Switching Object Bars With the Context Menu The Object Bar is context dependent If the cursor for example is pointed toward a text table the icon for editing the table is automatically prepared If the cursor points to a bullet you will see an object bar with icons that are appropriate for bullets If the cursor is in a bullet within a table you can switch between the possible object bars as follows Click on the last icon on the right side of the object bar Or open the context menu of the object bar You will see a list of the possible object bars where you can click on the desired toolbar StarOffice remembers which object bar you chose in the respective context and shows this first the next time Inserting and Editing Tab Stops You set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler Alternatively you can set tab stops by choosing Format Paragraph Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs To assign tabs directly to a current Paragraph Style open the context menu of that paragraph and choose Edit Paragraph Style to call the Paragraph Style dialog where you then enter the tabs Click the ruler once to set a left justified tab Right click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type 408 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 To set several decimal tabs one after the other keep clicking the icon to the lef
251. h the mouse or by commands in the context menu You can also change the column width numerically via a dialog You can also distribute rows and columns evenly with the icons on the Optimize floating toolbar on the Table Object Bar With the mouse you can modify rows and columns either in the table directly or with the aid of the rulers If you rest the mouse on a vertical dividing line in the table the pointer appears as a separator symbol and you can simply drag the dividing line to the desired position You may need to click once outside the table before this procedure will work You can move the dividing lines on the ruler in the same way When you enlarge and reduce using the keyboard you must always hold down the Alt key If you also press one of the four arrow keys the current column or row will be enlarged or reduced by an amount that you can set under Tools Options Text Document Table under Keyboard handling with rows and columns being handled separately The current row or column is enlarged or reduced at its right hand or lower edge If you press the Shift key as well as Alt the left hand or upper edge will be moved Here are two examples Position the cursor in the middle of a medium to large text table Hold down the Alt key and press the right arrow key The current column will be expanded by the amount specified in the tab Table under Tools Options Text Document The left edge of the column remain
252. harac mot ters x and X This can be helpful for example if you want to use the document as a template but do not want the original text to be legible When you edit this macro you can define other replacement characters in the program code GetTexts This macro carries out a search in the active document text document spread sheet or drawing and compiles a list of the contents This sample helps you learn how to reference objects in the documents ReadDir Use this macro to see how a StarOffice Drawing can be filled with content and how the contents of directories are read A dialog asks you to specify a directory and then the macro creates a graphic list of all the files and subdirectories Userfields You can manage several sets of user data with this macro and switch back and forth between them This is helpful when more than one person uses the same StarOffice and each person wants to see his or her own user data in the fields Chapter 8 Appendix 421 General Shortcut Keys in StarOffice This gives the default shortcut keys used throughout StarOffice Using Shortcut Keys A great deal of your application s functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys For example the Ctrl O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys press and hold down the key Ctrl and then press the O key Release both keys after the dialog appe
253. hard copy rather than having to check everything on screen You print the current document either directly to a printer or to file When you print to a file all the information that would otherwise be sent to the printer is initially written to a file On another computer the file can then be copied directly to the printer connected to it StarOffice Writer always formats documents so that they are printed as well as possible with the selected printer Therefore you must always define a default printer even if you do not have a printer Click the Print File Directly icon on the function bar to print the current document without the intervention of a dialog You control printing mainly with the Print dialog which you open by choosing File Print or with the shortcut keys Ctrl P Print Printer Name Merox DocuPrint N24 N32 N40 P5200 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type xerox DocuPrint Wa4 Ms2 M40 Poe Location Pr Comment T Print to file M Rei range ASM aAA Aaa Copii i All Number of copies li Pages fi ia J coate C Selection Options Cancel Help Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 39 In this dialog you can select a specific printer if you have installed more than one printer Under Print range you can determine how many pages you want to have printed or only certain pages and how many copies you want P There are many different printers with widely varying proper
254. has the csv extension the file type is automatically recognized 3 You will see the Import text files dialog Click OK If the csv file contains formulas as formulas unmark Formulas in Tools Options Spreadsheet View so that you see the calculated results in the table Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 265 AutoFill You copy text values and other cell contents to your spreadsheet very easily with the mouse Here you need to bear a few special features in mind When you copy several values at once StarOffice forms a logical series out of the initial values and if you copy certain texts entered in sort lists the list will be continued accordingly Applying Sort Lists Enter the text Jan or January in an empty cell Select the cell and click the mouse on the lower right corner of the cell border Drag over several cells to the right or downwards When you release the mouse button the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months The predefined series can be found under Tools Options Spreadsheet Sort Lists You can also create your own lists tailored to your needs such as a list of your company s branch offices When you later want to use the information in these lists for example as headings just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse Automatically Calculating Rows 1 Enter a number in a cell 2 With the mouse drag the bottom
255. have installed the samples you can for example by choosing File Open open the Movie1 document from the spreadsheet samples Change back to your new still almost empty spreadsheet Set the cursor in a free cell and enter an equals sign to indicate that you want to begin a formula Now switch to the document you have just loaded Moviel Click cell C3 Switch back to the new spreadsheet In the calculation row you will now see how StarOffice Calc has added the reference to the formula for you By way of example the following will now be located there file C staroffice6 0 share samples english spreadsheets Moviel sdc movievisits C3 Confirm the formula by clicking the green check mark The reference to a cell of another document thus contains the name of the other document in single inverted commas then a hash then the name of the sheet in the other document followed by a point and the name of the cell there C3 The name of the sheet automatically receives a leading dollar sign since the sheet has absolute addressing 228 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 If you closely examine the name of the other document in this formula you will notice that it is written as a URL This means that you can also enter a URL from the Internet If for example you found an Internet page containing current stock exchange information in spreadsheet cells you can load this page in StarOffice Calc Just follow these steps 1 In
256. hdays and anniversaries you can enter these directly into the calendar using a macro To do this click Personal Data Enter a descriptive text in the Event field and specify the Month and Day with the spin buttons For a non recurring occasion choose the option One Time and then specify the year as well P Keep the text as short as possible otherwise the full text may not be displayed in the corresponding cell of the calendar 282 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 StarOffice Calendar Click Insert and the event will be displayed in the window of the dialog box You can now specify other dates if you wish To remove an event select it in the window and click Delete After you have entered all your important dates click Create to display your personal calendar When your calendar is complete you can save and print it Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 283 284 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress Presentations have more than just drawings and graphics to offer Use presenta tions to link several slides to form a slide show to animate the elements on your slides and to assign special transition effects between slides Slides often contain text which in the outline view mode is displayed and entered in a hierarchical structure You can change the text or rearrange the order of the slides at any time There are several way
257. he camera to an extremely short focal length Step 4 Now let us add some handwriting to the logo Insert a text box with the name of the company and format as you like If you want a border around the handwriting you will need to convert the text to a polygon You can do this by choosing Modify Convert To Polygon Of course the surface of the newly created object can also be modified Fora border around the company name convert it into polygons Then you can select a line width greater than 0 00 and a line style not equal to transparent on the object bar to make the borders of each letter visible Step 5 You can create a simple drawing object as a background for the logo for example an ellipse Choose Modify Position to place the object all the way to the back Note that the you can also access the functions through the context menu instead of menu commands which makes for less work with the mouse Now you have a perfect 3D logo created with StarOffice in only five steps Further Information Using a Grid To work with great precision for example to place rectangles one on top of the other you can use the grid function To turn on the grid choose Tools Options Drawing Grid and select the Snap to Grid option As an additional aid you can also select Visible Grid This makes it easy to place documents exactly on top of each other in the document 368 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Construction Dra
258. he menu command in the context menu ensures that when a graphic is positioned between two paragraphs only the first para graph wraps around the picture Defining a Wrap Region If you want to make your newsletter more attractive with objects or graphics you can have the text flow around the object Just draw a Polygon with the Polygon icon in the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar Place the polygon over the text and assign the text the Wrap Contour with its context menu You can also assign a wrap contour to 3D objects you define Create a 3D object with StarOffice Draw copy it to the clipboard and paste it into the text document Open the context menu of the inserted object and choose Wrap Contour In the context menu of an object with a wrap contour is the Wrap Edit Contour command This command calls the Contour Editor where you can manually reedit the automatic contour Refer to the instructions in the StarOffice Help Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 187 Linking Frames and Facilitating Text Flow If you want your text to be continued like in a newspaper from a frame on page 1 to a frame on page 4 and where the text flow from frame to frame is done auto matically you need to use linked frames Create two or more frames by opening the Insert floating toolbar clicking Insert Frame Manually then selecting the first frame click the border of the frame ge Click the Link Frames icon on the ob
259. he option bar top left in the illustra tion Click the object You can see all the B zier points of the object On the object bar you can find various icons for editing inserting and deleting points AZE EAA THESE LTE ELARA GR 5 PF Use the Zoom floating toolbar to enlarge the view If the black filling of the characters is a nuisance during the editing process you can tempo rarily change it to say 10 gray by choosing Format Area Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 339 Converting to Curves Polygons 3D You can edit many objects quite effectively by converting them Let s look at a simple example to illustrate this Open a rectangle This has the default settings for color line thickness etc and should now be selected Choose Modify Convert in StarOffice Impress you will find the corre sponding command on the context menu of the rectangle You will see the menu subcommands To Curve To Polygon To 3D To 3D Rotation Object Choose Modify Convert To Curve to convert the rectangle into a B zier curve You can now edit the existing points You can move the points convert them from corner points into rounded points delete them insert new points etc All these options are described in detail in the StarOffice Help under the search words Edit points and B zier object bar Choose Modify Convert To Polygon to convert the original rectangle into a Polygon with 4 points as
260. he position in the document where you want to insert the graphic 2 Choose Insert Graphics Scan The submenu contains a command to open a dialog for selecting the scanning Source 3 From the submenu select the command to request scanning The scanner driver opens a window in which you should follow the scanner manufacturer s instructions Once the scanning process is completed the image is inserted in your StarOffice document 156 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting a Chart From StarOffice Calc Dragging and Dropping a Copy of the Chart 1 2 3 Open the StarOffice Writer document in which the chart is to be inserted Open the StarOffice Calc document containing the chart Select the chart with a single click Eight handles will appear around the chart If you accidentally double click the chart it will be put in the edit mode indi cated by a gray border To exit the edit mode single click outside the chart Drag the chart into the StarOffice Writer document If the StarOffice Writer document is not visible you can first arrange the windows appropriately If your operating system or windows manager provides a task bar you can drag the chart to the StarOffice Writer button on the task bar hold that position for a moment while the StarOffice Writer window opens in the foreground and then drop it in the now visible document In the StarOffice Writer document position the chart or modify the sca
261. he sheet tabs will be moved so that you can see the name of the last sheet To display the sheet itself click on the name If at the lower window border there is insufficient space to display the sheet tabs you can increase it In doing so you will be sharing the available space between the sheet tabs and horizontal scroll bar Point to the separator between the scroll bar and the sheet tabs press the mouse button and keeping the mouse button pressed drag to the right Working With Multiple Sheets Each sheet of a spreadsheet is completely independent of the other sheets in a spreadsheet document You can however incorporate the same data into several sheets If you would like to insert data at the same location in the first three sheets select all three sheets together and enter the data in only one of the sheets To select several sheets together click the sheet tabs of the sheets in question whilst pressing the Ctrl key All selected sheets now have white sheet tabs as opposed to the gray sheet tabs of the unselected sheets In order to undo the selec tion of a sheet click its sheet tab again whilst pressing the Ctrl key If you click the sheet tab of the current sheet whilst pressing the Shift key only this one will be selected Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 213 If you have some experience in assigning sheet references maybe you have noticed that StarOffice Calc includes the name of the sheet in the ref
262. he various sheets of your document A new empty spreadsheet initially contains three sheets each titled SheetX X stands for the numbers 1 through 3 Inserting Sheets 1 Point the mouse to the sheet tab at the bottom of the window 2 Start the Context menu You will see commands for editing the sheets Delete Rename Move Lopy Select All Sheets Strg x Strg l 3 Choose the Insert command You will see the Insert sheet dialog 4 Select the position and quantity of sheets to be inserted and click OK Renaming Sheets 1 Click the name of the sheet that you want to change e g Sheet1 2 Open the context menu and choose the Rename command A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name 3 Enter anew name for the sheet and click OK 4 Alternatively hold down the Alt key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly P The name of a sheet may consist only of letters and numbers Spaces are also permitted The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets which can have different names 202 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Values and Formulas as Cell Contents Individual cells can contain text numbers dates or formulas You can specify or modify the cell contents very easily and you can update them at any time by reca
263. here you choose which contents of the cell you want to delete Use the backspace key above the Enter key to delete the cell contents without a dialog Chapter 8 Appendix 431 Navigating in Spreadsheets x is the multiplication sign on the numeric key pad Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl Pos1 Positions the cursor in cell Al Ctrl End Positions the cursor in the last cell containing data on the spreadsheet If the last row containing data is row 10 and the last column in which values are found is column F the cursor will be positioned in cell F10 Pos1 Positions the cursor in the first column A of the row currently selected End Positions the cursor in the last column containing data of the currently selected row Ctrl x Selects the entire range in which the cursor is located A range is a contiguous area of cells containing data Enter in a selected range Positions the cursor in the next cell when in a range The direction the cursor moves can be defined under Tools Options Spreadsheet General Ctrl Left Arrow Goes to the column at the left of the current range or goes to the previous range If a range does not exist then goes to the first column A Ctrl Right Arrow Goes to the column at the right of the range currently selected or goes to the next range If a range does not exist then goes to the last column IV Ctrl Up Arrow Goes to the uppermost row of the range currently se
264. hich side You can also set a hyperlink which will then be loaded whenever the graphic object in the text document is clicked Furthermore you can link the graphic object to a macro and in so doing assign various events to it You could for example use this capability to program certain functions such as having a sound played when the mouse pointer touches the graphic object Calculating in Text Documents You can enter calculations in your text documents both in running text and in tables that you have created in the text documents Press function key F2 within any table cell or anywhere in the text to show the formula bar Within a table all you have to do is enter an equals sign This is the signal that you want to enter a calculation formula Press F2 again or Esc to hide the formula bar again To perform calculations directly within the text Type for example the following 10000 per year is per month Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the result and press F2 You will now see the formula bar The cursor is already waiting there for your entry Type 10000 12 and press Enter The result of the calculation is inserted in the text Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 143 Calculating in Text 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where the calculation result should appear 2 Press F2 to display the Formula bar 3 Enter the desired fo
265. his point Mark the Change page number check box and select the new page number 1 Now click OK P If you want headers or footers to contain different contents on the right and left sides you just have to unmark the Same content left right check box Under Format Page Page you can select the page layout mirrored This lets you define an inner and an outer margin for the text The left and right pages of the main text often have different Page Styles so that for example the left pages have a header but the right ones do not There are already Left page and Right page Page Styles provided for you You can use these instead of Main text The first page of the main text is page 1 and contains the Right page Style assign the Left page Style as the Next Style and vice versa You can assign these Styles to the corresponding pages in the Stylist context menu with the Modify command On the Organizer tab page you can choose the Next Style 90 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Editing Page Styles Your new Page Style with the name Main text should have a page number in the middle of the footer Follow these instructions 1 Select the Main Text entry in the Stylist open the context menu of that entry and choose Modify You see the Page Style Main Text 2 Go to the Footer tab Mark the Activate Footer check box Click OK You will now see an empty footer on the document page Use the mouse cursor to select it When the cu
266. ials and press the Enter key This gives you an overview of the weekly shifts a particular employee is scheduled to work This function can also be used to create a weekly shift plan for each employee Inserting a Date Row The Overall Plan spreadsheet has only one row containing the days of the week To insert another row to add the dates you first have to disable the protection of the sheet via Tools Protect Document Spreadsheet Then select the cell Early shift and click Row in the Insert menu A new blank row will appear below the days of the week Click the cell below Sunday type the respective date and press Enter Select the cell and move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner of the cell The mouse pointer will turn into a cross hair symbol Now drag a red selection frame across the newly inserted row to the column Saturday As soon as you release the mouse button the dates for each day will appear in the selected row Applying Colored Shading for Columns Weekends and holidays are not usually work days therefore it makes sense to distinguish these days from the rest Select the columns Saturday and Sunday click the Background Color icon on the object bar and choose the desired color from the floating toolbar Creating Individual Shift Plans Since every shift plan depends on the nature of the work in question here we merely describe how a shift plan might look You will also see how to incorporate other useful func
267. icate dialog 3 Enter the following values Duplicate X Number of copies 13 H P DK Placement Cancel X axis o 00cm Help axis 0 80cm H Default Angle fo degrees H Enlargement width o 00cm H Height 000cm H Colors Start O 0 20 100 0 0 0 56 0 Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 343 4 Select 30 as the number of copies The x axis is the horizontal axis from left to right If you enter positive values in the field for the x axis placement this causes a shift to the right If the stack of coins should increase from the bottom up enter a negative value in the vertical y direction 5 If you want the coins to become smaller the higher they get enter a negative value for the width and height 6 Finally define a color scheme from bottom to top Select for example a darker yellow for the beginning color bottom and a lighter yellow color for the end color top 7 Click OK to create the duplicates The copies are not grouped automatically After the end of the operation the top coin is selected If you want to make the stack of coins lean over first you must select all the coins together To select all of the coins press either the Ctrl A key combination if there are no other objects on the page or drag a selection frame around the coins la 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 344 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Cross Fading Between Two Objects
268. icates the position where you want to insert a copy of the graphic object If the object is connected to a hyperlink the hyperlink will be inserted instead of the graphic object Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 155 Inserting Graphics via Drag and Drop From the Gallery Drag and drop a graphic object from the gallery into a text document spreadsheet or presentation to insert the graphic object When you release a graphic object directly on a drawing object the following rules apply When dragging without pressing a key i e you do not see another sign next to the mouse pointer only the drawing attributes are transferred from the Gallery and applied to the drawing object over which you release the mouse button When dragging while pressing the Ctrl key i e you see a plus sign next to the mouse pointer the graphic object is inserted as an object When dragging while pressing the Shift and Ctrl keys i e you see a linking arrow next to the mouse pointer the drawing object will be replaced by the object from the Gallery The position and size of the object that was replaced will remain valid for the new graphic Inserting Graphics With a Scanner To carry out scanning in StarOffice you must have installed a scanner with appro priate driver software on your system Under Windows StarOffice supports the TWAIN standard Under Unix StarOffice supports the SANE standard 1 Place the cursor at t
269. ick on one of the icons in the upper row of the Arrange floating toolbar to move the object completely to the back for example If you want to position it directly behind another object click the Behind Object icon Then click on the object which you want the current object to be positioned behind You will only see an effect if the objects are presently overlapping or are moved to do so later You can also select two objects at the same time hold down the Shift key and click one after the other and then click Reverse This switches the order of the two objects Aligning Objects You can position the objects anywhere with the mouse However to position an object at exactly the upper ep margin of a slide for instance or center two objects vertically above each other use the icons on the Align ment floating toolbar Alignment Eo p g s of 330 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 If you select an individual object and then click on one of the icons on the Alignment floating toolbar the object is aligned at the page margins If you have selected two or more objects together they will be aligned to each other A special type of alignment is the Distribution of objects If you select at least three objects at once you can use the Distribution command In StarOffice Impress this command is found on the context menu whereas in StarOffice Draw it is found on the Modify menu The selected objects a
270. ick on the third icon from the top in the scroll bar on the right of the presentation window or choose View Master View Slide View 300 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 EJ Recar Shareholder Meeting StarOffice 6 0 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help 3 oa a xe review Effect Fade From Bottor Medium Transition semiaute z Ed fa Slides In the slide view all slides which have a slide transition effect have a small button Click this button to preview the selected effect The Slide Transition window is described in detail in the StarOffice Help Effects for Objects The objects in your slide can have various effects for example they can roll into your presentation from the left side the text can be slowly drawn onscreen etc All these effects can be assigned using the Drawing View View Master 1 fo View Drawing View 2 Fd Access the Effects window i e with the Effects icon in the Main toolbar 3 First you must select the object to which you want to apply the effect Then open the Effects window and select the desired effect Click the Assign icon in the Effects window or double click the effect to assign it 4 You can also have your object faded in Effects button and additionally faded out in the Effects window on the Extras tab click the Object Invisible icon per mouse click The Effects window is described in detail in the S
271. ics organized by theme Flexible Application Interface The program interface is designed so that each user can configure it according to individual preferences The various windows Stylist Navigator etc can be posi tioned as floating windows anywhere on the screen and some can be docked to an edge Visible icons and menus can be customized as well Drag amp Drop The drag and drop feature enables you to work even more quickly and efficiently with text documents in StarOffice For instance you can drag graphics directly from the Gallery into an active document Extensive Help Functions The program provides an extensive Help function which serves as a reference guide to the program elements in StarOffice as well as includes a variety of instructions for simple and complex tasks Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 59 The StarOffice Writer Window S Untitled StarOffice 6 0 es QGanggS So Sey oe Complimentary close First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Hoacime I Insert Object PJ ur 23 a Draw Functions Text frame OLE objects Form Functions er DOr a C o FE Es Se 7 123 oy a fi i gt Pages eft tm fiser so ee Windows in StarOffice Writer Insert floating toolbar Form Functions floating toolbar Insert Fields submenu Navigator Window Insert Object floating toolbar Styli
272. ied to the clipboard and must be pasted into the docu ment from there Ctrl minus sign Custom hyphens hyphenation set by you Ctrl Shift minus sign Non breaking dash is not used to separate syllables Ctrl multiplication sign only on number pad Run macro field Ctrl Space Non breaking spaces Non breaking spaces are not wrapped at the end of a line and are not expanded if the text is justified Shift Enter Line break without paragraph change Ctrl Enter Manual page break Ctrl Shift Enter Column break in multicolumnar texts Alt Enter Inserting a new paragraph without numbering Alt Enter Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section Arrow Left Move cursor to left Shift Arrow Left Move cursor with selection to the left Ctrl Arrow Left Go to beginning of word Ctrl Shift Arrow Left Selecting to the left word by word Arrow Right Move cursor to right Shift Arrow Right Move cursor with selection to the right Ctrl Arrow Right Go to end of word Chapter 8 Appendix 427 Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl Shift Arrow Right Selecting to the right word by word Arrow Up Move up one line ShifttArrow Up Selecting lines in an upwards direction Arrow Down Move cursor down one line Shiftt Arrow Down Selecting lines in a downward direction Pos1 Go to beginning of line
273. ighted by the frame of the existing scenario You can also multiple select cells that are not contiguous i e that are distributed across the table To select multiple cells hold down the Ctrl key as you click each cell In our example however select the range F18 F23 2 Choose Tools Scenarios The Create Scenario dialog appears 3 Enter High Dollar Rate as the name of the scenario and leave the other fields unchanged with their default values Close the dialog with OK Your new scenario is automatically activated 4 Change the values in the frames to the values you want to apply to your new scenario In this case modify the dollar rate and all other values that you believe could be affected by it i e economic growth and sales prices In just a moment you see the effects of your operating figures If you want to know which values in the scenario affect other values choose Tools Detective Track to Dependents You will see arrows to the cells that are directly dependent on the current cell Validity of Cell Contents For each cell you can define in advance what type of contents will be valid for this cell This will make it easier for users of your sheets to employ them correctly The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag and drop or by copying and pasting the validity rule will not take effe
274. ign business cards and produce labels all from data obtained from a data source or that is sequentially numbered Creating Form Letters To aid you in creating form letters the following section first gives you brief instructions and then detailed instructions Brief Instructions For Quick Results 1 Register an address data source in StarOffice if you have not done so already You can find instructions under the search term address book in the StarOffice Help 2 Press Shift Ctrl N to open one of the form letter templates provided In the Business Correspondence category select the Elegant Letter for example 3 Select the addresses to be used for the form letter or enter them now 4 Let StarOffice create the form letter and print it Detailed Instructions With Background Information To create a form letter you need the recipients addresses which should be in the form of a database table and a text document containing the text of the letter You will notice that fields appear at the positions in the text where the name and address should be printed These fields draw their information from the corre sponding database fields You can define these fields if you go to the Insert menu and choose Field and from the sub menu select Other The Fields dialog will appear where you can define the fields Fields are a type of place holder in your document These can be chosen when first inserting a field or opening or print
275. ing Notes Enter notes for individual slides in the Notes view You can access the Notes view using the Notes icon located at the right of the document window scroll bar You can enter and print a page of notes for each slide To print choose File Print and click Options The Printer Options dialog appears Inthe Printer Options dialog in the Contents area select Notes Click OK In the Print dialog select the slides you want to print all or specific ones and click OK Be sure to go back and deselect Notes in the Printer Options dialog otherwise the document will always be printed with notes The settings in Printer Tools apply only to the current document If you want specific settings for all presentations choose Tools Options Presentation and select the Print tab Further Information Using the Navigator You can move from slide to slide quickly by opening the Navigator function key F5 All the slides of your presentation are listed here Simply double click the rele vant slide title to jump to that slide Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 315 Organization Chart Whether you want to show the organization of your company or the structure of your homepage here we explain how to do it You will be surprised how easy it is to present even complex structures in a comprehensible way P East West Trading Co Departments d d Administration y East West Trading Co t 8
276. ing Using the Adjacent Paragraph Format Maybe you have two consecutive paragraphs with different paragraph formats and you would like them both to be formatted the same way This is the quickest method 1 Delete the paragraph mark nonprinting character between two paragraphs 2 Press Enter Both paragraphs now have the same format with the same Style When you delete by going to the end of the first paragraph and pressing the Delete Del key the second paragraph will be brought into the first known as deleting to the right If you then turn the text back into two paragraphs by pressing the Enter key twice the second paragraph assumes the format of the first If you delete by going to the beginning of the second paragraph and pressing Backspace above the Enter key the second paragraph stays the same known as deleting to the left Then press Enter to get two paragraphs with the format of the second paragraph Using Sections The sections in text documents mark off blocks of text for special purposes Thus there are the following areas Sections of text with a different number of columns than the master text Sections that are protected from further editing Sections that are only to be shown under certain circumstances or not shown at all Sections that are to be inserted into a document as files or parts of files Sections that can be incorporated into other text documents via DDE A section always consi
277. ing a current document You can carry out an update manually with the F9 key 174 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Fixed and Variable Fields Fixed fields are fields which are filled out only once i e when the field is inserted into the document For example if you write an invoice based on an invoice template you can use a fixed date The minute you set up the invoice document you will see in the field position the actual date which will not change later on That is the date of the invoice is determined only once Fields Document References Functions Doclhhaformation Variables Database Type Select Format Date 12 91 1999 Dec 31 99 File name Dec 31 1999 Page 31 Dec 1999 Sender December 31 1999 Statistics 31 December 1999 Templates Fri Dec 31 99 Time Fri 31 Dec 99 Fri December 31 1999 Friday December 31 1999 12 31 59 1 2 51 1999 1 2 51 Offset in days me e On the other hand a variable date is updated every time you open and print the document A manual update of the fields i e with the F9 key sets the actual date in the field entered as Variable date If for example you want to insert a date as a field in your form letter you have to decide if it is to be inserted as a fixed or as variable date Choose to use a fixed date if the date should never change i e as if you could have typed in the date directly without a field What is then the advant
278. ing a table in your text document To insert a blank table with the mouse 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where you want to insert the table 2 Point with the mouse to the Insert table icon on the Insert floating toolbar 3 Press the mouse button and move the mouse down and to the right until the required numbers of rows and columns appear in the preview area under the icon 4 Then release the mouse button If you want to abort the process before releasing the button move the mouse up or to the left until the word Cancel appears in the preview area To inserting a blank table via dialog 1 Place the cursor at the position in the text where you want to insert the table 2 Click briefly on the Insert table icon on the Insert floating toolbar This opens the Insert Table dialog Inserting from StarOffice Calc with the clipboard 1 Open your text document and a StarOffice Calc document from which you want to insert a range of cells 2 Select a range of cells from the spreadsheet Copy it to the clipboard for example with Ctrl C 138 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 Switch to the text document You now have various options for inserting the range of cells Youcan use the normal command Edit Paste or Ctrl V to insert the range of cells as an OLE object You can double click on the OLE object in order to edit it with StarOffice Calc tools and commands Click outside the object to quit e
279. ing is also applied when you use automatic numbering via the AutoFormat AutoCorrect function P The AutoNumbering of AutoCorrect is not applied to the Styles listed in the Stylist under Special Styles You can apply a particular Numbering Style to certain Paragraph Styles or apply the Numbering Style directly to the paragraphs In those cases you can take advantage of the paragraph formatting system for numbering as well When you change the Numbering Style all numbering that you have created with this Style will be automatically reformatted The Numbering Styles are described in the StarOffice Help Turning Bullets On and Off This is how to turn a bulleted list on and off 1 Place the cursor in a paragraph that you would like to mark with a bullet symbol or select a number of paragraphs 2 i Click on the Bullets on off icon on the Text Object Bar The paragraph or paragraphs will be formatted as a bulleted list 3 b Inan existing bulleted list if you click on the Bullets on off icon the paragraphs will turn back into normal text 126 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 4 q hha bulleted list clicking on the icon at the far right of the object bar changes the Text Object Bar to the Numbering Object Bar You can also select which bar to display by opening the context menu on the object bar The Numbering Object Bar contains icons for moving and rearranging numbered paragraphs You can select further setting
280. int and print page 1 which is your envelope Place normal letter paper in your printer select the command File Print again and print the second page If your letter has more than one page of text you can specify which pages you want to print under Pages Summary To create a document based on a certain template choose File New Templates and Documents select the template you want and click Open To edit a document choose File New Templates and Documents select the template you want and click Edit Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 195 196 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc StarOffice Calc is the powerful spreadsheet program in StarOffice It provides all the functions necessary for professional use lots of financial and statistical func tions as well as database functions plus much more The Functions in StarOffice Calc This section contains a short overview of some important functions and capabili ties of StarOffice Calc Calculating StarOffice Calc is primarily a spreadsheet program It provides you with a spread sheet containing cells in which you can enter text digits and formulas and calcu late simple and complex results StarOffice Calc has numerous automatic functions to facilitate your work Not only does StarOffice Calc provide the basic calculation types but also numerous calculation methods that can be e
281. ion Choose Insert Section Section then under Write protection mark the Protect and With password check boxes If the section already exists Format Sections Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters Choose Format Sections Section and under Write protection unmark Protect Enter the correct password Protecting Cells in a StarOffice Writer Table You can protect the contents of individual cells of a StarOffice Writer text table from changes Turning on protection Turning off protection Place the cursor in a cell or select cells Choose Format Cell Protect Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells First if necessary choose Tools Options Text Document Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas Enable Then choose Format Cell Unprotect Select the table in the Navigator open the context menu and select Table Unprotect Use Shift Ctrl T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 415 Automatic Protection of Indexes and Tables Tables of contents alphabetical indexes and so on created automatically in an StarOffice Writer text are automatically protected against accidental changes Turning on protection Place the cursor in the index table of contents From the context menu choose Edit Index Table On the Index Table tab page mark Protected against manual changes Turning off
282. ions Example 1 Line one 2 and line two 1 and a sublevel of line 2 In this example the list is not fully numbered The full number of the last line with the sublevel of 2 would be 2 1 Outline Numbering To number your headings automatically choose Tools Outline Numbering By default the Paragraph Style Heading 1 is assigned to the highest level of Outline Numbering If you select a Numbering Style from the Number combo box then all para graphs in your document that have the Heading 1 format will have consecu tive numbers placed in front of them If you have created your own Paragraph Styles and you would like to use these for your headings you can apply the styles in this dialog to the individual levels 128 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Outline Numbering Numbering Position Mumbering Paragraph Style Heading 1 Heading E Heading 2 Number Mone Heading 3 Character Style hone Heading 4 Heading 5 Show SUG Eels Heading 6 Separator Heading 7 H Heading 3 amia Heading 3 Start at fi Heading 10 Format Cancel Help Reset 1 Suppose for example that you have created a Paragraph Style Head1 to be used for headings of level 1 In the Level list box select 1 and in the Paragraph Style combo box select Head1 2 Click OK Now all paragraphs with Head1 applied to them will be listed in the Navigator under Headings You can rearrange the chapters i
283. ist 2 Click the Background Style Open the context menu for this Style and choose Modify 3 In the dialog that then appears select a suitable color for the background of all slides with the current Page Style Click OK Note that this modification is only valid for the current presentation document Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 297 Switching Page Styles The subordinate designs which make up the slide design determine the way an object looks including its background The slide design can also be called a Master Slide In StarOffice Impress you can assign a different slide design to each slide if you want 1 2 3 4 Go to the slide that is to have a different Masterpage Select Format Styles Slide Design You will see the Slide Design dialog Click Load You will see the Load Slide Design dialog Select a new slide design on the dialog e g from the area Presentation Back grounds and confirm this with OK Notice the Exchange background page check box If it has a check mark in it the new slide design will apply to all pages of the current document If it doesn t have a check mark in it then it will only apply to the current slide This gives you the flexibility to define a different slide design and thus a different background for example for one single slide The background you have selected will now be assigned to the slide currently in use Presentation Style
284. ither create a new empty master document by choosing File New Master Document or create a master document from an existing document by choosing File Send Create Master Document You can open a master document by choosing File New Master Document The new master document is opened as an empty text document You will immediately see the Navigator in global mode Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Alphabetical Index The Navigator in master mode provides the functions you need for navigating and editing Double click a document in the Navigator to load it for editing When opening an existing master document note the extension sxg which distinguishes a master document from normal StarOffice Writer documents in the Open File dialog There is a sample master document provided with the StarOffice samples ES Now you can either enter text e g for headings or insert subdocuments by clicking the icon Insert and choosing the desired entry Text or File StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 You can also insert a new document with the entry New document in this case first enter a name and a path after that you can write the new document and save it Paragraph Styles you define and use in the subdocuments are automatically adopted in the master document If you save the master document afterwards these Styles will be available everywhere in the master document The Styles defined in the master document have priority o
285. ject bar Now click the second frame To enter text in the linked frames position the cursor in the first frame and type in text or insert it from the clipboard If you want a text from a document to flow in the linked frames first put the text cursor in the first frame first click the normal text to cancel the frame selection and then click the frame Now you have to decide if you want to have the text as a copy in the frame or if it should keep a link to the original document in this case it would always return to the actual stand of the original document If the text is only to be copied choose the command menu Insert File Insert Section Section Columna Background Footnotes Endnotes Mew section Link 5ection1 M Link M DDE File name file 0 Auser documents Awe a Section Write protection Ca Protect With password P Hide Hide With condition DO i Cancel Help Reset 188 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 If the text is a section linked to another file choose Insert Section In the Insert Sections dialog that appears click Link and select the file you want with the button Finally click the Insert button Using Colored Backgrounds To assign a colored background to a paragraph place the cursor in that paragraph and click the Background Color icon in the Object bar A floating color palette will appear from which you choose the desired color by clicking i
286. ject in the Gallery more specifically in the 3D theme folder Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 363 3D Effects Geometry In this section you can control the quality EMJEGERS at which the surface is geometrically calculated and displayed You can E produce interesting effects by deliberately reducing the number of segments of a sphere for example Properties of the 3D font such as the slant of the edge bevel depth etc are determined here kounded edges Scaled depth Robe bor angle Epi Segments Horizontal Mormals fax l al el CAC 3D Effects Shading This is where you can specify the setting EMJEGEES of the shader flat phong or Gouraud to ae fe jie gt ir es Fa v be used to display the 3D object Gouraud shading provides the best shading but requires Mode court tttst i the most computing time Shadow You can also specify a shadow for the 3D q Surface angle 0 degree E object here and select the camera distance Mme Distance Jo soem and focal length Focal length 10 00cm 364 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3D Effects Illumination You can control the illumination of the 30 Effects selected 3D object in a variety of ways In addition to the general ambient light llurnination eight additional light sources are avail Hele aeea able all of which you can align adjust for fe K sry 20 m c
287. k When you activate those fields the general fields we have used in the templates are automatically replaced with the actual fields used in your system In order for the replacement to take place you must tell StarOffice which address book you use The dialog asking for this information appears automatically the first time you start StarOffice You can also call the dialog by following the steps listed below Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 375 Address Data Source AutoPilot To call this AutoPilot choose File AutoPilot Address Data Source This AutoPilot is described in the StarOffice Help Manual Registration of Existing Address Book 1 Choose File Templates Address Book Source The Templates Address Book Assignment dialog appears Templates Address Book Assignment E x Address Book Source Data source I y Administrate Table y Field assignment First name lt none gt Last name Jenone gt 5 Company lt More gt Department Jenone X Street lt HOne gt ZIP Code Jenone City lt none State Jcnones Y Country lt none Tel Home cnone gt UMANN a e 2 In the Data source box select the system address book or the data source you want to use as address book If you have not yet registered the system address book in StarOffice as the data source click theAdministrate button This takes you to the Administrate Data Sources dialog in which you ca
288. key when you type a space between the words This is important for example between a title and the person s name Non breaking dash An example of a non breaking dash would be in a company name such as A Z Obviously you would not want A to appear at the end of a line and Z at the begin ning of the next line To solve this problem press Shift Ctrl minus sign In other words hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and press the minus key Hyphen dash In order to enter longer dashes you can find under Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat Options the Replace dashes option This option replaces one or two minus signs under certain circumstances with a long dash see StarOffice Help 66 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 For additional replacements see the replacements table underTools AutoCor rect AutoFormat Replace Here you can among other things have a shortcut that you have defined automatically replaced when input by an optional dash even in another font Definite separator To support automatic hyphenation by entering a separator inside a word yourself use the Ctrl minus sign The word is separated at the end of the line at this posi tion even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Emphasizing Text There are many ways of emphasizing text in a special way Here are some of them Use the normal Formatting e g with the icons in the text Object bar Some possibilities are create the text in
289. king with data sources e g for form letters and about the revision marking function is contained in a separate chapter Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice starting on page 373 The StarOffice Writer Functions This section contains a brief overview of the functionality and capabilities of StarOffice Writer Writing StarOffice Writer helps you to create all sorts of written documents You can produce personal letters form letters brochures faxes and even professional manuals Documents that you use often can be saved as templates for example an invoice form The spellcheck and thesaurus functions are at your disposal If you want you can have the AutoCorrect and hyphenation functions active as you type 57 There is no restriction to the length of a text document in StarOffice You can use the Navigator to move around easily and quickly within the document StarOffice Writer comes with a variety of templates for almost every purpose You can also create your own using the AutoPilot Designing and Structuring StarOffice offers a wide variety of options to design documents Use the Stylist to create assign and modify styles for paragraphs individual characters frames and pages In addition the Navigator can help you create structured texts and also allows you to modify the structure for instance by shifting paragraphs from one position to another Additionally you can create various indexes and tables in text
290. ks modules appear Gimmicks AutoText Change AlChars GetTexts Read Dir Userfields 3 Select the AutoText module for example by clicking the entry 4 Click the Run button to run the module 419 Editing the Sample Macros 1 Follow the steps as described under Calling the Sample Macros but click the Edit button instead of the Run button in the last step 2 The Basic IDE appears This is where you can view and edit the program code The following illustration shows a self defined program code File Edit Mew Tools Window Help E L a gt iP isof ice Standard g E Fae N Ge ea s El e JE gt k unction Vol L1 L2 L2 im i ol as Long i ol Li L2 L3 ol i ol nd Function oe Standard Module 1 k 12 Col 13 INSRT Instructions on how to use the Basic IDE can be found in the StarOffice Help Call the StarOffice Help and select the entry Help about StarOffice Basic in the top left list box 420 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The Sample Macros You can find the following sample macros in the Gimmicks module May have changed after this guide went to press AutoTlext This macro opens an empty StarOffice Writer document and inserts a table in which the names of all the AutoTexts are listed You can print the document to have a handy list of the available AutoTexts ChangeAllChars Use this macro in a text document to replace all text and numbers with the c
291. l culating the formulas with current data By values in spreadsheets we mean numbers dates times and results of formulas You can emphasize values by marking Value Highlighting in the View menu You can also mark this option in Tools Options Spreadsheet View in which case this function will apply permanently for the current document and all docu ments created in the future other already existing documents retain their settings If this function is enabled numbers and dates are automatically shown in blue and values in cells containing formulas in light green Text remains in black If Value Highlighting is not marked you are free to choose the colors and other formatting of the content of your spreadsheets As you have already seen you can type a text in a cell even if it appears to be too long for the cell Now try entering a very long whole number If the number is too long to fit in the cell you will see the overflow indicator If you now double click the right hand edge of the heading of this column the column will be auto matically set to the optimal width The box at the bottom right in the status bar always displays helpful information In a spreadsheet this box can be used to permanently display the sum of all selected cells You can also display other values such as the maximum value of all selected cells Use the context menu to change the value displayed in this field In case of an error in the spreadsheet thi
292. l on the left What Can a Cell Contain As you have already seen from a few examples cells can accommodate different elements We now explain these in turn Text When you enter text in a cell you can use almost all of the editing and formatting functions available in a text document For example to select a word you can double click the word either in the input line or in a cell If you select a different font or other attribute from the text object bar the modifications will apply only to the selected word Al Jaexy Pressing the Ctrl Enter keys inserts a manual line break This shortcut only works directly in the cell not in the input line If the text should automatically break at the right border of the cell proceed as follows 1 Select all cells in which the text should break at the right border 2 In Format Cell Alignment mark the Line break field and then click OK Even in texts you can do calculations For example enter a text in cell A1 and another text in A2 In cell A3 insert the formula CONCATENATE A1 A2 to concatenate the two texts in other words to string them together You can also enter numbers in the Text format Format the desired cells with the format Text open the context menu of the cell and choose Format Cells Numbers Text category and enter numbers in the cells These will be inter 206 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 preted as text The display of these
293. lan can be used selec tively and processed further shift plan for the week from 12 16 2001 to 12 22 2001 Saturda AAAS Earlyshift PG FD FD Dayshift RE Late shift DM wo RE PG nig shite lwp pg oF Fo Creating a Shift Plan with a Template Open a document based on the shift plan template by choosing File New Templates and Documents Select Miscellaneous then Shift Plan Finally click Open and you will see the document P In the following we will work on the document not the template on which the document is based If you want to make fundamental changes to the layout you should open and edit the template The StarOffice templates often contain protected areas so that you cannot change them by mistake If however you do want to change a template you have to first disable the protection For spreadsheets the menu command to do this is found under Tools Protect Document The document consists of three sheets Overall Plan Individual Plan and Personnel Click the Personnel tab and enter the employee names and initials in the respective columns Next select the Overall Plan sheet Enter the employee names in the cells and if necessary change the predefined rows and columns After the plan is completely filled out you can use the special functions of the Individual Plan 2760 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Enter the initials of the employees in the cell to the right of the cell labeled Init
294. lates category then the folder Presentations then the entry Introducing a New Product Then click Open and you will see the document Since each presentation will naturally have to be adapted to a specific purpose you could also choose any other template to base your presentation document on Type your own text over the existing title If you want insert graphics choose Insert Graphics in your document At the bottom of the screen click the name of the second slide to make it the active slide and then edit it If you have several slides not all slide tabs may be visible By clicking the arrow icons on the horizontal scroll bar you can shift the tabs to view them You can also expand the area in which the tabs are displayed When you position the mouse pointer on the scroll bar divider the pointer changes to a double headed arrow and you can move the divider while pressing the mouse button Edit all the slides of your presentation one after the other and change the back ground to the presentation if necessary Once you have finished creating the presentation start the presentation by clicking the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar Inserting Deleting and Renaming Slides To insert an additional slide activate the slide that you want to put the new slide behind Now click the empty space between the tab and the horizontal scroll bar and anew slide appears with the page layout of the previous slide Alternatively choose
295. le as you would any object To later modify the chart data double click and edit it Charts with Linked Data If the data in the StarOffice Calc document changes the chart inserted by this method will not automatically be updated To always have the data up to date you can do as follows 1 2 In the Calc document copy the cell range from which the chart is created Go to the Writer document long click the Insert icon to open the submenu then select DDE Link The data is now in a table in the Writer document and is always linked via DDE to the source data in the Calc document Position the cursor in the table Long click the Insert Objects icon on the main toolbar to open the floating toolbar where you then click the Insert Chart icon Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 157 Inserting Decorative Horizontal Lines Choose Insert Horizontal Line to open a dialog for selecting decorative lines Insert Hornzontal Ruler _ fe The lines are graphics anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the margins You can also find these lines in a Gallery theme If you want to continue using a line from the Internet add it to the relevant theme in the Gallery The line can then be selected from this dialog 158 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Headers Footers and Footnotes Add headers and footers to your pages of text Insert footnotes or endnotes Remarks Concer
296. le of references used in formulas with the help of the AutoPilot Functions Consider the example from the previous topic Now use the functions AutoPilot to calculate the average of monthly sales for each location Sales 2001 London Auckland 1 Position the cursor in cell B8 where you want the average to be displayed Activate the AutoPilot Functions by clicking its icon on the formula bar 2 Select the AVERAGE function If you do not know which category contains this function simply leave the default set to all categories and repeatedly press the letter A until the AVERAGE function is selected 3 Click Next in the AutoPilot Functions On the right half of the AutoPilot another input area will appear where you can enter the arguments of the func tion 226 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 B8 AVERAGE AI Sales 2001 New York London Auckland Berlin Statistical Average AVEDEY T B3 B6 BETADIST kre BETAIN Y i5 BINOMDIST F 7 CHIDIST A CHIINY i CHITEST 18 CONFIDENCE 19 CORREL x Sunt AVERAGE COUNTA COVAR 4 Click in the input field in which you want to enter values in this case starting with field number 1 Enter either B3 B6 or January or use the mouse to select that range in the sheet To do so simply click on the first cell B3 hold down the mouse bu
297. league s suggestions As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with StarOffice it is a simple matter to produce a final version of the document from the results you get back Accepting or Rejecting Changes When you bring your document in which others have noted their changes back together again you can accept or reject the changes individually or all together Ifyou have put multiple copies of the document in circulation first of all you merge these into one document see Merging Versions 396 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Open the document and choose Edit Changes Accept or Reject The Accept or Reject Changes dialog appears Select a change on the List tab The change is selected and displayed in the document and you can now make your decision with one of the dialog buttons If one author has changed another author s change you will see the changes hier archically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy Accept or Reject Changes x List Filter Deletion Star User 0820 2001 09 18 Formats Star User 06 20 2001 09 15 Deletion Star User Poe 0820 2001 09 19 08202001 0918 Accept Reject Accept All Reject All If the list of changes is too long you can switch to the Filter tab in the dialog and specify that you only want to see the changes of certain authors or only the changes of the last day or that you want the list to be restricted in some other
298. lected Do not close the Find amp Replace dialog just yet 6 Click on the Bullets on off icon on the Object Bar All the imported lists now become StarOffice lists 7 Inthe Find amp Replace dialog click on Replace All Since the field is empty all selected strings consisting of for example asterisk and tab will be deleted 8 In the Numbering Bullets dialog you can define the type of bullets for your bulleted lists Changing Numbering via the Keyboard Ifyou want to move your numbering down a level in the hierarchy or further to the right place the cursor at the beginning of the numbered paragraph and press the Tab key Press Shift and Tab together to move an indented bulleted or numbered list up one level to the left If you want to insert a tab stop at the beginning of a numbered line press Ctrl Tab Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 135 Interrupting and Continuing Numbering In a series of automatically numbered paragraphs we want one paragraph not to have a number as in the following example 1 First paragraph 2 Paragraph two An unnumbered paragraph 3 Paragraph number three You can choose from the following methods Delete the automatic numbering 1 Select all paragraphs 1 to 4 and click on the Numbering on off icon 2 Place the cursor before the first character of the third paragraph 3 Press the Backspace key to delete one character to the left The pa
299. lected or goes to the previous range If a range does not exist then goes to the first row 1 Ctrl Down Arrow Goes to the last row of the current range or goes to the next range If a range does not exist it goes to the last row 32000 Ctrl Page Up Goes to previous spreadsheet In the page preview Jumps to previous print page Ctrl Page Down Goes to next spreadsheet In the page preview Jumps to next print page Alt Page Up Scrolls one screen page to the left Alt Page Down Scrolls one screen page to the right 432 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Function Keys Used in Spreadsheets Shorcut Keys Effect F2 Toggles to Edit mode Ctrl F2 Opens the Function AutoPilot F3 Inserts names Ctrl F3 Calls up the Define Names dialog F4 Show Hide Current Database Shift F4 Rearranges the relative absolute references in the input field A1 A 1 A1 A 1 F5 The Navigator Shift F5 Traces dependents Ctrl F5 Traces precedents F7 Starts spell checking Ctrl Starts thesaurus F8 Additional selection on off Shift F8 Extend Selection on off Ctrl F8 Value Highlighting F9 Recalculates Ctrl F9 Update Chart F11 Stylist Shift F11 Creates templates Shift Ctrl F11 Updates templates F12 Grouping on Ctrl F12 Grouping off Chapter 8 Appendix 433 Formatting Spreadsheets Using Shortcut Keys The following cell formats can be
300. les you to enter text at any position within the type area in your text document 1 Click the Direct Cursor on off icon on the main toolbar Clicking the icon turns the direct cursor on and off When the icon appears pressed the direct cursor is enabled 2 Click on a free space in the text document The shape of the mouse pointer shows you how the text you enter will be aligned p Align Left d b Centered q Align Right 3 Enter your text StarOffice automatically inserts the requisite number of blank lines tabs and spaces Selecting and Deleting Text Deleting a character Ifthe cursor is after the character to be deleted press Backspace above the Enter key This key deletes one character to the left of the cursor Ifthe cursor is before the character to be deleted press the Delete key above the arrow keys This key deletes one character to the right of the cursor Deleting text Selecting text to delete with the mouse 1 Left click on the first character to be deleted 2 Keeping the mouse button depressed drag the pointer to the last character to be deleted 3 Release the mouse button 4 Press the Delete key to delete the selected text Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 63 Selecting text to delete with the keyboard R 2A SP 4 J Use the arrow keys to go to the first character to be deleted Hold down the Shift key Using the arrow keys move the cursor to just after
301. lignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All p English USAN Default User defined Number 12 345 00 Options Decimal places 2 M Negative numbers red Leading zeroes fi H w Thousands separator Format cade 65 4091 0 00 IRED 4091 0 00 v x Cancel Help Reset You can influence the currency format in the Cell Attributes dialog Choose Format Cells Numbers tab by two country settings In the Language list box select the basic setting for currency symbol decimal and thousands separators In the Format list box select any deviations from the currency symbol of the format defined by the language If for example the language is set to Default and you are using a German locale setting the currency format will be 1 234 00 A point is used before the thousand digits and a comma before the decimal places If you now select in the Format list box the subordinate currency format English US you will get the following format 1 234 00 As you can see the separators have remained the same Only the currency symbol has been changed and converted but the underlying Format of the notation remains the same as it is set in the locale setting If from the start in Language you convert the cells to English US the English language locale setting is also transferred and the default currency format is now 1 234 00 You can also make a change here so
302. ll When you insert or delete cells rows or columns the table mode decides how the neighboring cells rows or columns should behave In the table mode new rows and columns are only inserted in a fixed way if there is sufficient space Copying Sheet Areas to Text Documents 1 2 Open both the text document and the spreadsheet Select the sheet area you want to copy 3 Point to the selected area and press the mouse button Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment then drag the area into the text document If the documents are not visible next to each other first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button Continue to hold down the mouse button The document addressed in this way is displayed and you can move the mouse pointer within the document Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area release the mouse button The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object You can select and edit the OLE object at any time To edit the OLE object simply double click on it Alternatively select the object and choose Edit Object Edit or choose Edit from the context menu You edit the object in its own frame within the text document but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object 150 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Images Drawings Clipart and FontWork You can insert images graphics
303. ll rights reserved Source code for portions of this product are available under the Mozilla Public License at the following sites http www mozilla org http www jclark com and http www gingerall com Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo Java Solaris StarOffice the Butterfly logo the Solaris logo and the StarOffice logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S and other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the U S and in other countries exclusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd Screen Beans and Screen Beans clipart char acters are registered trademarks of A Bit Better Corporation International CorrectSpell is a trademark of Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V International CorrectSpell Swedish Russian Norwegian English Dutch and Danish correction systems Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Spanish and French correction systems Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Adapted from word list supplied by Librairie Larousse Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Australian English correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Based upon The Macquarie Dictionary
304. ll that s left is to replace the text in the business report with your own Save the report and then print it or present it on the screen by pressing Ctrl the F2 key If you want to start from scratch with a completely new document proceed as follows 1 Create an empty presentation document File New Presentation You will see the AutoPilot Presentation described in StarOffice Help 2 Select Empty presentation and click Create You will see the Modify Slide dialog Here you can define the appearance of the first slide 3 Enter a name and select the desired layout e g Title slide Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 307 Modify Slide Mame lide 1 Cancel Select an AutoLayout Blank Slide Display W Background IY Objects on background 4 You will now see the first page the title slide Click on the existing text and overwrite it with your own text for example Energy Software and Annual Turnover 2000 5 To insert another slide click the area next to the tab at the bottom of the screen Assign a name for the new slide and choose a layout in the context menu of the slide tab click Modify Slide Do not assign a name like Slide2 If you later want to change the order of the slides you might not remember the content of this slide Clear descriptive names like Overview or Introduction are more useful Insert additional slides as necessary The corresponding tabs
305. log illustrated which allows you to replace the 168 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 word Type it correctly in the Word field or select a word from the list of Sugges tions and click on Replace The word in the Word text box can be permanently added to the user defined dictionary First select the Dictionary combo box Then click Add gee When you replace the word in the Word field with another word you can check this other word by clicking on the Check Word button If you want you can automatically enter all unknown words in a text in the active user defined dictionary For instructions refer to StarOffice Help Automatic Spellcheck From within a text document click the AutoSpellcheck on off icon on the main toolbar All words marked as incorrect by the spellchecker will then be under lined in red Click on words underlined in this way with the right mouse button A context menu then appears The context menu often provides a list of suggested words one of which you may click on to select it The suggested word then replaces the word under lined in red If you replace the wrongly typed word using the AutoCorrect function in the context menu the word pair will be entered in the AutoCorrect replacement table To call up this table choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat Replace tab If the word underlined in red is correct you can place it in your custom dictionary using the Add command To exclude
306. lows 1 Select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose Format Page The command is not visible if the sheet was opened with write protection on In that case click the Edit File icon on the function bar 3 Select the Table tab In the Print area mark the details to be printed and click OK 4 Print the document Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 261 Defining Number of Pages for Printing If a sheet is too large for a single printed page StarOffice Calc will print the current sheet evenly divided over several pages Since the automatic page break does not always take place in the optimal position you can define the page distri bution yourself 1 Go to the sheet to be printed 2 Choose View Page Break Preview 3 You will see the automatic distribution of the sheet across the print pages The automatically created print ranges are indicated by dark blue lines and the user defined ones by light blue lines The page breaks line breaks and column breaks are marked as black lines 4 You can move the blue lines with the mouse You will find further options in the Context menu including adding an additional print range removing the scaling and inserting additional manual line and column brakes Printing Sheets in Landscape Format In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View Page Break Preview To make a hard copy in landscape format proceed as follows
307. lue Is egual TO z Cancel Y Cell Style fsck H M Condition 2 cel Wale i equal to me l Cell Style vacation I Condition 3 cel value is egual to bi jir Cell Style Present If you now enter a v without quotation marks in a cell in the previously selected area and press the Enter or Arrow key the cell will be displayed in the defined color A maximum of three conditions is possible Defining Validity To avoid invalid entries in the shift plan you can define a validity condition Select the cells to which you want the validity condition to apply and open the Validity dialog in the Data menu On the Criteria tab define the acceptable entry criteria in this example Text length equal and 1 in the appropriate lists and fields Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 279 Validity Criteria Input Help Error Alert Allow Text length bs M Allow blanks Data equal ki Walle 1 Cancel Help Reset Next click on the Error Alert tab Select the option Show error message when invalid values are entered and click Stop in the Action list box Under Error message enter an appropriate text e g Only v vacation p present or s sick are valid entries If a user were to now enter more than one letter in the corresponding cell in the sheet your defined message will appear Only v vacation p present or s sick are valid entries Further Informati
308. lues is selected by default This means that there are no restrictions You can choose one of the other options Whole Number Decimal Date Time and Text Length This choice already sets the first condition If you choose Whole Numbers values such as 12 5 are not allowed even if they satisfy the other conditions Choosing Date allows date information both in the form 1 1 97 as well as in the form of a serial date Similarly the Time condition permits time values as 12 00 or serial time numbers Text Length stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only After you have set the first condition under Allow select the next condition under Data According to what you choose additional text fields Value Minimum and Maximum may appear to further specify the condition A few possible conditions resulting from this register could be as follows Integer greater than 1 Decimal between 10 and 12 5 Date earlier than or equal to 1 1 2000 Time not equal to 00 00 Text with a length of more than 2 characters After you have determined the conditions for cell validity if any values are subse quently entered which do not meet the conditions StarOffice will display a warning message Fill out the other two tabs in the dialog to specify more detailed messages to aid a user working with your spreadsheet On the Input Help tab page enter the title and the text of the tip which will then be displayed if the cell is s
309. mats 98 filling lists with data 266 filtering database ranges 240 Filter proposal 386 filters for XML 36 Navigator 386 finding chapters 75 text 52 words 52 fixed rows or columns printing 263 floating titles headers 160 floating toolbars using 28 font attributes resetting 74 fonts cannot select 39 resetting 74 FontWork text effects 113 footers left right 159 printing on sheets 263 remarks 159 spacing from text 94 with page numbers 160 footnotes inserting 166 jumping to the footnote anchor 165 navigation 166 organizing 164 remarks 164 settings 166 448 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 spacing 167 tips 166 Format numbers ina spreadsheet 219 formats AutoFormat for tables 216 cells 215 changing text number 208 copying and pasting 98 currency formats 208 number in table 215 pagenumbers 93 resetting 74 searching for 56 spreadsheets 215 transferring 85 Format text in a spreadsheet 219 formatting applying 80 direct indirect 78 editing 81 with adjacent paragraph format 76 with Styles 78 formatting Styles importing 99 remarks 96 form letters avoiding blank paragraphs 177 creating 174 inserting field functions 176 forms designing 382 formula bar calculating formulas 200 examples intext 143 formulas addressing by names 223 calculating 200 calculating intext 143 144 copying 222 formula bar 200 in spreadsheets 203 in table cells 210 printing 261 saving as csv files 265 show in spreadsheets
310. mbo box the option Scroll Through On the Text tab page you can set the distance from the left and right borders The border of a frame goes half inside and half outside Click OK 13 Now you just have to undo the selection of the rectangle by clicking on another place in the document In a moment the text animation will start to run 14 To change the size of the animated text select the rectangle again and double click in the center Now you can select the text and apply a larger font size You can also select a suitable text color by opening the context menu and choosing Character You can enlarge or reduce the page view either by choosing View Zoom or via the context menu of the scale field on the status bar If the screen display is to be refreshed press Shift Ctrl R Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 111 Drawing Lines in Text You can incorporate lines in your text the angle width color etc of which can be defined however you d like Create a horizontal line suitable for example for a website by applying the preset Paragraph Style Horizontal Line Place the cursor on a blank line and double click the Horizontal Line Style in the Stylist If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles switch the view in the Stylist from Automatic to All Styles You can draw a line above beside or below a paragraph by choosing Format Paragraph Borders This fun
311. ment tab Under Type select Page under Select select Next page and under Format select As Page Style Finally click Fields to insert the field command in the footer of your current document In your document you ll have displayed the page number of the next page with the exception of the last page If the word page should also appear in front of the page number insert another field of the same type but with another format Set the cursor in front of the field that you just inserted in the document and call the Fields dialog Again select a field of the Page type under Select select Next page and under Format select Text In the Value text box enter the text to be displayed if a next page exists in the document Enter Continue on page note the space at the end and click Insert Of course you can also enter instead of Continue on page something else For example to indicate the number of the next page Inserting Lines Under Headers You can adjust the appearance of the header directly in the header itself If you click on an existing header you can then format the text individually or as a whole paragraph Additional attributes are available in the Format Page dialog in the tab Header You can also select the Header tab to define a document header for the first time Mark Header on When you close the dialog by clicking on OK a header is created which you can then fill out in the document
312. ments which can also be created with the AutoPilot e g faxes Thanks to the AutoPilot you don t have to start from scratch but can use pre existing texts when creating your own templates whether for business letters faxes memos or other documents Find amp Replace It is very useful when working with a computer to be able to locate certain pieces of text quickly The Find function in StarOffice Writer Calc Impress and Draw can also find variations of the search terms or limit the search to certain places in the document such as the beginning of a word or the end of a paragraph The text strings found in the text can be replaced by other strings with or without confirmation although sometimes manual editing is still necessary e g a devia tion of gender in other languages Finding a Word in Text Imagine you have read or written the word Holland somewhere in a long text Now you want to return to that point in the text but can t remember where it was If this happens activate the Search function with Ctrl F Type the word you want to find and press Enter 52 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Find amp Replace keplace Al keplice Attributes Close Replace with Format Help No ormat Options Whole words only Match case Similarity search Backwards Gurren selection arily E Regular expressions Search for Styles StarOffice will start searching moving from
313. mns can be accurately matched If the row or column label does not match any that exist in the target area it will be appended as a new row or column The data from the consolidation and target areas will be saved when you save the document If you later open a document in which consolidation has been defined this data will again be available Applying Goal Seek With the help of Goal Seek you can calculate a value that as part of a formula leads to the result you specify for the formula You thus define the formula with several fixed values and one variable value and the result of the formula Goal Seek is best illustrated by means of an example To calculate annual interest create a table with the values for the capital C number of years n and interest rate i The formula is I C n i 100 P You can also enter the formula using the variable names Interest Capital Year Interest rate 100 252 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 3 capital c Years n Interest rate i Interest 150 000 00 1 7 50 11 250 00 In this example the investment capital of 150 000 and an interest rate of 7 5 is calculated to result in annual interest income of 11 250 The cells are formatted after calculation A5 and E5 as currency and C5 as percent The cell width is adjusted automatically We recommend that you assign names to cells so that you can use these names in the formula Naming Cell
314. mply double click on it Alternatively select the object and choose Edit Object Edit or choose Edit from the context menu You edit the object in its own frame within the text document but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spread sheets Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object Inserting Data From Spreadsheets If you only want to copy the contents of a cell text or numbers use the clip board You can even copy formulas that are in the cells into the clipboard e g from the input lines of the formula bar so that they can then be inserted into a text If you want to copy a simple rectangular area of cells into a text document as a sheet select the cells in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag amp drop to insert them into the text document You will then find an OLE object in the text document which you can edit further if you want If you drag cells to the character view of a presentation document they will also re appear there as OLE objects Once dragged into the outline view each cell will form a line of the outline view Dragging using drag and drop will move the cells Only if you press the shift key when dragging will it be copied 394 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting Data From Text Documents You can transfer text into other document types such as spreadsheets and presen tations We make a distinction depending on whether the text should be set in
315. n docked and variable Navigator windows I 4 iq Ii Ii ui nn aif Headings Registration How to Register Overview After installation of your Star Office Registering as a StarOffice User Registration Dialog Installing StarOffice General Installation Tips Comments about using this User s Guide Starting StarOffice under Windows Starting StarOffice under UNIX Contents of the Installation CO Single User Installation Installation Requirements Starting the Single User Installation Setup Inside the Navigator double click on a heading to move the cursor to the rele vant point in the text Drag and drop to change the sequence of chapters You can also do this by Te setup Dialogs Selecting the installation directory clicking on the Promote Chapter and Selecting Custom Installatine Coamcncanenat 2 F Demote chapter icons The content of gt the chapters and of the relevant sub setup Guide StarOffice ctive E chapters is of course also moved Ifyou want to move the chapter headings without moving their contents drag and drop while holding down the Ctrl key The Drag Mode icon only affects drag and drop behavior between Navigator and document When using this function switch on Heading Levels Shown by clicking on the relevant icon in the Navigator so that you can see what is happening in the document Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 75 Quick Formatt
316. n immediately see which Style ranks above and below another Style in the hierarchy If you change the left indent to 2 cm in the Paragraph Style Heading for example you will change the left indent for all Paragraph Styles Heading 1 to Heading 10 to 2 cm Changes that you make directly in one of the Style dialogs have priority over the properties inherited from higher ranking Styles If you choose the Organize tab in the Paragraph Styles dialog in the Based on list box you will see which superordinate Style the current Style is derived from Character Styles In the previous illustration the Stylist seen on the right displays a list of available Character Styles These Styles do not modify the whole paragraph but only the single word in which the cursor is currently positioned or a selected text range You can use or modify the supplied Styles or you can define your own Styles and use those The best way is to start by selecting a Style from the Stylist with a single click which you then use as the starting point for creating your own Style You then merely have to enter the properties that are different from the selected Style since the other properties are inherited from the parent Style Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 81 The following table contains a selection of Styles Style Type Attribute Selection Paragraph Styles _Indents and Spacing Alignment Hyphenation Tabs Font Language
317. n marks and close the dialog with Close and OK Now the word Companyname will never be hyphenated You do not have to search through the text yourself to find words to hyphenate manually Choose Tools Hyphenation This starts a dialog showing one after the other all words that could be hyphenated with the current line break Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 171 Hyphenation English U5A Word ele Hyphenate Cancel Mext Remove oom Ee e Help The place at which the word could best be hyphenated with the current line break is highlighted Click on the left arrow button to move the highlighting to the left if you would like the word to be hyphenated at an earlier place As soon as you click on Hyphenate the word will be hyphenated at the highlighted place Then you will see the next word that could be hyphenated If the spellcheck recognizes the word the hyphens entered there will be displayed as well Thesaurus You can use the thesaurus to look up related words Thesaurus English USA variations lt Word Replace clear clean Cancel Meaning Sy noryt Search To make or Keep fan area clean Language To make or become clear by the re Help Free from evil and corruption Free from dirt stain or impurities hloat larni ar ober coer a 1 Within your text select the word you want to look up in the thesaurus 2 Choose Tool
318. n register your address book as a new data source in StarOffice You can read further how to do this under System address book as data source 3 In the Table box select the database table you want to use as address book 4 Under Field assignment you can set the fields for company department first name etc to the actual field names used in your address book 376 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 5 After this point your data source is recognized in StarOffice as the address book If you now open a template from the Business Correspondence cate gory StarOffice can automatically correctly insert the fields for a form letter System Address Book as Data Source 1 Choose File Templates Address Book Source and click the Administrate button to call the Data Source Administration dialog see also instructions above Another way to call the same dialog is to choose Tools Data Sources Click the New data source button Data Source Administration Cte tna sauce 2a bibliograpriy General dBase Tables Queries Links Hame Bibliography Connection Database type a fase Data source URL dbc dbase file D Star Of ficeb 0user databasebiblio m Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 377 Data Source Administration x New Data Source General Tables Queries Links 4 Bibliography Name Data source 1 Connection Database type Data sour
319. n the lt SDVAL gt HTML tag the exact internal number value is written so that after opening the HTML document with StarOffice you know you have the exact values 1 To save the current Calc document as HTML choose File Save As 2 In the area with the other StarOffice Calc filters choose the File type Web Page 3 Enter a File name and click Save Opening Sheets in HTML HTML documents are always opened with write protection on To edit an opened HTML document click the Edit File icon on the function bar StarOffice offers various filters for opening HTML files which you can select under File Open dialog appears in the File type field pay attention to the area as the name Web page is always the same Open in StarOffice Writer Web filter Web page or as default do not select a filter All the options of StarOffice Writer Web are now available to you such as Show HTML source Inthe StarOffice Writer filter open Web page All the options of StarOffice Writer are now available to you Not all options that StarOffice Writer offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format Inthe StarOffice Calc filter open Web page All the options of StarOffice Calc are now available to you Not all options that StarOffice Calc offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format 264 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Formulas and Values as CSV File Csv files are pure text file
320. n the Navigator if you want to change their order or their place in the hierarchy and thus also the numbering Ne UT ht l l 3 lpi NN Click on one of the icons Promote Chapter Demote Chapter Promote Level and Demote Level or move the chapter heading in the Navigator using the mouse The numbering of all affected chapters is adjusted automatically Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 129 Automatic Numbering Bullets StarOffice also automatically recognizes bullets and numbering during entry if you have previously chosen Format AutoFormat While Typing Numbering that uses Roman numerals is also recognized and continued The list can start with any value e g you do not have to begin with I An example with Roman numerals 1 Enter I with a period after it also followed by a space and text You can also use a right parenthesis here instead of a period 2 Press the Enter key to create a new paragraph 3 The new paragraph will begin with II i e the Roman numeral for two Enter some text press the Enter key and the next paragraph will begin with III and so forth You can begin your Roman numbering with any numeral you want for example with ci corresponds to 101 followed by cii 102 etc Numbering Illustrations by Chapters To number illustrations by chapter so that illustrations are labeled Illustration 1 1 Illustration 1 2 etc in the first chapter and Illustra
321. nctions available in text frames are the same as in text documents In addi tion to text frames can contain pictures multiple columns etc 108 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Linking Text Frames You can link several text frames to each other even when they are on different pages of a document The text will automatically flow from one to the other 1 In order to create a link click the edge of the frame you want to link Eight handles will appear around the edges 2 i Click the Link icon on the object bar 3 Click the frame that is to be linked When a linked frame is selected any existing links are indicated by a connecting line The height of a frame that is linked with a subsequent frame is automatically fixed The height is no longer automatically adapted to the content of the frame Only the height of the last frame of a chain can be adapted to the text content If you click the Link of the object bar when a frame is selected the cursor changes It can now display two icons a chain with an arrow if two frames can be linked by clicking or a chain with a stop sign if linking is not possible where the cursor is positioned A note is displayed in the status bar in each case e g why linking is not possible g Linking is only possible from one frame to the next That means that a frame that is already linked to a frame cannot be linked to another frame which follows Therefore the link icon cannot be activate
322. nd Footers 159 Inserting Page Numbers in Footers 160 Inserting Chapter Information in Headers 160 Defining Different Headers 162 Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages 163 Inserting Lines Under Headers 163 Footnotes and Endnotes 164 Inserting and Editing Footnotes 166 Spacing Between Footnotes 167 Spellcheck Dictionaries Hyphenation 168 Controlling the Spellcheck via Dialog 168 Automatic Spellcheck 169 Removing Words From User Defined Dictionaries 170 Hyphenation 170 Thesaurus 172 Form Letters Business Cards and Labels 174 Creating Form Letters 174 Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards 178 Printing Labels With Serial Numbers 179 Printing Address Labels 181 Newsletters 183 Creating a Newsletter From a Template 183 Further Information 190 Letters With Envelopes 191 Using a Ready Made Letter Template 191 Creating a Letter Template Using the AutoPilot 192 Creating an Envelope 193 Applying Various Fonts 194 Creating and Printing a Letter With an Envelope 195 Summary 195 10 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 197 The functions in StarOffice Calc 197 The StarOffice Calc Window 199 Structure of aSpreadsheet 200 Rows and Columns 200 Multiple Sheets ina Document 202 Values and Formulas as Cell Contents 203 Calculating in Spreadsheets 203 Using a Function Based on the Example of Euro Conversion 205 What Can a Cell Contain 206 Text 206 Numbers 207 Cells in the Currency Fo
323. nd in other applica tions such as menus and icons but a host of other special features besides For example many of the special StarOffice features can be accessed via a context menu opened by right clicking on the selected objects Other user friendly func tions are available by dragging and dropping with the mouse Starting StarOffice Once you have installed the program see the separate setup guide you will find the StarOffice 6 0 group on the Windows Start menu under Programs To create a blank text document in StarOffice Writer click Text Document For a blank spreadsheet in StarOffice Calc click Spreadsheet and so on When working under Windows you can use the StarOffice 6 0 Quick starter On the Windows task bar you will find an icon that you can either double click or right click to open its context menu Right clicking Quickstarter opens a submenu from which you can open a new blank document Double click Quickstarter to open the Templates and Docu ments dialog see page 33 25 The StarOffice Writer Window A text document is displayed and edited in the StarOffice Writer window A spreadsheet presentation or drawing is displayed in a very similar window except the menus and icons change automatically depending on the context E Untitled StarOffice 6 0 Fie Edit iew Insert Format Tools Window Help Be ER ee 8 Page 1 1 Default 100 INSRT sTo HYP Toolbars in the StarOffice Window A Title
324. nd the Select tool must be activated If you want to change the font size and style of the title for example select it and assign new attributes from the Font and Font Size fields in the Object bar You can also define borders by clicking the paragraph you want to apply a border to and defining the attributes in the list boxes Line Width and Line Style To apply a uniform background and recurring elements company name subject to all slides click the Master View icon to the left of the horizontal scroll bar You do not need to worry about the default texts in the master view these texts are not visible on the slides The only text visible on the slides is that which you enter yourself Using the Text floating toolbar on the main toolbar in this view you can open a frame for your background text Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 309 Open the Stylist by clicking the Stylist icon in the Function bar Then click the Presentation Styles icon Select a background style and open the Modify dialog via the context menu Click the corresponding slide tab and make your changes By modifying the Background Style you can assign all slides the same back ground Fresentation Styles Background objects Motes Outline 1 Outline 2 Outline 3 Outline 4 Outline 5 Outline 6 Outline 7 Outline amp Outline 9 Subtitle a Styles g a Since the Master View can be activated at any time it is always possible to mak
325. ne the width and height of the footer Page Styles Summary If you assign a Character Style or Paragraph Style first select the text in which want to use that Style and then double click in the Stylist on the name of the Style The method is a bit different with Page Styles A Page Style is always a property of the first paragraph of a page This can be the first paragraph of the current page or the first paragraph of a previous page Not every first paragraph has the Page Style attribute StarOffice Writer searches for the Page Style attribute of the current page by starting at the cursor s position and going back towards the beginning of the document checking each first paragraph of a page to see if it has a Page Style as attribute You can set another Page Style using for example the context menu of the field in the Status bar which displays the current Page Style If you do this StarOffice Writer will search backwards until the first paragraph at the beginning of a page has been found in which the current Page Style will be applied This paragraph will now be given the newly selected Page Style and this Style will be applied from this point up to the end of the document or until a new first paragraph containing another Page Style is found 94 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Defining Default Templates If you find you always have to change the formatting of your new documents to suit your requirements it is time to use a s
326. ne this as the default If you choose Tools Options Load Save General there are alter native file formats that can be selected for each StarOffice document type XML file structure The StarOffice XML file formats are compressed according to the ZIP method Use an unpacking program of your choice to unpack the content of an XML file with your subdirectories You see a structure similar to the following illustration Name Type Path j ML Document File ML Document ML Document SML Document SML Document Basic ML Document Basic sStandard 97 manifest xml SML Document meta int The text content of the document is located in content xml You can view this file with for example a pure text editor By default content xml without indents is stored at the start of the line in order to minimize the time for saving and opening By choosing Tools Options Load Save General you can change this procedure so that the lines are saved with a structured indent meta xml contains inter alia the meta information on the document which you can enter underFile Properties If you save a document with security only meta xml is not secured settings xml contains further information on settings for this document for example on the printer on the recording of changes the associated data sources and so on Instyles xml you find the styles defined for the document that can for example be seen in the stylis
327. ng state In the floating state the window floats above the workplace so that the windows below it are partially covered Switch to the fixed state to display the docked window next to the workplace Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 29 If the window is docked to the left of the workplace the following buttons appear depending on the state Show A hidden window can be shown by clicking the arrow button Hide i Click the arrow button to hide a window Stick j Click this button to fix a floating window Floating J Click this button to change a fixed window to a floating window On any window edge where another window is docked you will see two buttons which allow you to show hide or fix the window If you use the arrow button on the window edge to show the other window the window will remain visible until you manually hide it again with the same button Ifyou show the window by clicking the window border you activate theAuto Hide function Hiding is then automatic Seize a window by the title bar or by a vacant area and move it across the screen Hold down the Ctrl key while moving it to dock the window to the edges If you want to dock another window to one which is already docked you can have them one on top of the other or side by side Note the change in the window edge This shows you where the window will dock and how big it will be 30 8 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Opening and Saving Documents
328. ning Headers and Footers Headers and footers are always linked to the Page Style All pages with the same Page Style automatically have the same headers and footers By using Fields in the headers and footers you can insert variable content in your text documents such as page numbers and chapter headings If you want to have other differences in the content of headers and footers it is best to create different Page Styles and apply these to the pages Choose Insert Header or Insert Footer to select the Page Style in which you want to insert or remove headers or footers You can also choose Format Page to start a dialog that allows you to select headers or footers for the current Page Style Here you will find a check box Same content left right If this is not marked you can format different headers and footers on the left sides than on the right sides If you only want to assign a single page a different header you could also insert a text box to cover the header text Anchor the frame to the page and assign the Wrap Through option and the background color White Remarks concerning headers and footers in HTML format Some of the header and footer commands are also available for HTML docu ments Since these headers and footers are not provided in the HTML definition they are exported as special tags and are correctly interpreted again upon loading an HTML page with StarOffice Web browsers show the content of the header
329. ning text with straight lines If you want to slant a text so that it runs precisely from one point on the text page to another point this is what you do 1 Using the draw functions draw a straight line from one point to another 2 In the list box on the object bar select the line style Invisible 3 Double click on the line which is now invisible but you can still see the two ends Double click exactly between them 4 Enter the text then click outside the line object 114 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 The Navigator In addition to the Stylist which is designed to help you format documents see page 80 another important feature of StarOffice that you will find helpful is the Navigator On the one hand the Navigator helps you navigate or move accu rately to the parts of your document you are looking for On the other hand the Navigator provides a lot of information about the content of the document in a clearly understandable way In text documents the Navigator provides you with complete lists of all graphics and tables in your document In addition you can double click the list entry in the Navigator and by doing so go straight to that place in your document But the Navigator can do a lot more For example in texts that you have structured through the use of headings you can change the sequence and hierarchical levels of whole chapters and sub chapters quite easily by clicking the appropriate icons
330. nt Ifthe curve is not steadily continued at the data point but instead forms a corner or tip it is a corner point You can convert any type into any other giving you great control over the shape of the curve TIP How to link two existing points in a drawing using lines To precisely link two points within a drawing using lines click the Line icon on the main toolbar and also activate the option bar via View Tool bars Option Bar Select the Snap to Object Points icon on this toolbar Editing Curves ce You can edit the data points if they are displayed as small rectangles If you want to work on a curve later when it is no longer activated click the Edit Points icon on the object bar and select the curve If the object bar is not visible click briefly on Select on the main toolbar 1 Now click Edit Points on the far left of the object bar or on the option bar 2 Click once on the point you want to edit It will appear as a filled square and you will see two B zier lines with control points at the ends Please note that sometimes one of the control points is directly on top of the B zier point and thus hard to see In the case of corner points which define right angles the control points lie directly on the B zier point 3 You may now move the B zier point and the control points as you wish Note how the curve changes accordingly The change in form of the cursor indicates in each case the function that can be
331. nt to save the document This command saves the current document as if you pressed Ctrl 5 for example If the document was saved previously the old version will be overwritten by the current version J If you mark both check boxes Always create backup copy and AutoSave every a the file will be overwritten every n minutes At the same time the backup copy will be replaced by the last version XML File Formats StarOffice uses an XML file format as the default for saving and opening its docu ments XML file format names If in the dialogs for saving and opening StarOffice documents you do not select any other file type StarOffice uses the following XML formats Application File extension StarOffice Writer SXW StarOffice Writer templates stw StarOffice Calc SXC StarOffice Calc templates stc StarOffice Impress sxi StarOffice Impress templates sti StarOffice Draw sxd StarOffice Draw templates std StarOffice Math sxm Master documents SXg 36 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 These file name extensions on the one hand allow better differentiation if you are searching though a lot of files of different file types in a directory And on the other from the name it is clear that compressed XML files are involved that must first be unpacked before being read for example by a text editor If you want to work permanently with another file format you can defi
332. ntations Shortcut Keys Effect Arrow key Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow Crtl Arrow Key Moves the page view in the direction you want Press Shift key and drag with mouse Moves the selected object horizontally or vertically in the direction you want Ctrl and dragging with Copy when moved option active When moving the selected object a copy is made Alt Key If you press the Alt key before moving or zooming in on the object the object is centered Alt key and click the object Selection of overlapping objects The object behind the currently selected object is selected Alt Shift and click the object Selection of overlapping objects The object before the currently selected object is selected Shift key when selecting objects Object is added to the selection if it has not been selected or is removed from the selection if it has been selected Shift key when zooming Zoom in is proportional to the original shape of the object in creating Straight lines can be changed only with respect to their direction Tab key Individual objects are selected in the order in which they were created from first to last Shift Tab Individual objects are selected in the reverse order in which they were created from last to first Shift key while dragging in Edit Points mode Enables changing the length of the dimension line Esc key Switches to selecti
333. ntered interactively with the AutoPilot Functions Additionally you can enter text and flexibly arrange the cells so you can comfortably style fill out calculate and print your own forms with StarOffice Calc Database Functions If your data can be summarized into records such as addresses inventory levels customer orders or similar then these can also be managed by StarOffice Calc Even if you do not want to calculate anything you can for example quickly sort the database range and search your data for specific characteristics such as maximum or minimum values 197 In addition a sheet in StarOffice Calc can serve as a data source for creating form letters with StarOffice Writer Arranging Data You can organize data in easy to read lists With just a few mouse clicks you can reorganize the view to show or hide certain data ranges format ranges according to special conditions or calculate subtotals and totals Examining and Extrapolating Data The data in your StarOffice Calc tables can be examined in detail in many different ways StarOffice Calc is useful for creating term papers because it supports many statistical functions such as regression analyses And for daily calculations at work the integrated financial functions are helpful because they can be used to print detailed tables of current credits and loans and other data What If Calculations An interesting feature is immediately viewing results of changes mad
334. ntering the password All cells in a newly created spreadsheet document have the protected attribute You can turn this attribute on and off on the Cell Protection tab page of the Cell Attributes dialog which you can open by choosing Format Cells or with the Format Cells context menu command The Protected attribute can be set or removed for each cell individually In any case it does not take effect until you protect the entire sheet and or the Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 273 entire document You can apply this protection with Tools Protect Document Sheet or Tools Protect Document Document Protect Sheet OK po omm Cancel Password lI Confirm Help You can set a password for protecting the sheet and the document but this is not required If a password is set then protection can only be removed later by entering the correct password If no password is set there is still effective protection against your document being accidentally modified Sheet protection prevents modification of the contents of this specific sheet Document protection prevents the sheets from being inserted deleted resorted or renamed Ifyou have a document with confidential data that you want to protect from being opened by unauthorized persons you can protect it with a password The password makes this protection of the entire document dependent on the protection mechanism
335. nting to the text it is a good idea to mirror this automatically on even pages too To do this use the Mirror on even pages option on the Type tab of the Graphics dialog choose Format Graphics Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 151 Captions and Number Ranges In text documents you can create separate continuously numbered captions for figures tables and drawing objects You can also define as many separate number ranges as you like The captions are linked to the figures tables or drawing objects in a frame Select the frame when you move the object Defining Captions 1 Select the figure or the object or place the cursor in the table for which you want to insert a caption 2 Open the Caption dialog with the command Insert Caption 3 The dialog shows you a preview of how the caption will look You can add further text in the Caption field Click OK If you would like to place a tab stop between the automatic captions e g Figure 1 and the additional text you can insert it in the document later Press Ctrl Tab to insert a tab stop at the beginning of a paragraph The paragraph format of the automatically applied caption is obtained from the Paragraph Style Illustration Table Drawing or Text All of these Paragraph Styles are derived from the Caption Paragraph Style So if you want all captions always to appear in green for example simply modify the Caption Paragraph Style ac
336. nto the copyright symbol provided the Use replacement table check box on the Options tab page is marked Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 49 The fonts supplied with StarOffice include the euro symbol If you work with other fonts you can easily insert the euro symbol from another font using Auto Correct When working in a text document choose Insert Special Character Look for the euro symbol and click OK Select the euro symbol Choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat The selected euro symbol has already been inserted in the Replace with text box although it may not appear if the system font used in the dialog does not contain this symbol Enter in the Abbreviation text box eu for example The Text only box should not be marked Click New Now close the dialog As soon as you enter the eu followed by a space or at the end of a sentence a euro symbol will be inserted On the Exceptions tab you can enter exceptions for two types of automatic correc tion which are described below If you select the option to automatically start each sentence with a capital upper case letter then a lowercase d following e g would be capitalized for example You can enter e g as an exception to prevent this type of correction If you select the option to automatically convert the second of two capital letters at the beginning of a word to a lowercase letter you can enter exceptions that are correctly written with two capital letters
337. nu bar choose Options from the submenu that then appears then choose StarOffice and finally User Data Chapter 1 StarOffice Documentation and Help 21 Using the StarOffice Help Different kinds of help are available in StarOffice You can choose step by step instructions with full references in the contents of the StarOffice Help Help Tips that pop up next to the mouse pointer or similar to Help tips more detailed explanations in Extended Tips The StarOffice Help To access the StarOffice Help use the Help menu or click the Help buttons in the individual dialogs StarOffice Help Help about StarOffice Writer Hep about StarOffice Writer Contents Index Find Bookmarks tes A ag Welcome to the StarOffice Writer Help 2 Help about StarOffice Writer gt Help about StarOffice Math 2 Help about StarOffice Impress gt Help about StarOffice Draw Help about StarOffice Calc 2 Help about StarOffice Basic Help about StarOffice Writer Instructions for Using StarOffice Writer The StarOffice Writer Functions Menus Toolbars Text Document Shortcut Keys Charts in StarOffice Help about the Help The StarOffice Help Window Help Agent Tips and Extended Tips Index Keyword Search in the Help Find The Full Text Search Managing bookmarks Contents The Main Help Topics The StarOffice Help is context sensitive This means that to get help about a spreadsheet in StarOffice Calc you first open a spre
338. o be seen in an index 1 2 Choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables On the Index Table tab page select the type Alphabetical Index Mark the Concordance file check box Click the File button to select whether to open create or edit a concordance file Further information on the structure of the concordance file can be found in the StarOffice Help Creating User Defined Indexes You can create as many user defined indexes as you want Click the icon New User Defined Index in the dialog Insert Index Entry and enter the name of the new index After this you can carry out the entries for this new index Finally you can create the index in your document 1 2 Position the cursor on the place where the user defined index is to be created Choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables The dialog Insert Index Table will appear Select the user defined type on the Index Table tab page If you have given the user defined index a name select this name from the Type list box Select the index type in the list box and click OK to generate the index from marked entries Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 121 Insert Index T able X Index Table Entries Styles Columns Background Type and title Title User Defined Index User Defined Index Heading 1 This is the content from the first chapter This is auser directory entry Type
339. o different Page Styles and apply them to the respective pages There are preset Styles for First page Left page and Right page which you can adapt to your specific needs For example the Page Style for left pages might have different inner and outer margins and the style for right pages would be a mirror image of those margins If you don t need different headers and footers simply choose a mirrored page layout under Page Layout in the tab Page Switching between odd and even Page Styles and between First Page and Left Pages can be done automatically by defining the Next Style If you define the Page Style with Next Style and apply the new Page Style to the first page then StarOffice will automatically apply the correct Page Styles to the continuation pages 1 Open anew text document Click the Page Styles icon in the Stylist Select the Style First Page to use as the basis for your own Page Style 2 3 4 Open the context menu and choose New 5 In the Page Styles dialog go to the tab Organizer Give your Page Style a name such as Pagel and define Left Page as the Next Style 6 For the Left Page define Right Page as the Next Style and for the Right Page choose Left Page 162 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages With Insert Footer insert a footer Set your cursor in the footer and in your main menu go to Insert Fields Other Select the Docu
340. o go Avoiding Blank Paragraphs If you have chosen the form letter field COMPANY to appear in the recipient field a blank line might appear in your printed letter That happens if the COMPANY database field in the database is empty However it is possible to prevent empty fields from being included Place the cursor in your text document before the form letter field COMPANY Choose Insert Fields Other to open the Fields dialog On the Functions tab select the type Hidden Paragraph Now in the Condition field enter the following text without quotation marks not Company If the COMPANY database field is now empty the COMPANY line will not be printed and the rest of the lines will be moved upward Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 177 Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards Designing Business Cards via Dialog Choose File New Business Cards to open a dialog with several tabs which allow you to choose how your business cards will look Designing Labels and Business Cards There is yet another way of designing business cards if you regard business cards as a simplified special kind of label In general all business cards are the same Labels can be filled with different contents obtained from a database or they can be marked with serial numbers 1 Choose File New Labels to open the Labels dialog 2 On the Labels tab under Format define the label format StarOffice Write
341. o open the Spellcheck dialogs If you choose Tools Spellcheck Check or press F7 but there are no unknown words in your document you will not see the dialog In this case you need to enter a delib erately misspelled or unknown word Spellcheck English USA Original sratement Ignore Word 5 x g Ignore All Suggestions Always Replace AU LG lGtheth Thesaurus Language A English USA h Options Dictionary koffice AIN Add Backwards Unknown word Help Close You will see the Spellcheck dialog when you call the spellchecker manually via the menu or by pressing F7 This method has the advantage that before calling the dialog you can select text and then check the spelling only in the text you have selected The Spellcheck dialog is described in detail in the StarOffice Help A manually initiated spellcheck always begins at the cursor position unless the text was selected in which case it begins at the beginning of the selected text and ends at its end If the spellcheck does not begin at the beginning of the document and if the end of the document is reached during the checking process a dialog appears asking whether you want to continue checking at the beginning of the document The system always searches first through the selected user defined dictionaries If the word is not found there it searches through the main dictionary If the word is not there either you will see the dia
342. o this click with the selection tool on a position where there are no objects 1 Inthe Area dialog click the Gradients tab This is where you can define all of the options for new color gradients Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmap Properties Type Elipsoia P Gradient 1 B Gradient 2 Center 70 LE Gradient 3 Modify He Gradient 4 Center Y 20 Gradient 5 Er Gradient 6 Angle 195 degree Delete J Border From s Light cyar z fios E O0 To m Yellow fios 00w Cancel Help Reset 2 From the list of existing color gradients click the gradient you want to use as a basis for creating your new color gradient eh hh 3 Click the Add button In the dialog that appears you can assign a name for the new gradient For example enter the name UFO and click OK The name appears as a new entry at the end of the list and will already be selected for editing 358 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 4 Click Modify to save the changes in the new gradient The preview shows how the gradient looks 5 Close the Area dialog with OK You can use the new color gradient immedi ately Interactively Defining a Color Gradient Color gradients can be modified by clicking and dragging them with the mouse In order to be defined interactively the object must already have a color gradient 1 Select an object which has a colo
343. ocuments that are saved in XML format StarOffice 6 0 Format can be provided with a password These documents can no longer be opened without the password The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor either This applies to content graphics and OLE objects Turning on protection Choose File Save As and mark Save with password Save the document Turning off protection Open the document entering the correct password Choose File Save As and unmark Save with pass word The information that you can enter under File Properties and which includes the name of the author date created word and character counts etc will not be encrypted Protecting Revision Marking With every change made in StarOffice Calc and StarOffice Writer the review func tion records who made the change This function can be turned on with protection so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered Until then all changes will continue to be recorded Acceptance or rejection is not possible Turning on protection Choose Edit Changes Protect Records Enter and confirm a password of at least 5 characters Turning off protection Choose Edit Changes Protect Records Enter the correct password Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 413 Protecting Cell Ranges in StarOffice Calc In StarOffice Calc you can protect whole spreadsheets and the document as a whole In the process you can
344. of cells sheets and documents described above To save a document with a password choose File Save As and mark the Save with Password check box Creating a Reference If you want to insert a value say the result of your profits into another sheet or into another spreadsheet document you must create a reference Select the cell where you want to insert the result and enter Now select the cell that contains the original result and press Enter This cell can also be included in another spreadsheet or in another file The result is automatically inserted into the refer ence cell and is also updated if changes are made later You can drag the content of a cell to a cell in another document You can either choose to transfer a copy of the cell as it now stands into the other document or create a link so that the other document always reflects the current content of the cell After you have set all the necessary preferences and changes you can save the document and print it 274 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Further Information The document based on this template is protected In order to make modifications in the protected cells you have to first disable the protection via Tools Protect Document Spreadsheet This must be done individually for every protected sheet including the hidden sheets Inserting a note If you want to keep a note perhaps reminding you to sell a certain share later on select the rel
345. olbar allows you to change the displayed units to centimeters inches point pica etc These changes are only valid until you exit StarOffice and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently choose Tools Options Text Document General and change the measurement unit there Changing Default Templates When you open a new document with File New a blank document appears based on a StarOffice template You can edit or modify this document or replace it with an existing document so that the new document contains your customized format attributes or other contents Modifying Default Templates First open anew empty document and edit it until you feel it would make a good template For example edit the Styles in the Stylist If you have already found a StarOffice document which satisfies your needs this step is not neces sary P You can define a template for each StarOffice module The following describes how to proceed for text documents 1 Now save the document by choosing File Templates Save and saving the document in for example the Default category 2 Choose File Templates Organize 3 Double click Default in the list on the left You will see the user defined templates in the directory staroffice6 0 user template Select the template you have just saved and open the context menu or open the submenu of the Commands button
346. olor or turn on and off individually elelelel Ambient light E Gray 60 m 3D Effects Textures and Material With these two sections you control the appearance of the surface of 3D objects The numerous possibilities are presented for you in the StarOffice Help Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 365 Logo We have supplied a brief step by step introduction showing you how to use 3D text and procedures to create a logo The Workshop document is located in the Samples Drawings folder The following section describes this sample document 366 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Designing 3D Objects From Font Characters Open the Samples Drawings Workshop document Switch to the Step 1 page Todo the practice exercise you should also open an empty drawing document choose File New Drawing So that you can see both documents side by side change the task size of the new empty drawing document Untitled1 and the document Workshop so that you can see them both together on the screen GI E 7 el Slr re gt me Cll wa 2 e step 1 g 3 Create a text field which contains a single capital letter Format it with the font of your choice and set the font size to approx 400 pt _ i Ol relia gt ifs Slide 1 j gt Step 1 Create a text box containing a single capital l
347. oloring with 324 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 bitmap textures if required perspectives and illumination and you will create impressive 3D objects for your invitation cards brochures and business cards To insert additional elements into your drawing use the many cliparts available in the gallery It doesn t matter if they are vector or pixel graphics Export Use StarOffice Draw to create buttons and icons for your Web pages quickly and easily and export them as GIF JPG PNG or other formats Construct There are many assistants to help your create exact drawings Define a grid to which your object is to be snapped while constructing and moving or temporarily snap new objects to the edges and points of existing objects The size of the object can be altered at any time by entering the required measurements in the Properties dialog It is also simple to insert dimension lines which can be used in a variety of ways Integrate And it is self evident that you can add texts tables charts and formulas from the other program modules of StarOffice into your drawing Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 325 The StarOffice Draw Window E Untitled2 StarOffice 6 0 PO OY SS OST pe 0 Socom fem tock E Sateen Elm o tcosso N i 123 45 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 17 18 19 205 Connectors Navigator DP Arrange TF at O E h sive i S ITEAN side 1
348. ols area at the lower left of the Keyboard tab and then select the Adding unknown words function next to it 6 Search for an available key combination in the Keyboard list box e g F10 7 Click Modify and close the dialog with OK Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 401 Now by pressing the key or shortcut keys you have selected you can start a spell check of the current text document automatically placing all unknown words in an active user defined dictionary To include the unknown words in a dictionary you must fulfill the following conditions The dictionary should be activated This dictionary cannot be a negative dictionary The language of the dictionary has to be set up on All The dictionary file cannot be a read only file Configuring Menus Note Integrating a scanner requires a scanner driver compatible with your oper ating system Currently StarOffice supports the integration of TWAIN drivers under Windows and SANE drivers under Unix The method for integrating commands into a StarOffice menu shown here can also be used for other functions StarOffice modules include scanning menu commands that let you edit graphics The commands work only if you have a TWAIN compatible driver for your scanner or digital camera The following explains how you can integrate scanning commands into the File menu of a text document A TWAIN driver is usually integrated into the File menu A new item
349. on Creating Input Help In the Validity dialog you can create your own help function for a previously selected area Select the Input Help tab and check the box Show input help when cell is selected Enter a title in the respective field and enter the help text in the field below This text is then displayed as a Help tip for the user Linking Sheet Information The information contained in a schedule can also be used by linking it to the vaca tion accounts and automatically subtracting used vacation days for example 280 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Calendar Here we explain how to create your very own personal calendar All you need do is enter your data and click a few buttons StarOffice takes care of everything else November 02 Sun 10 Marine Corps Dey Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 281 Creating a Calendar with a Template Choose File New Templates and Documents Select Templates Miscella neous and Monthly Annual Calendar Click Open to display the calendar in the work area First specify whether you want to create a calendar for a month or an entire year and specify that under Period StarOffice Calendar Calendar Month Time Frame Year Miarmth Cancel Personal Data Select your state province in the Public holidays list box The appropriate public holidays will be noted on the calendar If you know some important dates in advance e g birt
350. on where you want to insert a copy of the picture If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted Copying Draw Objects into Other Documents In StarOffice it is possible to directly copy draw objects between text spreadsheets and presentation documents 1 A 3 Select the draw object or objects Copy the draw object to the clipboard for example by using Ctrl C Switch to the other document and place the cursor where the draw object is to be inserted Insert the draw object to the target position for example by using Ctrl V Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 391 Inserting in a text document An inserted draw object is anchored in a text docu mE ment at the current paragraph You can change the anchor by selecting the object and clicking on the Change Anchor icon on the object bar This opens a E popup menu where you can change the possible el types of anchor Fage Inserting in a spreadsheet An inserted draw object is anchored to a spreadsheet in the current cell You can change the anchor between cell and page and back by selecting the object and clicking on the Change Anchor on the object bar Drag and Drop With the Data Source View The simplest and quickest way of transferring data from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document or creating forms based on a data source is the drag and drop method Copying with Drag
351. on As you can see this allows you to calculate extremely complex relationships Open a new spreadsheet with the command File New Spreadsheet It is named Untitled1 until you save it under a different name If you look at the new still empty document you will notice several typical elements which are discussed in the following Rows and Columns On a spreadsheet rows are numbered from 1 to 32000 and the columns are desig nated with the letters A through Z AA through AZ and so on the last column is labeled with the letters IV Each cell on the sheet can be uniquely referenced by row and column For example cell A1 is the first cell in the upper left corner of the sheet These numbers and letters appear along the edge of the window The row header contains the row numbers and the column header names the columns If you click on one of these areas the entire row or column will be selected To select the entire sheet click on the unlabeled button at the intersection of the row and column headers at the top left Enter some text in cell A1 As you type you will see that the text appears both in the cell and in the input line of the formula bar You will also notice that you can enter more text than appears to fit in the cell In fact any cell can accommodate text longer than the cell The whole length of the text is displayed and printed provided the adjacent cells to the right are vacant If the cell to the right is not vacan
352. on mode when a creation tool is active Deselects any object that is selected Returns an object in text entry mode to its previous mode The object remains selected Chapter 8 Appendix 437 Shortcut Keys for Drawings This section contains a list of the shortcut keys that are specifically used in drawing documents Moreover the general shortcut keys in StarOffice also apply Function Keys for Drawings Shortcut Keys Effect F2 Edit text F3 Enter group Ctrl F3 Exit group Shift F3 Duplicate Dialog F4 Position and size dialog F5 The Navigator F7 Spelling check Ctrl F7 Thesaurus F8 Edit points on off Ctrl Shift F8 Fit to frame F11 Stylist Shortcut Keys for Drawings Shortcut Keys Effect Key Zooms in Key Zooms out x Key number pad Zoom on whole page Key number pad Zoom in the current selection Ctrl Shift G Group Shift Ctrl Alt A Ungroup Ctrl Shift K Combination Ctrl Alt Shift K Split remove combination Ctrl Shift Bring to front Ctrl Bring forward Ctrl Send backward Ctrl Shift Send to back 438 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings Shortcut Keys Effect Arrow Key Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow Ctrl Arrow Key Moves the slide view in the chosen direction Shift drag with mouse The selected object is moved exactly horizontall
353. one after the other or by holding down the Ctrl key if they are spaced apart When selecting a single word you only need to position the cursor in the word to select it does not need to be highlighted 2 Enter the selected words in an index by choosing Insert Indexes Entries If you want a different term to appear in the index you enter it in the Entry field For example you could enter dictionary defining whereas only the word dictionary appears in the text You can define all similar words in your text as entries by choosing Insert Indexes and Tables Entry and marking Apply to all similar texts If you want to include the words in a separate index with a name of your choice in the Insert Index Entry dialog click on the New User defined Index icon This opens a dialog in which you can enter a name for the index This name later appears as the title of the index You can change the title of an index without the content of the index changing 118 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries The defined index entries are shaded gray in the document so you can recognize them more easily However the shading will not be printed If you prefer not to display the shaded entries on screen either you can switch the highlighting on or off with View Field Shadings Insert Index Entry Selection Insert Index Clase Entry Ist key Help znd key i Main entry
354. ool the Select arrow This allows you to click on the chart In a StarOffice Calc chart you can move a data series forwards or backwards You can arrange the series in such a way that the lowest 3D representations are as far forward as possible and the higher ones further back To change the arrangement in the chart use a command in the context menu of a data series or choose Format Order The output data in the StarOffice Calc spreadsheet will not be rearranged Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 231 When you insert a chart in a presentation or drawing document with the Insert Insert Chart floating toolbar it is displayed with a set of sample data If you want to insert a chart in a spreadsheet you have to select the cells in the spreadsheet whose values should be displayed in the chart In StarOffice Writer documents too you can insert a chart obtained from the data of a StarOffice Writer table If you have not selected any data in a StarOffice Writer table choosing Insert Object Chart also inserts a chart containing sample data in StarOffice Writer You can change the values in a chart containing sample data by double clicking on the chart and then choosing Edit Chart Data If you want to change the values of a chart obtained from selected data you have to alter the values in the cells of the table If the chart is in a text document press F9 to update the chart Modification of chart data is also pos
355. or palette you first have to define a new color and assign a name to it J Modifications to the standard color palette are permanent They will be saved 3 automatically and are irreversible This will not present problems if you only want to add one new color to the palette but it can create difficulties if you change the standard colors 1 To define a new color the best thing to do is choose a color from the color palette which resembles the new color It will be displayed in the upper of the two preview boxes 2 Select the color model in the list box according to how you want to define the new colors The list box recognizes the two settings RGB and CMYK The color models RGB and CMYK are just two of the models most used to define colors RGB stands for red green blue It describes very well the corre sponding colors if the colors are combined on the computer monitor form the three basic colors CMYK stands for Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK or Cyan Magenta Yellow Key It is the color model that best describes the subtractive color creation in print colors Select the color model that corresponds to the desired output medium monitor or a printer If you are exposing image files it is best to ask the photo exposure service in which color model and format the image is expected 3 Define the colors by modifying the values in the spin boxes Enter values directly or click the buttons to change the existing values The result is shown imme
356. or transferring data You can load the desired database file in dBase or text format directly via the File Open dialog in which case you import the whole database table into a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet document 242 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Opening a Database File in StarOffice Calc You can import any file in dBase or text format to a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet Open it as you would open any StarOffice file 1 Choose File Open 2 In the dialog go to the folder where the database file is located Enter the name of the file or go to the File type list box select e g dBase and click the name Click Open If you want to open a text document select the file type Text CSV 3 When making a dBase import you will see a dialog where you can choose the character set of the file For example in some languages databases created under DOS use different characters than those used in databases created under Windows The dBase IV format uses Codepage 437 US Import DBasze files Character set Cyrillic 005 052 566 Russian Western Europe CSpple Macintosh eel Western Europe 005 052 4570 Help bd MWestern Europe 005 052 550 International Western Europe 005 052 560 Portuquese Western Furane OOS 4059861 fleelardic4y 4 After you confirm this dialog with OK the database file is loaded in the StarOffice Calc spreadsheet document J JPREVFIRSTNPLASTNOTITLE C 254 COMPANY C 2
357. ore you can see a newly created template In this case choose File Templates Organize and in the submenu of the Commands button choose Update To modify the template yourself you can call this file via File Templates Edit and then edit it Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 411 Changing the Color of Text Click the Font Color icon in Writer and other modules and keep the mouse button pressed to obtain a floating toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors 4 Font Color Writer fm Font Color other modules The following only applies to StarOffice Writer If you confirm the symbol with a short click while no text is selected then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a watering can Use this watering can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area This text area takes the selected color The function remains active for as long as the symbol is pressed or until you just click without dragging or until you press the Esc key The following applies to all modules Writer Calc Draw Impress Select the text that is to take another color then click the color you want on the floating toolbar 412 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 t Protected Contents in StarOffice Following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in StarOffice from being modified deleted or viewed Protecting All Documents When Saving All d
358. ors icon in the Main toolbar and a floating window with the available types appears Connectors Ha ta py ty lo ie Me Ma ta Ty fy Sa Me Me Bo a Fy My Mo Ny Me Don tn Oey Hy My Bey Me Po a en You can link frames and connectors either from edge to edge or from middle to middle or a combination of both These possibilities are described below 318 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Edge to Edge Connectors Select the desired connector by clicking it and then drag it to the first frame A small symbol is displayed on every edge of the frame Put the mouse pointer on one of the symbols the symbol will be given a dashed line border Press the mouse button and drag the connector to the desired frame As soon as the mouse touches the frame symbols appear on each edge here as well Continue dragging the connector to the desired symbol that symbol also receives a small black border and release the mouse button If you move a frame that is connected to another frame you will notice that the connector also changes position The actual connection line between the two frames remains the same so that for minor shifting of the frames the connector usually does not have to be edited With major frame movements however it is often necessary to reedit because the connector may shift to a different position To change the position of a connector simply click on it Small points appear at both the beginning
359. ose Tools Outline Numbering to number the chapter headings that you have formatted for example with the Paragraph Style Heading 1 Select the Heading 1 Style from the Paragraph Style list box and the option 1 2 3 from the Number list box below it 2 Select the first illustration you want to number 3 Choose Insert Caption 4 In the dialog that appears select Illustration as the category and Arabic 1 2 3 as the numbering You also can enter your caption text in this dialog 5 Click Options Specify the chapter numbering in the Number Range Options dialog For this example select option 1 under Level and specify the separator you want for chapter wise numbering Click OK Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 153 6 In the Caption dialog click OK Your illustrations are now numbered by chap ters Do the same for all other illustrations in your document The numbering occurs automatically All illustrations within one chapter level are numbered and you can enter at which chapter level you want the numbering to switch in the Number Range Options dialog Choose Tools Options Text Document General and under Caption mark the Automatic check box When you click the button next to Object selection the Caption dialog appears This is where you can for example determine that from now on all illustrations in text documents receive a caption automatically 154 StarOffice 6 0 User s Gui
360. osition the details in the motor drawing It is a good idea to use the layer function if you want to try out several different variations You can visualize layers as transparent sheets one on top of the other which together form a complete picture It is also possible to view individual transpar encies i e layers TE To get a better overview turn on the Layer view by pressing the symbol on the bottom left border of the work area Alternatively you can also choose View Layer a check mark will appear in front of the command To insert a new layer open the dialog Insert Layer It can also be opened through the context menu of the tabs Layout Controls and Dimension Lines arranged at Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 371 the bottom of the screen Enter a unique name e g Sketch1 Repeat this proce dure for another level and enter the name as Sketch2 Now click the Suggestion1 tab and place the details of this level e g by dragging the desired clipart from the Gallery into your document After you have positioned the details on Layerl click the Sketch2 tab and arrange elements there as well You will notice that you can see the elements from Sketch1 To change this click the Sketch1 tab and call up the context menu and select Modify Layer In the Modify Layer dialog remove the check from the Visible check box and click OK to view only the Layout level and the Sketch2 level As a rule all layers will be
361. overview 387 drag and drop data source view 392 dragging and dropping overview 387 drawing a circle etc 331 drawing objects labeling 152 drawings 323 drawing view 328 layer view 328 master view 328 page preview 328 saving automatically 35 sending as e mail 38 shortcut keys for 438 zoom functionin 438 draw objects copying 391 duplicating objects 343 E editing chart axes 235 chart legends 234 chart titles 234 index format 124 Styles 85 tab stops 408 toolbars 404 Edit Points 336 effects 300 effects FontWork 113 text animation 110 Ellipse 331 ellipses and arcs 332 ellipse segments drawing 331 e mail sending documents 38 encryption contents 413 endnotes remarks 164 spacing 167 Entering comments on changes 399 entries defining in index 118 defining in table of contents 118 editing format 124 Envelopes 193 error bars charts 233 error indicators charts 233 error messages defining for incorrect input 258 Euro conversion example 205 euro symbol replacing 50 exceptions AutoCorrect 106 export bitmaps 351 tables in text format 379 XML 36 exporting tables as text 265 Extended Tips 23 extrusion objects creating 341 eyedroppers replacing colors 355 F faxes configuring 405 sending 405 fields fixed and variable 175 file formats changing defaults 37 XML 36 files saving automatically 35 sending as e mail 38 fill format colors 68 412 Index 447 fill format mode 85 copying for
362. ow first of all switch the table to the insert mode for tables by pressing Alt Ins This lasts for three seconds During these three seconds press the relevant arrow key to insert a new row or column to the right or left above or below the current row or column If you hold down the Ctrl key as well as the arrow key the adjacent cell will be split To delete a column or row first of all switch the table to the delete mode for tables by pressing Alt Del This lasts for three seconds During these three seconds press the relevant cursor key to delete a row or column to the right or left above or below the current row or column If you hold down the Ctrl key as well as the arrow key the current cell will be merged with the adjacent cell into one cell Repeating Several Heading Rows in Tables Within a table if you want to automatically repeat more than one row following a page break this is how to do it 1 Select the first table row 2 Open the context menu and choose Cell Split 3 In the Split Cells dialog select the horizontal direction Enter the number of rows that are to be repeated and confirm your choice with Ok All rows at the beginning of the table created in this way will now be repeated after a page break 148 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Enlarging and Reducing Cells in Text Tables You can change the width and height of rows and columns using the keyboard by dragging and dropping wit
363. ox switches between flat and 3D view The Large buttons check box switches between large and small icons Changing the Look of the User Interface If you prefer a different operating system to the one currently used with StarOffice you can at least change the windows and dialogs to suit your taste Choose Tools Options StarOffice View In the Look amp Feel combo box you can choose an appearance reminiscent of Macintosh XWindows or OS 2 The Standard setting has the familiar look of a Microsoft Windows application Selecting Measurement Units You can select separate measurement units for StarOffice Writer StarOffice Writer Web StarOffice Calc StarOffice Impress and StarOffice Draw documents 1 Choose Tools Options 2 Click on the document type for which you want to select the measurement unit Click on Text Document if you want to select the measurement unit for StarOffice Writer 3 Click on General 4 On the General tab page under Settings is a combo box for selecting the meas urement unit Close the dialog with OK Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 407 Moving Deleting or Copying Icons To move an icon keep the Alt key pressed and drag the icon to its new posi tion It will be moved within the same toolbar and copied between toolbars To delete an icon from a toolbar keep the Alt key pressed and drag the icon to a place where there is no toolbar To insert or delete a das
364. phs by clicking the Style once 2 gt At the top of the Stylist click on the Fill Format Mode icon The mouse pointer changes to a symbol indicating this mode as soon as you move back into the document 3 Click once on every paragraph in the text you want to apply the selected Style to 4 Finally to switch off this mode click the Fill Format Mode icon again or press the Escape key Easy Way to Change a Style After having formatted all headings with the new Head1 Style you may decide that it would look better if the headings were spaced with slightly wider gaps between the letters Select the longest heading and increase the defined spacing until it fits onto one line without a break Now you want all other headings to be spaced in exactly the same way In this case simply modify one of the paragraphs formatted with the Head1 Style and then add the changes to the Style in the Stylist making it valid for all paragraphs of this type Here are the steps 1 In the text select the longest heading formatted with the Head1 Style Click three times in the heading to select the entire line Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 85 2 Make the desired changes To lock the character spacing as in this example choose Format Character or choose Character from the context menu for the selected line In the Character dialog click the Position tab and in the Spacing list box select Expanded In the spin button
365. pie la distribution et la d compilation Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut tre reproduite sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il y ena Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fournisseurs de Sun Ce produit repose en partie sur le travail de l Independent JPEG Group de The FreeType Project et de Catharon Typography Project Portions Copyright 2000 SuSE Inc Word for Word Copyright 1996 Inso Corp Systeme de correction orthographique International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Le code source de certaines parties de ce produit est disponible sous licence publique Mozilla sur les sites suivants http www mozilla org http www jclark com et http www gingerall com Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Java Solaris StarOffice le logo Butterfly le logo Solaris et le logo StarOffice sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques d pos es de Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays UNIX est une marque d pos e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et licenci e exclusivement par X Open Company Ltd Les Screen Beans et les objets graphiques pr dessin s Screen Beans sont des marques d pos es de A Bit Better Corporation In
366. plate contains a large number of Styles all of which can be viewed in the Stylist For each document type text table drawing presentation etc a single template file is defined as the default template file this is always used when for example you create a new usually empty document with File New Nearly every document type has its own template Lists of the different templates for text documents can be found in the StarOffice Help about text documents The same applies to templates for presentations and spreadsheets Choose Format Styles Catalog to open a dialog offering different Styles depending on the nature of the current document For example if you opened a text document and call this command the dialog will look like this Paragraph Styles maanz 42 E Complimentary clase First line indent Hanging indent Heading Here as in the Stylist you can select the type of Styles from a list box modify the Styles belonging to this type delete Styles you have created yourself and create new Styles However you can also click Organizer Then you will see a dialog with contents similar to the following illustration 96 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Template Management 7 Default CG Business Correspondence i C Education Untitled2 Commands C Finances C Forms and Contracts Help CG Miscellaneous CG Other Business documents C Personal Correspondence And D 3 Presentation Backgrounds
367. presented graphically in a chart You can select from a wide variety of charts and diagrams suited for illustrating the structure of the data 1 Open an existing spreadsheet or enter data in a new sheet with row and column headings 2 Select the data together with the headings 3 Long click the Insert Object icon found in the Main toolbar to display the floating toolbar Then click the Insert Chart icon and the cursor will change to a cross hair symbol with a small chart symbol 4 Inthe spreadsheet document open a selection rectangle defining the location and size of the chart Both can be modified subsequently 5 As soon as you release the mouse button a dialog appears in which you can make further entries You can also simply click the Create button to create a chart with the default settings tr i re Se ee a SS Ss EE Annual Movie Visits per Resident under 35 per Resident 29 West Coast Cities Age Baltimore MD Boston MA Charleston SC Miami FL New York NY Norfolk VA Philadelphia PN Providence RI Raleigh NC Richmond YA Savannah VA Portland OR Sacramento CA Salem OR San Diego C Los Angeles C San Francisco CA 7 5 Seattle WA 5 0 Average S45 90 59 19 fan l 4 5 52 Pl ww o M j 2 1 4 1 a 6 1 mn E 3 4 Baltimore MD Boston MA Charleston SC Miami FL New York NY Norfolk VA Philadelphia PN _ Providence RI R
368. protection Place the cursor in the index First of all if necessary under Tools Options Text Document Formatting Aids mark Cursor in protected areas Enable From the context menu choose Edit Index Table On the Index Table tab page unmark Protected against manual changes In the Navigator select the index then open the context menu and select Index Read only Protecting frames graphics and OLE objects Many objects can be inserted in StarOffice documents You can protect the content position and or size of inserted graphics The same applies to frames in Writer and OLE objects Turning on protection For example for graphics inserted in Writer Choose Format Graphics Options tab Under Protect mark Contents Position and or Size Turning off protection For example for graphics inserted in Writer Choose Format Graphics Options tab Under Protect unmark as appropriate 416 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects The draw objects that you insert in your documents with the Draw Functions floating toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Functions floating toolbar Turning on protection Choose Format Position and Size Position or Size tab Mark the Protect check box Turning off protection Choose Format Position and Size Position or Size tab Unmark th
369. quare the note indicator in the cell The note is visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell provided you have activated Help Tips or Extended Tips When you select the cell you can choose Show Note from the context menu of the cell Doing so keeps the note visible until you deactivate the Show Note command from the same context menu To edit a permanently visible note just click in it If you delete the entire text of the note then the note itself is deleted Another way to delete a note is by choosing Edit Delete Contents or calling the same dialog with the Delete key To show or hide the note indicator choose Tools Options Spreadsheet View and mark or unmark the Note indicator check box 212 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Handling Multiple Sheets When working with a spreadsheet you are not limited to just one sheet In fact you can use several sheets laid on top of each other Each sheet has its own name displayed on a sheet tab at the bottom of the window You can append additional sheets to your document or insert them in front of the current sheet Activate the context menu of a sheet tab and choose the corresponding command Select Rename in the context menu to modify the name of a sheet Showing Multiple Sheets W HH Using the navigation buttons connect up the display of the sheet tabs for all sheets Click the button on the far right of this group and the display of t
370. r in a selected range Positions the cursor in the next cell when in a range The direction the cursor moves can be defined under Tools Options Spreadsheet General Ctrl Left Arrow Goes to the column at the left of the current range or goes to the previous range If a range does not exist then goes to the first column A Ctrl Right Arrow Goes to the column at the right of the range currently selected or goes to the next range If a range does not exist then goes to the last column IV Ctrl Up Arrow Goes to the uppermost row of the range currently selected or goes to the previous range If a range does not exist then goes to the first row 1 Ctrl Down Arrow Goes to the last row of the current range or goes to the next range If a range does not exist it goes to the last row 32000 Ctrl Page Up Goes to previous spreadsheet In the page preview Jumps to previous print page Ctrl Page Down Goes to next spreadsheet In the page preview Jumps to next print page Alt Page Up Scrolls one screen page to the left Alt Page Down Scrolls one screen page to the right Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 225 Using References in Formulas So far you have been introduced to formulas containing absolute values absolute and relative references and references to named ranges Occasionally we have also mentioned the AutoPilot Functions Here is an examp
371. r all text documents open a text document and then do the same for the other document types 2 Open the context menu of the toolbar and select the Edit command 3 At the bottom of the dialog select the desired function category and the func tion 4 Ifno suitable icon is displayed for this function click Icon and select an appropriate icon Confirm with OK 5 Now drag the selected icon out of the dialog while keeping the mouse button pressed and drop it on the toolbar Release the mouse in the place where you want the new icon to be Close the dialog 6 If you wish to move this icon to a new position drag it to the new position while keeping the Alt key pressed only in Windows 7 If you wish to remove an icon from a toolbar drag it out of the toolbar while keeping the Alt key pressed only in Windows If the toolbar has to be docked with another border proceed as follows 1 Hold the Ctrl key down and double click a gray area of the toolbar You come to a free window 2 Drag the toolbar to its new position If you release the mouse key while holding down the Ctrl key and if the toolbar is also over a window border the toolbar will dock with the window border 404 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Sending Faxes and Configuring StarOffice for Faxing To send a fax directly from StarOffice you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem as they woul
372. r contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels badges business cards etc You can add other user defined formats 3 On the Labels tab under Inscription you can choose what you want written on the labels This often involves database fields so that the labels can be printed with varying content when sending Form Letters for example But it is equally possible to have the same text printed on every label Use the combo boxes to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained Click on the big arrow to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area Press Enter to insert a line break You can also enter spaces and any other fixed text On the Format tab you can define your own label formats not covered by the predefined formats To be able to do this the label type on the Labels tab must be set to User defined On the Options tab you can specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created 4 On the Options tab page make sure that the Synchronize contents check box is marked If this is marked an identically repeated label only has to be entered on the top left label and edited once 5 As soon as you click on New Document you will see a small window with the Synchronize Labels button Enter the first label When you click on the 178 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 6 Synchronize Labels button the current individual label is copied to all th
373. r gradient 2 C In StarOffice Draw open the Effects floating toolbar from the Main toolbar 3 i On the Effects floating toolbar click the Gradient icon You will now see two objects in color which are linked by a vector Depending on the type of gradient you can move one or both of the objects with the mouse and thus determine the origin end and angle of the color gradient When the color bar is displayed you can move colors by drag and drop to each object to determine the start and end colors In a similar way the transparency of an object can be determined with the Transparency icon Here you can define a grayscale gradient which spans from black 0 transparency i e opaque to white 100 transparent Organizing the Attribute Tables The icons Load Gradients List and Save Gradients List open dialogs for opening and saving gradients The current gradient list for instance might consist of all gradients which you have defined for a certain project Save the list then reload the standard list This way you can keep the list and the memory space free from resources you do not need If you later want to continue working on this project reload the gradient list The same procedure applies for loading and saving lists of hatching and bitmaps Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 359 3D Globe Here you can create a three dimensional globe with StarOffice in just a few steps You can rotate the finished Globe with
374. ragraph remains indented but loses its number The fourth character now has the number 3 This method also produces the desired result after saving in HTML format Formatting the paragraph 1 Select all paragraphs 1 to 4 and click on the Numbering on off icon 2 Place the cursor in the third paragraph 3 Click again on the Numbering on off icon The third paragraph loses its number and its indentation In HTML format the interruption creates two separately numbered lists Continuing numbering with a new starting value 1 Number paragraphs 1 and 2 with the Numbering on off icon 2 Place the cursor in the fourth paragraph 3 Choose Format Numbering Bullets and go to the Options tab 4 Inthe Numbering combo box select 1 2 3 In the Start at spin box select the starting value in this case 3 Click OK 136 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Numbering Lines Select line numbering properties under Tools Line Numbering Use line numbering to number the lines within your document You can decide for the whole of the document whether blank lines should be counted as well and whether lines in text frames should likewise be counted You can decide the inter vals at which lines are numbered and insert separators between these intervals to identify a particular line number The line numbering appears on your screen and is printed You can apply other line numbering properties to the paragraph Format Para gr
375. ranges 241 subtracting polygons 347 superscript text 72 switching object bars 408 switching between objects in text 115 synchronize contents 178 synchronizing labels 178 synonyms thesaurus 172 system address books registering 375 T table number format 215 table cells enlarging intext 149 table designs datasources 380 table headers repeating after page breaks 148 table headings repeating after page breaks 148 table mode selecting 150 table of contents creating 189 deleting 124 editing 124 hyperlink asentry 124 updating 124 tables adapting the width of 150 AutoFormat 216 borders of 69 combining 250 creating database tables 380 database ranges 236 deleting 140 dividing cellsin 150 exporting as text 265 formatting in text documents 141 importing as text 265 inserting in text documents 141 inserting text tables 138 in text from keyboard 149 jumping tonext 115 labeling 152 merging cells 147 multiple operations in 254 partially inserting 394 sending as e mail 38 start of page 140 tables in text calculating 147 tables of contents creating 120 defining entriesin 118 editing 124 editing or deleting entries 119 updating 120 tabs before headings 429 tab stops inserting in numbering 135 setting with the mouse 408 template documents 410 templates changing default templates 410 creating document templates 84 Index 459 creating from selections 97 customized 52 default templates 95 definition
376. rce 5 Click Apply Click the Tables tab Put a check mark next to the names of the table s you want to see in the data source view Click OK 6 Open the data source browser F4 7 Click on the plus sign next to Tables to view the existing tables in the data base In a dBase database each dbf file in the directory is a table of its own 8 Click the name of the table The records are displayed in the data source browser Mi EP p a Hes v i Kv Bly a be i Adressen ME FIRSTNAME LASTNAME TITLE COMPANY DEPARTMENT ADDRESS STATEPROV POSTALCODE COUNT amp Bibliography Patricia PTH TV 2345 Ist St Washing DC 20001 3456 Datenquelle 1 Alan Houseware Inc Controlling 123 Main Stre Kissimme FL 34742 2354 fly Verkniipfungen Julie ICM Abfragen Peter i Motor Works L Sales 1234 Amsterc New Yor NY 10025 1234 E Tabellen 4 gt b You can select the records and insert them into your spreadsheet 1 To manually select a record that you want to transfer into the spreadsheet click the row header of the record the gray field without text at top left You can click the first and last record row headers of a continuous range of records while pressing the Shift key or you can hold down the Ctrl key and click the desired records individually 2 Drag the selected records to the row headers in the sheet where the records are to be inserted Then release the mouse button 244 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide
377. re distributed so that their borders or midpoints are the same distance apart The two objects that are the horizontally or vertically farthest apart from each other are fixed points i e immovable The other objects between the outermost objects can be moved using this function Remember that everywhere in StarOffice a multi level undo function is available Activate this function by clicking the Undo icon on the function bar or by pressing Ctrl Z Each time you use this command it reverses a previous action Drawing Sectors and Segments The Ellipse floating toolbar contains several icons for drawing sectors and segments Sectors look like perfectly cut pieces of pie Segments look like halves of a pie Drawing sectors of an ellipse or circle requires multiple steps though the process functions intuitively 1 G Open the Ellipse floating toolbar and click on the Circle Pie icon The pointer changes to a cross hair symbol accompanied by a small sector symbol 2 Use the mouse to drag open the shape of a circle The outline of a circle follows the movement of the mouse Your first click defines the first corner of the delimiting rectangle which surrounds the circle The delimiting rectangle will later be obvious via the eight handles seen when you select the circle To draw the circle such that the first click defines the center press the Alt key while dragging the mouse 3 Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the de
378. rged elements below it Filtering DataPilot Tables Although the DataPilot tables have usually been created according to the user s requirements there may be occasions when not all of the data provided by the tables is of interest If this should be the case filters are used whereby conditions are applied to the data and if they are not met the excess data will be removed from the tables Click the Filter button in the sheet to call up the entry mask for the filter condi tions The Filter dialog will appear This dialog provides different criteria which can be used for selecting data Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 249 Updating DataPilot Tables If the data of the basis table has been changed StarOffice will have to recalculate the tables to bring the analysis up to date To recalculate the tables click with the right mouse button on one of the button fields and choose the Refresh entry or choose Data DataPilot Refresh Deleting DataPilot Tables In order to delete a DataPilot table select any cell in the analysis table then choose Data DataPilot Delete Consolidating Data During consolidation the contents of the cells from several sheets will be combined in one place Choose a function so that you can for example see the sum the standard deviation or the variance of the data 1 Go to the document that contains the areas to be consolidated 2 Choose Data Consolidate to open the Consolid
379. rmat 208 Calculating With Formulas 210 Calculating With Dates and Times 210 Inserting and Editing Notes 212 Handling Multiple Sheets 213 Showing Multiple Sheets 213 Working With Multiple Sheets 213 Printing Spreadsheets 214 Formatting a Spreadsheet 215 Formating Numbers 215 Formatting Cells and Sheets 216 Using AutoFormat for Tables 216 Layout of Spreadsheets 218 Designing Spreadsheets Clearly 218 Addressing Cells 220 Addresses and References Absolute and Relative 220 Addressing by Name 222 Recognizing Names as Addressing 223 Only Copy Visible Cells 224 Contents 11 Cursor Positioning via the Keyboard 225 Using References in Formulas 226 References to Other Sheets 228 Using Charts 230 Editing Chart Titles 234 Editing Chart Legends 234 Adding Texture to Chart Bars 235 Editing Chart Axes 235 Database Functions in StarOffice Calc 236 Defining Database Ranges 236 Sorting Database Ranges 239 Filtering Database Ranges 240 Grouping Database Ranges and Calculating Subtotals 241 Transferring Data From a Data Source toa Spreadsheet 242 Evaluating Data With StarOffice Calc 246 DataPilot 246 Consolidating Data 250 Applying Goal Seek 252 Applying Multiple Operations 254 Using Scenarios 257 Validity of Cell Contents 258 Printing or Exporting Spreadsheets 261 Printing Sheet Details 261 Defining Number of Pages for Printing 262 Printing Sheets in Landscape Format 262 Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page 263 Saving and Opening
380. rmula for example 4 6 100 4 Press Enter or click on Apply to insert the result Use the Formula icon to perform more complex calculations Clicking on this icon opens a branched submenu from which you can select a formula The formulas are placed on the formula bar at the cursor position and you are free to switch between inputting formulas and values from the keyboard and via the Formula icon As an example of a more complex calculation to be performed in a text suppose we want to calculate the mean value of three figures 1 Display the Formula bar with F2 2 Open the submenu of the Formula icon 3 Choose Median from the statistical functions The input field will display median 4 Enter the first number and then a vertical slash as the list separator 5 Enter the second number another separator and then the third number The input field may now show for example median 12 22 34 6 Press Enter and the result appears in the text It is inserted as a field Double click on the field to edit it Calculating With Formulas Located in Text If you already have a formula in your text you can enter the result into your text without using the Formula bar 1 In the text select the calculation formula which must not contain anything other than figures arithmetic operators and any currency symbols Example 12 24 2 144 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 2 Press Ctrl plus sign or choo
381. rs In this section learn how to create a newsletter newspaper as a text document This is useful for creating newsletters for your company or club or in celebration of a special event Header Albany z 33 E zo U amp g template used This does not mean that you look the spacing between the col I G P cannot change the format To umns should be between 0 4 cm and 0 7 cm The default settings on To use this template to create your this document are 0 5 cm AD own newsletter brochure or com ase memorative publication you first oe er ee eer I need to delete the entire contents a cone a z i e all text and graphics The page inks formatting will not be affected ae You can use it to structure your Once you have made any desired own newsletter A three column changes or if you are happy with g layout has been selected for this the defaut settings you can get iE template as this creates an opti adjust it to your requirements you started It would not hurt to make amp cally pleasing effect on standard need to alter the Page Styles for rough sketch of it on paper first in Li letter size paper which is not the the first page left page right the corresponding format so that gx case if two or four columns are page standard For a professional you can see if the format you have chosen is good Draw a template 4E A A OG How do I use this hr A different text within t
382. rs of the sheet You will see a brief explanation there of the functionality available from the headers But now on to your portfolio As we have already explained the Current Price column the entries in this column are in different colors is the column in which Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 269 you should change the figures All other columns are calculated automatically or are filled in through the input screen Today you received a new stock price for Airtrans Inc from the Internet Because of a very positive fiscal year that has just ended a dividend to be distributed today has been fixed at 1 15 per share This news has caused the stock price to shoot up to 37 60 To apply the current stock price click the cell containing the current price of Airtrans Inc and enter the new value Confirm the entry After you have confirmed the entry all figures associated with this value will be updated Thus you have an immediate overview of all information at your finger tips Internet Update The Internet Update makes it even easier to apply the current values In our ficti tious example this is not possible Please try it with shares for a real company Click the Internet Update button to update the values in your portfolio To check if the values are indeed the most current position your mouse pointer on the Current Price field The Help Tips must be active You will see the date and time of the last
383. rsor is placed in the footer choose Insert Field Page Numbers The page number will appear in a gray field To have Page precede the page number place the cursor in front of the field and enter Page Click the Center icon on the object bar to center the current paragraph Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 91 Page Breaks as Paragraph Formats In the first paragraph of the main text direct paragraph formatting was automati cally applied determining that the text automatically begins on the new page 1 This will also apply if no text exists after the manual break on the new page To check this for the first paragraph after the manual break choose Paragraph from the context menu not Edit Paragraph Style since this is a direct formatting attribute for a paragraph Paragraph E als 2 Byes eps sie p piel zje 2 ht ahi else he e vegt o H MARIO ma Gy GSE EVE iy pets E E 2 E Unes 2 E UTES Be ee ee ee If you want a particular paragraph to be on a new page with a new Page Style then that would be a property of that particular paragraph Assign this property under Format Paragraph Text Flow LI 92 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Changing the Format of Page Numbers The page numbers can like other text attributes be specified as either direct or as a property of the Page Style The direct format however should only be used in a few instances When direct form
384. rst page is to be on letterhead paper The last step is to click Create After you click the Create button StarOffice creates a document template and places it in the template folder At the same time a new unnamed document appears on the screen that has been generated as a copy from this template You can start to enter text and then print and save the document However if you would like to keep on working on the layout of the document template or create an envelope for it close the new document without saving it and continue reading 192 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Creating an Envelope This section contains a description of how to create a template for an envelope after you have completed your letter template We will also be giving tips on how to continue polishing the design of your template s As the envelope should be saved together with its template you should first open the letter template 1 Choose File Templates Edit A dialog will appear in which you find the letter template you just created and open it The templates are found under staroffice6 0 user template 2 After opening the template go to the Insert menu and choose Envelope A dialog of the same name appears 3 On the tab pages Envelope and Format you should specify the envelope format and where you want the addresses of the sender and addressee to be positioned on the envelope On the Printer tab page you can define the appro priate
385. rt In the dialog that appears select the column to be sorted e g Amount as the sort criterion and click OK merme o Eta ey z were OO eo DESGen ong PSG You may specify up to two additional criteria one to follow the other for the sort function For instance you can sort the expenditures first by date then by item if they have the same date and then by amount if they have the same date and item Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 239 Filtering Database Ranges To filter out only certain records so that you can modify them use the spreadsheet filtering function You can choose between using a dialog to specify the criteria exactly in that case range definitions are also possible or creating an AutoFilter that will help whenever you want to filter according to specific values or text Imagine that the output list is already 8000 records long You can no longer get an overview Now you want to see only those records that occurred after 1 2 2000 and which apart from this involve an amount in excess of 100 currency units Set the cursor in the database range and choose Data Filter Standard Filter to open the dialog Enter the following Date gt 1 2 2000 AND Amount gt 100 In the dialog you can select the existing contents of the data fields in the combo boxes but you can also enter the amount 100 directly Standard Filter Filter criteria Operator Field name Condition Value
386. rt a frame with the Insert Frame icon on the Insert floating toolbar Text frames can have borders but do not have to Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 185 Editing Paragraph Styles If you want to change the font click the Paragraph Styles icon in the Stylist and select the Paragraph Style you want to modify Via the Modify command in the context menu call up the Paragraph Styles dialog In this dialog you will find several tabs with various settings and options P Experiment with different font effects for example drop caps Click the respec tive tab and select Show Drop Caps You can even assign a Style to the drop caps in the Character Styles list box under Contents P A newsletter or newspaper requires a variety of main headings subheadings and text wraps to make it easier to read In the Paragraph Styles dialog of the Stylist context menu it would thus be a good idea to create several appropriate Paragraph Styles go to the Stylist context menu click New Working with Frames A frame positioned over one or more columns can give the newspaper a less crowded more interesting appearance Such a frame can contain text graphics or even a chart Click the Insert icon on the main toolbar and from the floating toolbar select the Insert Frame Manually icon The mouse pointer changes to a small cross which you use to drag open a frame and position it over one or more columns in your document
387. rt and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart 2 Choose Format Axis Y axis if you want to edit the Y axis or double click on the Y axis This opens the Y axis dialog 3 Select for example the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis 4 Click OK In your document click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 235 Database Functions in StarOffice Calc Spreadsheets in StarOffice Calc are also able to manage records consisting of several fields as in a database Think of each row of the StarOffice Calc spread sheet as a record whose fields are arranged in the individual columns Then for example you can sort or group the StarOffice Calc database by rows look for key words and calculate totals P The database ranges in StarOffice Calc spreadsheets have nothing to do with the databases and spreadsheets that you address in Tools Data Sources and edit in the data source browser F4 In StarOffice Calc you work with a spreadsheet that can contain several sheets You can combine several adjacent rows of a spreadsheet into a database area for example to sort them together Furthermore you can import external files for example files in dBase format into a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet The records from the dBase file would then become rows and the data fields would become columns in a StarOffice Calc spreadsheet In the da
388. rtcut Keys Specific to Drawings 439 18 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide CHAPTER 1 StarOffice Documentation and Help There are different ways of obtaining information about working with StarOffice The StarOffice User s Guide This contains most of the answers to questions about working with StarOffice You can find an overview of the structure and content of the StarOffice User s Guide starting on page 19 StarOffice Help You can get detailed answers to all questions at any time by pressing F1 opening the Help menu or clicking the Help buttons You can find information on using the StarOffice Help starting on page 22 Through the Internet you can find further information support newsgroups and the latest news about StarOffice at www sun com Using this Guide This User s Guide is designed for users who are already familiar with the basic functions of their computer The User s Guide primarily describes the functions available in the Windows version of StarOffice There may be differences in certain functions on other oper ating system platforms If functions described here are not available on your plat form this is a system related limitation caused by the platform you are using 19 Structure of this Guide Chapter 1 StarOffice Documentation and Help Introduction to the User s Guide and to StarOffice Help Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice Overview of general topics of relevance to the whole of StarOffice
389. ry which StarOffice displays here as follows 1 Choose Tools Options StarOffice Paths 2 Double click the entry My Documents 3 In the Select Path dialog choose the work directory you want and click Select Close the following dialog with OK In a similar way you can change the directory displayed by StarOffice when you want to insert a graphic Change the path for the entry Graphics Saving Documents Automatically To save a backup every time you save a document 1 Choose Tools Options Load Save General 2 Mark Always create backup copy If you save the current document with File Save or Ctrl S under the path and file name from which you opened it the old version will be overwritten by the new version If the Always create backup copy check box is marked the old version is first copied to the backup directory The backup directory is staroffice6 0 user backup You can change it in the Tools Options StarOffice Paths dialog in the backup entry The copy has the same name as the document but the extension is BAK If the backup folder already contains such a file it will be overwritten without warning Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 35 To save automatically every n minutes 1 Choose Tools Options Load Save General 2 Mark AutoSave every and select the time interval in the spin button 3 Mark Prompt to save if you want to be asked prior to automatic saving whether or not you wa
390. s 2 Select Personal Letter and then click the button Next A second page with additional options appears Choose the option No Logo and click Next A dialog will appear in which you can enter the sender details 3 You should already be able to see the sender address Under Show sender select Yes Now click the symbol top right in the Position and size area and once again click Next p If the input field does not contain a sender the program will lack the necessary s details In this case click Cancel open the User Data tab in Tools Options StarOffice and enter the necessary data After that you can open the AutoPilot again and carry on as described up to this point You can also enter your sender details directly in the input field of the AutoPilot But if you did not enter these details in User Data you will need to repeat this process for every new template that you create with the AutoPilot 4 Click Next until you arrive at the page with the footer options Deactivate the check box Footer on and click Next twice Now on the page for saving the template type the name of the template in the Name field If necessary enter any additional information in the Info field P The template will be stored in the template folder under the name you have entered 5 Again click Next Enter the printer trays if you want to use different paper trays for the first and subsequent pages This is especially practical when the only the fi
391. s 1 Select cell A5 in our example then choose Insert Names Define The Define Names dialog appears 2 Enter the name C in the text field At the bottom of the dialog you will see the reference Sheet1 A 5 Double check for accuracy then click Add me vf 3 In the next field enter an i place the cursor in cell B5 and again click Add 4 Next enter an n in the empty field place the cursor in cell C5 and click once more on Add Close the dialog with OK 5 You can now enter the formula in E5 using the variables C n i instead of A5 B5 C5 Start Goal Seek Let us assume that the interest rate 7 5 and the number of years 1 will remain constant However you may want to know how much the investment would have to be modified in order to attain a particular annual return For this example calculate how much capital would be required if you want an annual return of 15 000 1 Place the cursor in cell E5 and choose Tools Goal Seek The Goal Seek dialog appears Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 253 2 The correct cell is already entered in the field Formula Cell 3 Place the cursor in the field Variable Cell In the sheet click in the cell A5 that contains the value to be changed 4 Enter the expected result of the formula i e the desired value under Target Value In this example the value is 15 000 Click OK 5 A dialog appears informing you that the Goal Seek was succ
392. s Along with the slide design you can also assign a whole set of Presentation Styles to your slides Open the Stylist to see a list of the pre defined Styles You can modify the Background existing Styles any modifications are valid only for those Background objects Motes slides in the current document that uses this slide design outiine 1 and you can create new Styles aes Outline 4 The Styles Outline 1 through Outline 9 enable you to give Outlines Outline 6 the outlined headings and topics on your slides a Outline 7 uniform look a Styles g 298 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 1 Open anew empty presentation with a slide layout that allows greater struc tural depth The slide layout called Title Text is suitable for this purpose Fi The slide layout you choose determines the number of levels of your outline If a you chose a slide layout which does not permit any outline you will notice that the outline functions are not available 2 Activate the outline view mode by clicking View Master View Outline View starting in the Menu bar or by pressing the F12 key Albany 32 F k U PREHEN a Introducing T t Background Background objects N a Long term Goitia Outline 2 State the intendegjtres Outline 4 Outline 5 Customer WIS fums Outline 9 fan Styles lad Zes d e F Z Z _ Z y a a er be R
393. s Thesaurus or press Ctrl F7 In the dialog which then appears you can scroll down the two lower list boxes until you find a suitable word If you close the dialog by clicking on OK the selected word will be replaced by the word in the Replace field 172 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 H The thesaurus is not available in all languages for which a spellcheck has been installed If you are looking for alternatives for a word in another language for which a thesaurus is installed for example an English word select the word in the text and call up the thesaurus Click on the Language button to switch to English UK or English US in order to select British or North American style Then click on Search Thesaurus English USA variations Word Replace nue C Cancel Meaning Synonym Search An act of drinking or the amount G a i Language To proceed in a dilatory fashion To exert force s0 as to move some To hang or cause to hang down ani gy fi Help Ta adanca rla uatt ft xl If you applied English language attributes to the English words in your text Format Character Font tab Language list box then the spellcheck thesaurus and hyphenation will automatically be in this language You can assign a language to Paragraph Styles in the same way Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 173 Form Letters Business Cards and Labels Write form letters des
394. s which contain the contents of the cells of a table Commas or semicolons for example are used as the field delimiters between the cells Texts are automatically put in quotation marks numbers are written directly Exporting Formulas and Values as CSV Files L 2 oe eh eE A Go to the table that is to be written as a csv file If you want to export the formulas as formulas e g in the form SUM A1 B5 proceed as follows Choose Tools Options Spreadsheet View Under Display mark the Formulas field Click OK If instead of the formulas you want to export the calculation results do not mark Formulas Choose File Save as You will see the Save as dialog In the File type field select the format Text CSV Enter a name and click Save From the Export Text dialog that appears select the records and the field and text delimiters for the data to be exported and confirm with OK Caution If the numbers contain commas as the decimal separator or thousands separator you should not select the comma as the field delimiter If the text contains double quotation marks you must select the single quotation mark as separator and vice versa If necessary after you have saved unmark Formulas to see the calculated results in the table again Importing a CSV File 1 2 Choose File Open You will see the Open dialog In the File type field select the format Text CSV Select the file and click Open When a file
395. s 379 database tables creating 380 DataPilot 246 applying 247 deleting tables 250 editing tables 249 filtering tables 249 preventing data overwriting 248 updating 250 data points editing 336 data sources importing into spreadsheets 242 opening in spreadsheets 243 registering address book 375 data source view draganddrop 392 data tables multiple operations in 254 Index 445 Date Row 277 dates fixed and variable 175 incells 211 dBase data inserting in spreadsheets 242 DDE links inserting tablesin 138 decimal tab stops inserting 408 default documents 410 default documents 410 default format numbers in tables 215 default formats changing 37 default printer 39 default tab stops default settings 410 text 408 default templates 95 changing 410 deleting captions 152 icons 408 tables 140 text 63 designing 3D fonts 367 designs database tables 380 dictionary thesaurus 172 dimension lines using 370 direct cursor 63 displayed cells copying 224 446 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 documents comparing 398 master documents 132 measurement units in 407 merging 398 opening 31 printing 304 saving 34 saving automatically 35 saving with configuration 406 sending as e mail 38 sub documents 132 versions 400 document templates changing default templates 410 creating 84 doubling objects 343 drafts printing 41 drag and drop copying text 395 Gallery 390 graphics 391 mouse pointers 387
396. s 79 documents 410 for letters 51 organizing 96 remarks 96 updating from selections 98 using 411 templates and documents 33 text adapting to frames 333 aligning with lines 113 114 animation 110 borders around 69 changing tonumber 208 coloring 68 412 concatenating in arithmetic formulas 206 converting into3D 334 converting to curves 339 copying by drag and drop 395 cursor 63 cutting 63 default templates 95 emphasizing 67 entering 61 entering new 61 finding 52 formatting 78 107 formatting automatically 100 form letters 174 frames around 69 headers 159 images 151 in cells 206 in frames 67 inserting 62 inserting chartsin 157 inserting graphics from Draw 155 inserting graphicsin 155 inserting in an image 350 460 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 inserting sections in 77 inserting special characters 66 line numbers 137 multicolumn 76 multiselection 53 navigating in 65 overwriting 62 performing calculations in 145 printing in black 41 rotating 68 333 saving automatically 35 scanning graphics 156 sections 76 selecting 65 78 selecting and deleting 63 sending as e mail 38 setting tab stopsin 408 slanting 113 114 subscript 72 superscript 72 tables 138 turning off automatic correction 100 uppercase or lowercase 73 without spellcheck 101 169 text animation 110 text columns 76 text documents 57 shortcut keysin 426 text effects FontWork 113 text flow from frame to frame 10
397. s field will also display an error message Calculating in Spreadsheets In the following we show you a simple example of the percentage calculation that you can perform in a spreadsheet 1 Position the cursor in cell A3 2 Enter the number 150 and press the Enter key The cursor then moves down to cell A4 3 Enter the number 16 in cell A4 This time however press the Tab key instead of the Enter key The cursor moves to the right to cell B4 Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 203 4 Enter the following in cell B4 A3 A4 100 If you start the input with an equals sign you are thereby indicating that you want to enter a formula You will see the formula in the input line of the formula bar Oo 5 Press Enter to finish the formula You will see the result of the calculation 16 percent of 150 in cell B4 6 Click on cell A3 enter 200 and press the Enter key Notice that the calculation result is adjusted automatically 7 Click on cell B4 and then click at the end of the formula in the input line of the Formula bar A blinking text cursor indicates that you can make a new entry 8 Add A3 without the quotation marks to the formula and press the Enter key The newly calculated value of the formula appears in cell B4 the previous 16 percent of A3 plus the contents of A3 You are now acquainted with the most important steps in working with spread sheets creating and entering formulas
398. s fixed while the right edge moves Now hold down the Alt key together with the Shift key and press the right arrow key The right edge remains fixed and the left edge moves to the right thus reducing the column You can adjust the height of the rows in the same way However since the rows are preset to a minimum height you must first enlarge them before you can see the result If you also press the Ctrl key during the process the enlargement or reduction applies only to the active cell instead of to the entire row or column The propor tions of the table remain fixed Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 149 Adapting Table Widths The display attributes of a table are defined by the settings under Tools Options Text Documents Tables You can also click the icons in the Table object bar to switch between the attributes Fixed Fixed Proportional and Variable Table Mode Fixed means for example that if you make one cell wider the adjacent cell will become narrower Other cells will not be affected and the overall width of the table stays the same Table Mode Fixed and Proportional means that all adjacent cells become proportionally narrower In other words wide cells will shrink more than narrow ones Again table width remains constant Table Mode Variable means that the width of the entire table is variable Whenever an individual cell is made wider the entire width of the table expands as we
399. s for the bulleted list in which your cursor is posi tioned with the Format Numbering Bullets dialog Numbering Bullets i Bullets Numbering type Outline Graphics Position Options election rawr w i t G G HF t M Unk graphics Remove Cancel Help Reset If you would like a different bullet symbol you can select one under Format Numbering Bullets Options by clicking on the button with three dots which opens the Special Characters dialog You can only see this button if you selected Bullet in the Numbering combo box Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 127 Turning Numbering On and Off This is how to turn numbering on and off 1 Select the paragraphs you want to number 2 Click on the Numbering on off icon on the Text Object Bar The para graphs are formatted as a numbered list pa In an existing numbered list if you click on the Numbering on off icon the paragraphs will turn back into normal text fa Like bulleted lists the best way to control numbered lists is with the icons on the Numbering Object Bar When you move a numbered list down a level the subor dinate numbered list at this level starts from one again Using the Show sublevels box you can select which previous levels should be included in the numbered list To access these options choose Format Numbering Bullets Opt
400. s for the least entered search term Ctrl Shift Toggles the view between Full screen mode normal mode Ctrl Shift R Re creates the document window Ctrl I The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area If the cursor is positioned in a word this word is also marked in italic Ctrl B The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area If the cursor is positioned in a word this word is also put in bold Ctrl U The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area If the cursor is positioned in a word this word is also under lined Ctrl Shift O Sets the cursor on the Load URL field on the Function bar Alt O In the Spelling dialog the word that was originally marked as unknown incorrect original will be transferred to the input row word Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys Shortcut keys Effect F1 Starts the StarOffice Help In the StarOffice Help jumps to summary page Shift F1 Context Help Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 Closes the current document close StarOffice when the last open document is closed F6 Sets focus in next subwindow e g document data source view Shift F6 Sets focus in previous subwindow Shift F10 Opens the context menu Shortcut Keys in Plug Ins The following shortcut keys can be used in Plug Ins used in StarOffice Shortcut keys Effect F4 Inserts a hyperlink F6 Inserts an OLE object Chapter 8 Appendix 425 Shortcut Keys for Text Docum
401. s of 500 from 500 to 5000 Mark the range D2 E11 and thus the values in column D and the empty cells alongside in column E Choose Data Multiple operations With the cursor in the Formulas field click cell B5 Set the cursor in the Column field and click cell B4 This means that B4 the quantity is the variable in the formula which is replaced by the marked column values Close the dialog with OK You will see the profit in column E Calculating with Several Formulas Simultaneously 1 a Oe Oy ae Delete column E Enter the following formula in C5 B5 B4 You are now calculating the annual profit per item sold Select the range D2 F11 thus three columns Choose Data Multiple Operations With the cursor in the Formulas field mark cells B5 thru C5 Set the cursor in the Columns field and click cell B4 Close the dialog with OK You will now see the profits in column E and the annual profit per item in column F Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 255 Multiple Operations Across Rows and Columns StarOffice allows you to carry out joint multiple operations for columns and rows in so called cross tables The formula cell has to refer to both the data range arranged in rows and the one arranged in columns Select the range defined by both data ranges and call the multiple operation dialog Enter the reference to the formula in the Formula field The Row field is used to enter the reference to the
402. s preset attributes including a blue fill and a thin black line as a border There are eight handles which you can drag to change the size of the object By clicking once on any tool you are making the tool available for only one single task Double click the icon to allow it to remain active until you choose another tool You can change the defaults e g blue as the filling color Make sure that no object is selected and choose a different color on the object bar as the new default 3 Draw further rectangles You can also overlay these with the existing rectangles Click the Ellipse icon and draw a few ellipses You can also draw a few 3D objects as shown in the illustration Several examples are installed e g in the 3D three dimension file 4 Click each of the objects and modify the fill color line color and the line width using the list boxes and icons on the object bar 328 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 PAL en la x Fie Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help E z7 Gen Sl s E 7 tol A Ez k l o occm Black 2 color sue v 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 v Olle side 1 fT a CEAk E ae PSC aot ag PSG E bo GO 7a ME iama J J eT ee et Rotating Objects When you click the object for the first time the eight handles with which you can change the size appear You can also drag the whole obje
403. s to create a presentation You can start with the AutoPilot Presentation You can use the templates and sample documents supplied which you modify as necessary You can also begin with an empty document StarOffice Impress provides you with lots of graphics features for creating your presentations all of which are found in StarOffice Draw too We suggest that you also read the chapter on StarOffice Draw starting on page 323 to find out about the complete capabilities of StarOffice Impress 285 The StarOffice Impress Window 2 Plain Purple StarOffice 6 0 Fie Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help wo lt q 0s E A Em 0 0 0 100 oa ae Aee 0 Di t sa 3 Presentation x Modify Slide Layout Slide Design ESEJ Duplicate Slide 6 OU Og Ne aS eee Expand side jelliddid 8 aH EMVS HVS Leen QA MWe Wl oT D s TA Pain Purple Presentation Styles fal ES Ala gt 72 iB Background Background objects Notes Outline 1 abd Tree ms fins Ta Effects Favorites Fha den a Styles rows E Ss JF TT e ea al sie 1 4 w X oe EENEN Cee ee CEEE TT EE 318 19 3 10 54 Sidet 1 Plain Bue o 286 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Toolbars and Windows in StarOffice Impress 4 Zoom floating toolbar 3 Alignment
404. screen where you move the pointer As soon as you click with the mouse or press a key it turns back into the normal mouse pointer Help Agent When you perform certain actions in StarOffice the Help Agent automatically appears This is a small window in a corner of the document The Help Agent normally remains visible for 30 seconds When you click it it is replaced by a help window providing some helpful advice about the current topic If you repeatedly ignore or close a Help Agent dealing with the same topic instead of clicking it it will not appear again for this topic Resetting the Help Agent restores it to the way it was when StarOffice was first installed Turning the Help Agent on and off Choose Help Help Agent if you want the Help Agent to appear If the command is marked the Help Agent is automatically displayed when you perform certain actions in StarOffice In Tools Options StarOffice General you can activate and reset the Help Agent and set its display duration 24 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 CHAPTER 2 Working With StarOffice This chapter starts with a general explanation of the most common control features in StarOffice such as toolbars floating toolbars and dockable windows This is followed by information on functions that can be used in all or nearly all program modules of StarOffice The User Interface StarOffice provides not only the usual control elements fou
405. se Tools Calculation The calculation result will be stored on the clipboard 3 Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert the result of the calcula tion and press Ctrl V or choose Edit Insert In the example 60 is inserted If the formula is still selected at the time of inser tion the result replaces the formula Performing Calculations With Tables in Text Documents You can carry out calculations in StarOffice Writer tables With calculations that go beyond the current table the table name serves as a clear table identifier To multiply the first cell of Tablel by the first cell of Table2 and return the result in cell A2 in the current table position the cursor in cell A2 in the current table press lt Tablel Al gt lt Table2 Al gt With the help of the Navigation Bar you can navigate quickly and easily between the table formulas in your document If a table formula refers to an invalid table cell a Faulty expression is displayed in the cell Invalid table cells are either deleted cells or those which are themselves faulty To add cells B1 B10 from Tablel and see the result in the single cell Table2 which should be somewhere in your text do the following 1 Create the text and Tablel Write the text where you want the result to appear 2 Now insert a frame Insert Frame menu command In the Frame dialog select the character to be used as an anchor and deselect the border 3 You can
406. set field delimiter and text delimiter Click OK A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved Table Design Here you will see how to create a new database table in the design view Open the data source browser F4 Open a data source by clicking the plus sign in front of the name You see the tables container called Tables Open the table container and click a table Right click the table name to open the context menu Choose New Table Design to create a new table In the Design view you can now create the fields for your table Enter new fields from top to bottom rowwise Click the cell at the far left and enter a field name for each data field Inthe adjacent cell to the right define the field type When you click in the cell you can select a field type in the drop down list box Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type It is not possible to enter text for example in a number field Memo fields in dBase II format are references to internally managed text files which can hold up to 64KB text 380 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 2 Table Design biblio File Edit Tools Window Help E i Ma 24 eler Fietd Name Field type fC escriptio o d Identifier Text VARCHAR Type Text VARCHAR Address Text VARCHAR Annote Text VARCHAR Author Text VARCHAR Booktitle Text VARCHAR Chapter Text VARCHAR J
407. sible if you for example have copied a chart from a StarOffice Calc document into a StarOffice Writer document and now double click the chart in the StarOffice Writer document Remember however you are only editing the copy and not the original document You can change the type of chart subsequently When you double click on the chart and choose Format Chart Type a dialog appears presenting you with various types to choose from 232 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Chart Type Chart category ah aA S ee n OK Cancel adi Help Columns Mormal Try out the different options in the Chart Type dialog You can also switch between 2D and 3D representation With the Columns chart type you can select a Combination Chart of lines and columns The three dimensional representations make special effects possible In 3D charts you can even adjust the illumination settings such as light source ambient light and the color filter 3D charts can be rotated and flipped with the mouse for optimal design By choosing Insert Statistics you can apply statistical indicators to XY charts such as standard deviations with regression curves and more besides A single or double logarithmic representation of the axes can also be set here Inline charts you can work with various icons These can be applied automati cally by StarOffice Chart if desired You can also select them yourself from graphic
408. sired size Now you ll notice that a radius which follows the movement of the mouse is drawn in the circle Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 331 4 Position the radius at the point where you want to place one boundary of the sector and click once 5 Now when you move the mouse you ll see that the first radius is set and a second radius follows the movement of the mouse As soon as you click again the circle pie is complete Drawing ellipse pies is done in a similar fashion The Elipses dimensions of the delimiting rectangle formed when l a a a you first drew the shape determines the dimensionsof OO GGOOCC the ellipse When drawing a segment proceed in exactly m the same manner as described above for sectors The only difference is that in the last step no second radius follows the movement of the mouse but rather a secant straight line cuts through the circle With the other icons in the Ellipse floating toolbar you can draw ellipses and arcs This process also functions as described above although only the perimeter of the ellipse or the circle is drawn Entering Text If you want to enter a text in your drawing you can decide if you want the text to have a normal format as in a text document or if the text should be handled as a graphic object that you can rotate expand minimize etc You can also have a normal text appear in the form of a legend in a frame with an arrow Open the
409. son who asked for the changes In a text document you can highlight all lines which you have changed with an additional marking This can be in the form of a red line in the margin for example You can select the type of additional selection under Tools Options Text Document on the Changes tab or under Tools Options Spreadsheet on the Changes tab Here you can determine how and in what color the changes should be flagged where on the page the dash should be and so forth Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 399 Protecting Records You can record the changes made in a document by choosing Edit Changes Record or Edit Changes Protect Records If you select Protect Records you must enter the correct password in order to turn off the function or accept or reject changes 1 Choose Protect Records This opens the Password dialog 2 Enter a password consisting of at least 5 characters and confirm it Click OK Version Management The File menu contains a Versions command The Versions function allows you to save multiple versions of the same document in the same file Versions of redline sdw EJ Hew versions Save Mew version ca Always Save a version on closing Existing versions Close Open Date and time Saved by Comments Show 080 2001 092001 Star User Delete Compare ddi Help You can choose to view individual versions of a document or you c
410. spreadsheet documents Not all changes are recorded for example the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded However all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded such as additions deletions text alterations usual formatting etc 1 To start Revision Marking open the document to be edited and choose Edit Changes and put a check mark in front of Record 2 Now start making your changes You will note that all new text passages you enter are underlined in color while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color 3 Ifyou move to a marked change with the mouse pointer you will see a refer ence to the type of change the author date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip If the Extended Tips are also enabled on the Help menu you will also see any available comments on this change Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tips You can enter a comment on each marked change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit Changes Comment In addition to Extended Tips the comment is also displayed in the list in the Accept or Reject Changes dialog To stop recording changes choose Edit Changes Record again The check mark is removed and you can now save the document and return it to the per
411. st Window Draw Functions floating toolbar Navigation Window 60 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Entering and Formatting Text You do not have to work in any particular sequence to enter or format text You can enter text and let us say underline it or italicize it while you type or after wards and you can decide either there and then or later on to split a section of text into two columns You never have to delete text and retype simply because you want to alter the formatting Basically to edit text you first select it and then choose the relevant command such as the one to format the text in italics There are several ways of selecting text for example using the arrow keys whilst holding down the Shift key or with the mouse whilst keeping the mouse button depressed Often there are different ways of choosing a command for example with a menu command with a toolbar icon or with shortcut keys Entering New Text To enter new text 1 Open an existing text document or create a new one 2 Enter text using the keyboard If you want to enter special characters which are not available on your keyboard choose Insert Special Character and select the desired character from the table 3 Press Enter to begin a new paragraph Line breaks You do not need to worry about line breaks as the software inserts these automati cally Only press Enter where you want to start a new paragraph Automatic correction StarOffi
412. structions below Then you can decide whether you want to use a context menu command the F3 key or double click the group to enter it After entering a group with a double click no object in the group is selected 346 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Exiting Groups To exit a group you have a choice of using a menu command the key combination Ctrl F3 or double clicking outside all of the objects in the group After you exit the group it is selected which means that you can quickly enter and exit a group using the keyboard View of Entered Groups In order to emphasize the group and the contents thereof all objects which are not in the entered group including other groups will be depicted in the new Ghost Mode in faded colors That makes it easy for you to see which objects are avail able for interaction and which are not as well as whether you are in a group or not Navigating Between Objects of a Group or on a Page Using the Tab and Shift Tab keys you can move forward and backward along the row of objects in a group edited with F3 or on a page If you repress the keys on a final object while going in one direction the first object selected will appear next Combining Objects and Constructing Shapes In StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress you can combine graphic objects in different ways Several single objects can be brought together to create new objects by using Boolean set operators on the original geome
413. sts of at least one paragraph When you select a text and define it as a section it is automatically ended with a paragraph break 76 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 You can insert another text document as a section within a text document A section from another text document can also be inserted as a section Sections within a single document can also be linked to other locations To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section place the cursor at the very beginning or end of the section and press Alt Enter Sections and Columns Multicolumn section A section can contain other sections This feature allows you for example to create a two column section on a page of text and then create a three column section within that section Multicolumn page The page format Format Page Columns which always applies to all pages with the current Page Style is independent of the sections Multicolumn frame You can also insert frames containing columns of text which you can move freely around the page from main toolbar long click to open Insert floating toolbar click Insert frame icon For these frames for example you can select that the text in the frame be positioned a certain distance from the edge of the frame Choose Format Frame Wrap Inserting Sections 1 Place the cursor at the point where you want to insert a new section or select the text that is to form a new section 2 Choose Ins
414. t Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 37 The meta inf manifest xml file describes the structure of the XML file Additional files can be contained in the packed file format Illustrations are for example contained in a Pictures subdirectory Basic code in a Basic subdirectory and linked Basic libraries are found in further subdirectories of Basic Definition of the XML formats The DTD Document Type Description files can be found in staroffice6 0 share dtd Note that the formats are subject to certain licenses You can find notes on the licenses at the start of the DTD files More detailed information can be found on the OpenOffice org website Sending Documents as E Mail Working in StarOffice you can send the current document as an e mail attachment 1 Choose File Send Document as E mail StarOffice opens your default e mail program If you want to send it with another program select it with Tools Options StarOffice External Programs 2 In your e mail program enter a recipient subject and any text you want to add and send the e mail 38 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 H Printing a Document Once you have finished creating your document you may want to print it out on paper Although more and more documents are being produced that are not intended to be published on paper such as the pages of StarOffice Help graphics for Internet pages presentations and so on it may be helpful to print out a
415. t remove the borders from the frame and table and apply further settings Calculating Across Multiple Tables In a text document insert two tables each with several rows and columns Enter a few figures in the tables but leave at least one cell empty The tables were automatically named Table1 and Table2 You can give a table a different name Format Table Table tab text box Name Use only letters and numbers in the name 1 2 3 4 Position the cursor in an empty cell Press F2 to display the Formula bar As an example enter SUM Now you can click in both tables in the cells containing figures After each click enter a plus sign from the keyboard then click on the next cell containing a figure Finally click the Apply icon on the Formula Bar If for example you want to add up the first two rows of each table and show the total in Table2 the formula is sum lt Tablel A1 gt lt A1 gt 146 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Calculating Cell Totals in Tables 1 Insert a table with multiple rows Insert Table into a new text document 2 Enter a series of numbers into a column one number per row leaving the last cell of the column empty 3 Position the cursor in the last empty cell of the column and click the Sum icon in the Table object bar 4 The Formula bar appears and a formula indicates the cells of the column to be added The cells are separated by a vertical slash
416. t you will see a small triangle on the right hand edge of the first cell indicating that it contains more text than can be displayed 200 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 You can turn off these triangles by choosing Tools Options Spreadsheet View and unmarking Text overflow double click on the separator between D and E sets the optimum column width If a number cannot be displayed in a cell because it is too long or due to the formatting e g currency format you will see In this case you will need to increase the column width Set the width to optimal by simply double clicking the right divider in the column header You can use all the usual functions to edit the text Notice however that the right and left arrow keys will replace the cell cursor if you are in the Entry mode by clicking in a cell and entering characters If you edit a cell with a double click or have pressed the F2 key or click in the entry row you will enter the Edit mode The left and right arrow keys will now replace the text cursor When you press the Enter key the text in cell A1 is finished and the cursor automatically moves to cell A2 The active cell is always the one with the cell cursor and that is where you can make entries and changes Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 201 Multiple Sheets in a Document At the lower edge of the spreadsheet document you will find tabs for switching among t
417. t already contains fields for the address date sender etc Inthe Use of this Template dialog that automatically appears select the option Several recipients address database Since the Elegant Letter template is linked to an address database the address table is opened automatically in the data source view If this does not happen press F4 to open the data source for the current document Select the records you want to use in the form letter by clicking the row headers at the left in the data source view Press the Shift key and or the Ctrl key to make your selection To print a form letter for all the records in the table click the empty field above the row headers to select all records Now click the Form Letter icon on the database bar at the top of the data source view The Form Letter dialog appears where you can choose what you want to send as e mail or print You can also choose if you want to print selected records all records or a particular range If you want to print a range e g records 1 to 5 make sure that the numbers follow the order displayed in the data source view 176 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 t You can sort or filter records in the data source view by clicking the respec tive icons on the database bar For example to sort all records according to ZIP postal code place the cursor in the ZIP CODE field of any record and click Sort Ascending Now your form letter is all ready t
418. t box and correct the abbreviation if necessary You may now save the text component via AutoText New afterwards you should close the dialog Using AutoText in Networks You can use AutoTexts from different directories An example would be ina typical StarOffice network installation Read only company AutoTexts could be in a directory on the server while you write and read your own user defined AutoTexts in your own files Choose Tools Options StarOffice Paths Double click AutoText Two paths have been entered here The first path takes the AutoTexts from the server installation The second path takes the AutoTexts from your user directory If two AutoTexts from two different directories have the same name StarOffice will use the AutoText from your user directory Printing AutoTexts To print a list of all AutoTexts use a macro from the StarOffice Basic Gimmicks library The macro lists all AutoText names and shortcuts in a new text document Choose Tools Macro double click Gimmicks in the right list of the Macro dialog select AutoText and then click Run 104 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 AutoText With AutoComplete 1 Inthe AutoText dialog mark Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing Insert Close Help By with Film Roll Ew with Initials Bu with Quill Pen Bw Circuit Board Bw Classic Bw Cogwheels Buy Elegant Bu Gray Circle BW Modern AutoTest T
419. t just like the background To replace colors with the Eyedropper 1 Insert an image in a Bitmap format e g BMP GIF JPG TIG or in a metafile format e g WMF To do this choose Insert Graphics in StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress 2 Open the Eyedropper window by choosing Tools Eyedropper 3 In the Eyedropper window click the Eyedropper icon in the upper left hand corner The mouse pointer will turn into a special pointer with which you then indicate the color to be replaced in the current document The color box next to the eyedropper icon in the Eyedropper window displays the color the mouse pointer is resting on 4 Click the left mouse button when you find the color you want to have replaced This color will automatically be registered in the first of the four rows in the Eyedropper window 5 Now in the list box to the right in the same row select the new color which should replace the selected color in the whole bitmap image 6 If in the same editing step you want to replace another color click the check box in front of the next row Now select the eyedropper icon in the upper left hand corner again and choose a new color Up to four colors can be replaced in one editing step 7 Select the bitmap image or the metafile image you want to change the colors in by clicking it 8 In the Eyedropper window click Replace If too many similar colors were replaced undo the step through Ctrl Z and decrease the
420. t of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown then click on the ruler Selection Description E Setting left tabs Fl Setting right tabs Setting decimal tabs a Setting centered tabs Double click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog Double click the white area of the ruler to set one tab The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page Moving Tabs on the Ruler Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse To move several tab stops on the ruler press the Shift key before you click a tab Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it The spacing between those tabs remains the same Press Ctrl instead of Shift when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin Changing the Properties of Tabs To change tab type click the tab you want to change on the ruler then open the context menu Deleting Tabs Deleting a tab with the mouse is easy Simply hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With StarOffice 409 Changing the Defaults If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops you will find further information under Tools Options Document Type General The Context Menu of the ruler to
421. t once If you would like to make frequent use of a background color for a certain para graph it would be best to create a Paragraph Style for this purpose Instead of a color background you can have a background graphic image The background graphic image is assigned to a paragraph either via the Paragraph Style in that case all paragraphs based on this Style will have the same graphic background or edit it via menu Format Paragraph Click the Background tab and in the list box As select graphics in order to pick out an appropriate graphic image Creating a Table of Contents A table of contents can be created manually but if the contents are altered the table of contents must be manually updated as well It is much more convenient and time saving to have the program create a table of contents for you Now that you have entered the text you may want to create a table of contents on the front page of your newspaper or newsletter To do so follow these steps draw a frame manually on the front page choose To Page as anchor Press the Escape key to see the cursor in the frame Open the Insert Index Table dialog choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables On the Index Table tab page select Table of Contents as Type and enter an appropriate heading e g In this issue in the Title field If you want to create a table of contents using the headings in the document specify the desired outline str
422. t you enabled by clicking the icon on the main toolbar offers you another facility as well In the context menu of a red underlined word that is recognized as incorrect you can specify that the word or the whole paragraph is present in one of the other installed languages The language of the underlined characters or all characters of the paragraph is auto matically assigned as a direct character format Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 45 Starting the Spellcheck To check your entire text for spelling mistakes in the classic way i e letting the Spellcheck go through the whole document on its own go to the Tools menu and choose Spelling Check The Spellcheck dialog will only appear if there are words in your text unknown to the Spellcheck The various options to be seen in the Spellcheck dialog are described in detail in the StarOffice Help Spellcheck English USA Original sratement Ignore x g Ignore All Suggestions Always Replace AU LG lGtheth Thesaurus Language A English USA ii Options Dictionary koffice All Add Backwards Word Unknown word Help Close In the Spellcheck dialog if you include an unrecognized word in a user dictionary you can if you want at the same time define the permitted hyphens for the auto matic hyphenation Enter the hyphens in the word as an equals sign Note placing the equals sign at the end of the word means that this word will nev
423. ta source browser on the other hand you edit the dBase file or other data source directly and you can perform SQL queries for example Defining Database Ranges For example if you would like to manage your household budget with StarOffice Calc enter the records in an empty StarOffice Calc spreadsheet and select the area as a database range Creating Records in a Spreadsheet 1 Open a new spreadsheet 2 Enter the column titles in the first row e g Date in cell A1 Item in cell B1 Amount in C1 Then enter some information 010200 Flowers 12 80 01 0300 Breakfast 2 49 la O 01 20400 Software 49 50 01 0500 Newspaper 0 60 Te 010600 Fishing Trip 22 50 01 0700 Hat 6 25 qaqa Choe tac ary 236 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 To format your sheet as in the illustration proceed as follows 1 Select row 1 by clicking on the row header Click the Bold icon 2 Select the entire column A by clicking on the column header Open the context menu and choose Format Cells In the Cell Attributes dialog click the Numbers tab and choose a date format for Column A 3 Select column C by clicking on the column header and apply a currency format You only need to click the Number Format Currency icon on the object bar Cell Attributes Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All 12731739 Default User defined Friday Decemb
424. tahan ta Oran A Enter your text in the top left label and format the font the way you want it You can include serial numbering by inserting a field Place the cursor at the point where the number should appear Press Ctrl F2 or choose Insert Fields Other In the Fields dialog go to the Variables tab Select the type Set variable if it is not already marked In the Name box enter a name of your choice for the counting variable for example Number To increment the variable from one label to the next by 1 enter the following formula in the Value text box Number 1 Click Insert then close the Fields dialog Click Synchronize Labels Now you can save and print the finished document User s Guide March 2002 Printing Address Labels If you want to print address stickers for form letters which do not fit in window envelopes for example this is how to do it 1 2 Choose File New Labels to open the Labels dialog Select the format of the label sheets you want to print on Remember to mark Synchronize contents on the Options tab Click on New Document to close the dialog When you see the label document open the data source view by pressing the F4 key Click the thumb tack icon at the edge of the data source view if it covers the first label In the data source view select your address data source table Drag the data fields needed for the Address individually into the top left label For example
425. tarOffice 389 Copying Graphics From the Gallery If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text spreadsheet or presentation document the graphic will be inserted there If you release the graphic directly on a draw object please note the following Ifyou move it drag it without pressing any key in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer only the font attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button Ifyou copy it drag it while holding down the Ctrl key in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer the graphic will be inserted as an object If you create a hyperlink drag while holding down Shift and Ctrl in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained Inserting Graphics From a Document in the Gallery You can place a graphic from an HTML page for example in the Gallery by drag and drop 1 Display the Gallery theme that you want to add the graphic to 2 Position your mouse pointer above the graphic without clicking 3 If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the graphic refers to a hyper link In this case click the graphic while pressing the Alt key to select it without executing the respective link If the mouse pointer does not change to
426. tarOffice Help Chapter 5 Creating Presentations With StarOffice Impress 301 Selecting Hidden Objects To select an object that is completely covered by another object click on its position while holding down the Alt key If several objects are lying on top of one another every Alt click selects a different object lying in this position Hold down Shift as well to click through the objects in the reverse order Press Tab to select an object Press Tab again to select the next object Press Shift Tab to go through the objects in the reverse order Individual Presentations You can show your slides from beginning to end for example by clicking the Slide Show icon on the main toolbar or with the keyboard shortcut Ctrl F2 Usually a presentation always starts with the first slide To begin with the current slide proceed as follows 1 Choose Tools Options Presentation General 2 In the area Starting the presentation mark the Always with current slide check box Note that this setting has priority over the Individual Presentation described below You have other options to show only or never show certain slides 1 If you do not wish to show a slide go to the Slide View for example by choosing View Master View Slides View select the slide and select Slide Show Show Hide Slide The name of the selected slide will now appear highlighted in gray meaning that the slide will not be shown
427. tate on only one axis You can shift the pivot point which first appears as a small circle in the middle When you then rotate the object it will rotate around the new pivot point Open the 3D Effects window by clicking the 3D Controller icon You can apply another illumination to the 3D object for example The 3D Effects window is described in the StarOffice Help 334 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Drawing Editing and Converting Curves and Objects With vector graphics in drawing and presentation documents you can design not only ellipses and rectangles but also irregularly shaped curves forming open or closed figures StarOffice Impress and StarOffice Draw make it very easy for you to draw and edit even quite unusual figures Drawing Curves 1 You will find the tools for drawing special shapes in the Curves floating toolbar Drag the floating w toolbar away from the Main toolbar into an empty drawing or presentation document 2 gt Select the Curve icon The cursor appears as a cross hair symbol with an accompanying symbol that indicates the new function 3 You can now create a curve with the mouse The point where you first click the mouse button determines the starting point The direction in which the point where you release the mouse button lies defines the direction the curve takes from the starting point Now move the mouse without holding the button down the curve will follow the movement
428. tensity of the filter You can provide the bitmap image with text and graphics select these objects together and export the selection as a new bitmap image Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 351 Saving Bitmaps If you want to save the changes to a bitmap image as an image file for example in the GIF JPEG or TIFF file format you must select and export the bitmap image This is only possible in StarOffice Draw and StarOffice Impress 1 Select the bitmap image Also select additional objects as necessary with the shift key pressed or by opening a frame around all objects if for example you want to provide the bitmap image with text 2 Choose File Export You see the Export dialog 3 In the File type field select the file format you want e g GIF or JPEG 4 If you only want to export the selected objects check the Selection box If Selection is not checked the entire page of the document is exported 5 Enter a name for the file and click Save 352 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Working With Colors On the object bar is a list box where you can choose the color for a selected object from a number of predefined colors You can choose the color of the border line independently of the color of the filling The Color Bar If you want you can show a color bar on the edge of a drawing or presentation The color bar offers you a choice of colors You can color the selected object by simply cli
429. ternational CorrectSpell est une marque d pos e de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Systemes de correction orthographique su dois russe norv gien anglais n erlandais et danois International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systemes de correction orthographique espagnol et francais International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots fournie par la Librairie Larousse Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique anglais australien International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s labor a partir de The Macquarie Dictionary deuxi me dition mise a jour Copyright Macquarie University NSW Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les bases de donn es incorpor s Systeme de correction orthographique catalan International CorrectSpell Copyright 1995 de Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V Tous droits r serv s Adapt a partir de la liste de mots catalans Copyright 1992 Universitat de Barcelona Il est interdit de reproduire ou de d sassembler les algorithmes ou les
430. texts hightlighted in gray are variables which you double click to modify After you have finished creating the document you can save and print it However if you would like to have a more personal and interesting layout you can edit the template a bit more Creating Page Styles If you want to have a page which includes not only text but also several larger graphics you should create a separate Page Style for this purpose Open the Stylist and click the Page Styles icon In the context menu select the command New to open the Page Styles dialog In the tab Organize assign a descriptive Name for the Style Next click the Page tab and define the page format and margins Mark the check box Register true and choose the reference Paragraph Style Text Body P If you activate the register true option the baselines of all paragraphs with the Text Body Style will be exactly aligned so that they are at the same position in each column and on each page in relation to the page With double side printing the baselines of the register true paragraph will have the same position You will normally take as a Paragraph Style the Style you used to create your actual text To define another Paragraph Style as register true call up the properties dialog of that Paragraph Style Call it up for example in the Stylist via the context menu of that particular Paragraph Style select the Modify command On the Indents and Spacing tab in the field under R
431. the active control field in an option section of a dialog Tab Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog Shift Tab Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Alt Down Arrow Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop up menus Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key Del Deletes the selected item s into the recycle bin Shift Del Deletes the selected item s without putting them in the recycle bin Backspace When a folder is shown goes up one level goes back Ctrl Tab Goes to the next document that is open except when posi tioned at the start of a header instead a tab is inserted Shift Ctrl Tab Goes to the previous document that is open Ctrl O Opens a document Ctrl S Saves the current document Ctrl N Creates a new document Shift Ctrl N Opens Templates and Documents dialog Ctrl P Prints document Ctrl Q Exits application Shift Ctrl Q Terminate a macro that is currently running Ctrl X Cuts out the selected elements Ctrl C Copies the selected items Ctrl V Pastes from the clipboard Ctrl A Selects all Ctrl Z Undoes last action 424 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Shortcut Keys Effect Ctrl F Calls the Find amp Replace dialog Ctrl Shift F Searche
432. the cursor position downwards When the end of the document is reached a dialog will appear asking if you want to continue the search at the beginning of the document Press the Enter key to confirm If the text string is found it will be highlighted The Find amp Replace dialog will remain open You don t have to close the dialog and you can move it to any place on the screen However if you do choose to close it it will retain the previously entered strings so you won t have to enter them again for the next search but can select them from the list box A very useful feature is the multiselection facility available in StarOffice used in conjunction with the Find All button Suppose for example you want to set every occurrence of the word Bold in your text in bold type type the word in the Search for box then click Find All All occurrences are now selected and you can for example click the Bold icon in the text object bar to format all occurrences in bold As you can see in the dialog there are several ways of expanding or restricting your search in both the Options group box and with the buttons Examples for each option are described below Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 53 Searching for Whole Words Only Select the Whole words only option if you only want to find whole words that match the searched for word For instance if the word in is entered as the search term in the Search for field all instances of in or
433. the documents in your work directory To define your work directory choose Tools Options StarOffice Paths Samples The provided samples show you what you can do with StarOffice Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 33 saving Documents To save your current document use the Save command in the File menu the Save Document icon on the function bar or just press Ctrl 5S When you save a document for the first time a dialog will appear in which you choose where you want to store the file Save as X F officeb0_0 Tte Date modified Folder 20 12 2001 11 19 05 Folder 20 12 2001 11 22 56 Folder 20 12 2001 11 17 37 Folder 0770172002 09 37 12 File type Star Office 6 0 Text Document a Cancel Help Save with password M Automatic file name extension Assign your text document a name when you save it the first time You can for the most part choose any name you d like according to the restrictions of your oper ating system When you want to open the document later you can find it under that name Save your documents regularly as you work on them The simplest way is to save the current document by pressing Ctrl S This replaces the document on the data medium with the current document 34 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Changing Your Work Directory When you start a dialog in StarOffice to open a document initially you see your work directory there You can change the directo
434. the format to the line element The element is displayed as a If you click OK the object will remain thick black line unchanged The element is not displayed Clicking OK will delete the element Use the Borders floating toolbar Suppose you want to use the following table border for your document Berlin New York London Germany USA Great Britain Spree Hudson Thames gt 3 Mio Citizens gt 7 Mio Citizens gt 6 Mio Citizens 1 Place the cursor at the position in your document where the table is to be inserted 2 Choose Insert Table to open the Insert Table dialog and insert a table of the required size e g 3 columns and 5 rows GA go Select the whole table press Ctrl A twice then click the Borders icon on the object bar On the floating toolbar click the icon at top left which means No Border 4 Now with the mouse select the whole of the first row open the context menu and choose Table to open the Table Format dialog 5 Open the Borders tab page 6 Inthe line field select the required line thickness e g 2 50 pt 7 Inthe large Line arrangement field click once in the area between the two bottom angles see illustration and then on OK 70 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Table Format Table Text Flow Columns Borders Background Line arrangement EEE Ine 57 AA 8pacing to contents Left Jo Ocm Right Jo cm 4 00 pt Top Jo Ocm H E 00 pt Bottom Jo Ocm
435. the next dialog click on the Text Flow tab 3 Under Hyphenation mark Automatically 170 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Manual Hyphenation For manual hyphenation place the cursor at the point where the word should be separated and press Ctrl The word will be separated if it is possible even if automatic hyphenation is turned off for the paragraph If you have entered a hyphen directly StarOffice will not apply the automatic hyphenation for that word Let s assume the word Antarctica would be hyphen ated An tarcti ca but you want it Ant arc ti ca Enter all three hyphens manually directly including the one between i and ca that is the same as in the auto matic hyphenation There is a quick way to prevent a particular word from being affected by the hyphenation or spellcheck functionality Select the word and choose Format Character On the Font tab select Language None If you want to permanently prevent a word from being automatically hyphen ated so that it will never be separated place it in an active user defined dictionary with an equals sign after it 1 Choose Tools Options Language Settings Writing Aids 2 Select a User defined dictionary and click the Edit button If you do not yet have a user defined dictionary you can create one by clicking the New button 3 In the next dialog Edit Custom Dictionary enter the word for example Companyname without quotatio
436. the text you then enter here will be a subtitle on slide 2 7 Youcan also first start entering the text for the subtitle and then press the Tab key In a case like this where you have already entered text in the line you will see a message which warns you that with this action you will delete slide 3 and asks for a confirmation Confirm it with OK 8 Continue to enter more subtitles of the first level on page two By pressing the Tab key you grade the line down one level and with Shift Tab one level up This enables you to even make a new slide out of a sub topic The levels you create following these steps automatically contain the Presentation Styles title outline 1 outline 2 etc These Styles can be modified by having a new slide design assigned to them for example a new font font size and font color You can of course edit these designs for example with the Stylist s context menu Slide Transitions Effects and Animation Make use of the possibilities a computer presentation offers you in order to grab your audience s attention with animated objects and interesting slide transitions Automatic Slide Transition If you want to show a series of slides use the slide transition effects to present them in an interesting way For example the current slide can roll out of the window while the new slides rolls in This effect is called roll from left The best thing to do is to assign this effect in the Slide View Simply cl
437. ther 160 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Fields Document References Functions Daclnformnation Variables Databaze Type Select Format Chapter number Chapter number and name Chapter number without separat File name Fage Sender Statistics oe J e 6 Inthe Fields dialog select the Document tab type Chapter format Chapter name If you want the header to contain paragraphs formatted with Heading 2 instead of Heading 1 enter a 2 under Layer 7 Click Insert to add the desired information to the header and then close the dialog box Now every page of your document will automatically display the chapter heading of your choice in the header Other information can be inserted in the same manner You ll find further menu commands under Insert Fields You can choose from Date Time Page Numbers Page Count Subject Title and Author All additional field commands can be selected under Other Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 161 Defining Different Headers A defined header and footer appear in all pages that have the same Page Style However you may often need a different header for the first page or for even and odd numbered pages For example you may want the name of the chapter to appear on the left even pages and the name of the first subchapter to appear on the right odd pages Since headers are a property of the Page Styles you need to define tw
438. tically becomes m7 if this replacement pair is entered under Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat on the Replace tab You can add other items to the list 2 After the automatic replacement carry on typing as normal Suppose you want to type H2O with a subscript 2 1 Type the H 2 Press Ctrl Shift B Ctrl Shift B is the keyboard shortcut for subscript text Ctrl Shift P for super script text 3 Type the 2 4 Press the keyboard shortcut again If you are at the end of a paragraph there is an even easier way Press the right arrow key once 5 Type the O 72 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Applying subscripts superscripts retrospectively Suppose you want to change H2O to H O with a subscript 2 Either use the key shortcut above or the following method via the menu command 1 Select the character that you want in subscript superscript In this example you should select the 2 Choose Format Character This opens the Character dialog Click the Position tab Select Subscript and click OK The 2 now appears in subscript Writing in Uppercase or Lowercase How can text be changed to uppercase or lowercase letters You have the following options for re formatting text in uppercase or lowercase Decide whether you want to apply a font effect to the text for display and printing purposes only or whether you want to replace the characters permanently Display in uppercase Select the text and choose Format
439. ties The printing functions differ according to the operating system printer driver and printer model used The selected printer defines the width and height of the characters and hence also the line and page breaks StarOffice Writer and Calc always format the pages in the way they will appear when printed Besides the general printing options already mentioned you can define special printer options for the different document types in StarOffice using additional dialogs that allow you to control the way the contents or the pages of the docu ment are printed Define these printer options for the current print job by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog You can create a general definition by choosing Tools Options name of document type Print Displaying Print Previews Before printing out a document you can obtain a preview of how the printed document will look so you can adjust margin widths optimize page breaks etc 1 Switch to the document you want to preview 2 Choose File Page Preview 3 an EE Use the icons on the object bar to zoom in or out 4 Use the arrow keys or object bar icons to scroll through the GA GA l bi pages of the document and check how they will appear in print 40 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Reduced Printing of Documents If you would like a reduced printout of your text document so as to save paper choose File Page Preview Here you can decide whether to have t
440. ting then press the right arrow key once to revert to the default Paragraph Style Now continue entering text at the end of the current paragraph Example Suppose you want to type the words This is written in bold italic and set the last two words to bold italic as you are typing Type This is written in then click on the Bold and Italic icons on the Object Bar Type bold italic Then instead of clicking on the two icons again simply press the right arrow key once Then carry on typing in the default format of the paragraph you are in 74 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Chapters in Navigator In long documents you can use the Navigator to obtain an overview and change the sequence of chapters or their level in the hierarchy of chapters and sub chap ters The only condition is that you must apply Heading Paragraph Styles to the chapter headings or enter the Paragraph Styles you have chosen for your head ings under Tools Outline Numbering Navigator as variable size window or minimized Hold down Ctrl and double click on the gray area at the edge of the Navi gator e g next to or below the icons This docks the Navigator against the Navigator side of the window or turns it back toa amp patap F variable window whose size and posi Al e tion you can select for yourself by drag a ging and dropping with the mouse The size and position are automatically remembered Double click to switch betwee
441. tion 170 hyphens 46 66 hyphens as separators 66 icons changing views 407 connecting 404 moving deleting copying 408 illumination using 362 illustrations inserting 351 inserting in text 155 images 323 editing 351 inserting 351 inserting in text 155 labeling 350 450 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 import bitmaps 351 tables in text format 379 XML 36 importing lists 135 tables as text 265 index concordance file 121 indexes alphabetical indexes 120 creating bibliographies 122 creating user defined indexes 121 defining entriesin 118 deleting 124 editing 124 editing index format 124 editing or deleting entries 119 in master documents 134 multiple documents 125 updating 124 indicator lines intext 112 individual presentations 302 input help in cells 280 inputting text 61 insert paragraphs before tables 140 inserting charts 157 footnotes 166 from Gallery 156 graphics 155 graphics via dialog 155 images 351 lines 158 sections 77 sheet parts 394 sheets 202 special characters 66 tables intext 138 text 62 inserting structure into presentations 299 insert mode 62 integers starting witha zero 208 interaction 317 interactive gradients defining 357 interest computation example 252 international currency formats 208 Internet addresses turning off recognition of 48 intersecting objects 347 polygons 347 K keyboard configuring 401 navigating in spreadsheets with 225 text tables 149 usin
442. tion 2 1 Illustration 2 2 etc in the second proceed as follows 1 Organize your document by chapters if you have not already done so Choose Tools Outline Numbering to number the chapter headings that you have formatted for example with the Paragraph Style Heading 1 Select the Heading 1 Style from the Paragraph Style list box and the option 1 2 3 from the Number list box below it 2 Select the first illustration you want to number 3 Choose Insert Caption 4 In the dialog that appears select Illustration as the category and Arabic 1 2 3 as the numbering You also can enter your caption text in this dialog 5 Click Options Specify the chapter numbering in the Number Range Options dialog For this example select option 1 under Level and specify the separator you want for chapter wise numbering Click OK 6 Inthe Caption dialog click OK Your illustrations are now numbered by chapters 130 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Do the same for all other illustrations in your document The numbering occurs automatically All illustrations within one chapter level are numbered and you can enter at which chapter level you want the numbering to switch in the Number Range Options dialog Choose Tools Options Text Document General and under Caption mark the Automatic check box When you click the button next to Object selection the Caption dialog appears This is where you can for example
443. tion or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited International CorrectSpell Portuguese correction system Copyright 1995 by Lernout amp Hauspie Speech Products N V All rights reserved Portions adapted from the Dicionario Academico da Lingua Portuguesa Copyright 1992 by Porto Editora Reproduction or disassembly of embodied algorithms or database prohibited Federal Acquisitions Commercial Software Government Users Subject to Standard License Terms and Conditions DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Copyright 2002 Sun Microsystems Inc 901 San Antonio Road Palo Alto California 94303 Etats Unis Tous droits r serv s Sun Microsystems Inc a les droits de propri t intellectuels relatants a la technologie incorpor e dans ce produit En particulier et sans la limitation ces droits de propri t intellectuels peuvent inclure un ou plus des brevets am ricains num r s a http www sun com patents et un ou les brevets plus suppl mentaires ou les applications de brevet en attente dans les Etats Unis et les autres pays Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la co
444. tions into your shift plan with a minimum of effort Open a new spreadsheet File New Spreadsheet Enter the names of the employees in a column Next insert a row for the the time period such as Monday Tuesday etc or 12 01 02 12 02 02 etc You can also insert two rows to display both types of information Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 277 To create sequences in a spreadsheet e g Mon Tues Wed use the list func tion Type Mon in a cell in the first row and then select the cell Move the mouse pointer to the lower right corner the mouse pointer will turn into a small cross symbol and drag a frame over a range of cells After you release the mouse button the area will automatically be filled with the other days of the week You can create your own lists under Tools Options Spreadsheet Sort Lists Finally assign a background color to the cells containing employee names and the days of the week You can use a different color to highlight the columns Saturday and Sunday 1 Freezing Columns Select the column to the right of the employee names by clicking on the column header and click Freeze in the Window menu You can now scroll horizontally while the area to the left of the freeze line remains fixed This enables you to constantly view the column containing the employee names This function is espe cially useful for large sheets Conditional Formatting With this function
445. to edit or delete it Automatic Spellcheck From within a text document click the AutoSpellcheck on off icon on the main toolbar All words marked as incorrect by the spellchecker will then be under lined in red Click on words underlined in this way with the right mouse button A context menu then appears The context menu often provides a list of suggested words one of which you may click on to select it The suggested word then replaces the word under lined in red If you replace the wrongly typed word using the AutoCorrect function in the context menu the word pair will be entered in the AutoCorrect replacement table To call up this table choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat Replace tab If the word underlined in red is correct you can place it in your custom dictionary using the Add command To exclude words from the spellcheck 1 Select the words 2 Open the context menu of one of the words 3 Choose Character 4 Choose Format Character Font tab 5 Now select the language None Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 101 Using AutoText Ab StarOffice Writer contains an AutoText function which allows you to compose whole texts for letters faxes or any other documents by entering predefined or user defined shortcuts To insert AutoText you can Enter the shortcut for an AutoText item and press the F3 key Some predefined AutoText blocks are provided For exampl
446. to cancel the process Searching for Attributes Click Attributes to open a dialog in which you select specific text attributes to search for within a document StarOffice will then find all attributes that differ from the format of the Paragraph Style Attributes Options Ok L Alignment C Blinking L Character background Effects L Font C Font color L Font posture Cancel ddi Help C Hyphenation C Indent C Individual words C Keep with next paragraph Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 55 In this dialog if you mark the Font Weight check box for example you can find all words that have a heavier font than normal These are words to which you have applied the Bold attribute through direct or indirect formatting but also words that you have highlighted with a font previously defined as a bold font such as ones containing the words Bold or Black in their name By default only direct attributes are looked for However after you have looked for the attributes you can mark the Including Styles check box in the Find amp Replace dialog this appears in the place where Search for Styles previously stood Then besides the direct attributes it also finds the indirect attributes i e those set with styles Searching for Special Formats Click the Format button to open a dialog in which to select the specific formats you want to search for For example if you have manually centered a
447. try Combining Objects 1 Select several objects 2 Choose Combine from the context menu In contrast to groups which consist of single objects a combination fuses the component objects into one single new geometric object with its own new proper ties The combination may be undone again later but the individual objects get lost Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 347 You recognize the property that stands out the most in a combination when the individual objects overlap In this case the style quantity overall is punched out as holes where a number of objects overlaps This is a Boolean exclusive OR XOR operation oo In the illustration you can see several objects at the left before being combined and at the right after being combined The combination is given the attributes of the object farthest to the back i e undermost object Constructing Shapes The commands Shapes Merge Subtract and Intersect also form a new geometric object out of the original objects The new object comes into being due to the use of logical amount operators on the source geometries 1 Select several objects 2 Choose Shapes from the context menu In the submenu choose Merge Subtract or Intersect In the followintg illustrations you see the original shapes on the left and the result on the right Shapes Merge The selected polygons are merged so that they make one object the surface of which is the sum of
448. ts One of the AutoFormat functions automatically detects a paragraph beginning with a minus sign followed by a tab stop or space and reformats it as a bullet point The automatic bulleting is then applied to subse quent paragraphs as well Automatic bulleting ends when you do not enter any text in a new paragraph but only press Return To switch AutoFormat for text documents on and off choose Format AutoFormat In the submenu mark the While Typing command if you want AutoFormat to work as you type Alternatively choose the menu command Apply later on to automatically format the whole document or the current selection after wards By using the Apply and Edit Changes command you will see all document changes made via AutoFormat You then have the choice of accepting or rejecting all changes or reviewing each change separately You set the options in Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat AutoCorrect offers many functions that you can turn on and off individually in some cases separately for typing and post processing The Replace and Exceptions lists are language dependent StarOffice first searches in the list applicable to the language of the text then in a list for the higher ranking language family and finally in all installed languages e g first in English US then in English then in All Languages Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 47 AutoCorrect REDE Meh bs and exceptions har language gEnglish USA Replace
449. ts 347 comments on cells 212 comparing documents 398 compose key special characters 66 concordance file index 121 conditional formatting 278 conditional separators 66 configuration saving with document 406 configuring keyboard 401 menus 402 StarOffice 401 connecting objects 347 connectors editing 320 editing glue points 321 Connectors 318 consolidating 250 contents protecting 413 continuation pages page numbers 163 control points 336 control points on B zier curves 335 conversion Euro example 205 converting to curve polygon 3D 340 copying cells 224 draw objects 391 formulas 222 Gallery 390 icons 408 Sheet areas 150 394 Styles 98 99 text sections 74 Copying with Drag amp Drop 392 copyright entering symbol 49 corner points drawing 335 creating tables of contents 120 creating address labels 181 creating new styles from selections Stylist 97 cross classified tables multiple operations 256 cross fading between two objects 345 effect 311 csv files 265 csv text format databases 379 currency formats 208 cursor placing directly 63 curves drawing 335 editing 336 custom dictionaries removing words from 170 customizing toolbars 403 custom styles 83 custom templates using 411 cutting text 63 D dashes 66 data consolidating 250 database ranges defining 236 filtering 240 grouping 241 sorting 239 databases exporting 379 importing 379 in StarOffice Calc 236 text format
450. tton and drag to B6 While you drag the mouse to mark the desired range the AutoPilot dialog will be automatically minimized so that only the active input field is visible The field indicates the area being selected with the mouse You may also reduce or enlarge the dialog manually by clicking the Shrink Maximize button to the right of the input field 5 Finally click OK to close the AutoPilot The formula will be calculated according to the given arguments and the final result will appear in cell B8 Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 227 References to Other Sheets In a sheet cell you can show a reference to a cell in another sheet 1 2 Open a new empty spreadsheet By way of example enter in cell A1 of Sheet1 the following formula and complete the input with the Enter key Sheet2 Al If you now click the sheet tab with the label text Sheet2 on the bottom window border you will go to Sheet2 of the current document Set the cursor in cell A1 there and enter text or a number If you switch back to Sheet1 you will see the same content in cell A1 there If the contents of Sheet2 A1 change then the contents of Sheet1 A1 also change In a corresponding way a reference can also be made to a cell of another docu ment Open another spreadsheet in addition to your new spreadsheet which is already saved as a file this does not work unless a document has previously been saved 1 If you
451. tyle for example with the name Head1 and applied it to the headings in the document you would simply have to change the Head1 Style and all headings would be automatically modified accordingly The Style Concept in StarOffice Styles for characters paragraphs frames numbered lists and pages or cells in table documents are always saved with the document If you want you can copy the Styles of a text document into another text document see page 99 You can choose whether to overwrite or not replace Styles of the same name You can turn any document together with the Character Paragraph Frame Numbering and Page Styles it contains into a template see page 80 When you open a new document based on this template all those Styles are available to you When you start StarOffice for the first time certain predefined Styles apply to all document types When you open a new text document with File New Text Document for example a new blank document will be opened with these fixed settings which together form the default template If you want you can turn any document into the default template see page 95 The Styles that you have defined and that are now contained in the default template will then apply to all new documents Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 79 The Styles in the Stylist Open the Stylist by choosing the Stylist command from the Format menu or by pressing F11 or by clicking the icon
452. tyle and close the dialog with OK The following example demonstrates how to define a Paragraph Style for a subtitle Assume you have several subtitles in your text which you want to format with a custom Paragraph Style 1 Position the cursor in a paragraph in the text that you want to format with the new Paragraph Style Apply a Paragraph Style to the paragraph as an initial format This way you do not need to define all of the attributes yourself For example double click on the Heading 1 Paragraph Style in the Stylist Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 83 The paragraph is now formatted as Heading 1 Now you can make any desired changes such as formatting the subtitles to appear in italics 1 Select the entire paragraph It will appear highlighted 2 Modify the type of characters by selecting an italic font in the Character dialog Choose Format Character Font or by clicking the Italics icon on the text object bar 3 In the Stylist click on the New Style by Example icon and enter a name for the new Style in the dialog box for example Head1 Click OK Do you know how to apply a Paragraph Style Place the i cursor in the paragraph and double click the Style name in the Stylist If the desired Style already exists in the document you can also select it from the Apply Style combo box on the object bar Creating Document Templates To make your user defined Paragraph or Character Styl
453. u current line ment Home Go to the beginning of the 1 Go to the beginning of the Inatable current cell current cell 2 Go to the beginning of the table 3 Go to the beginning of the document End Go to the end of the current row Go to the end of the document End Go to the end of the current cell 1 Go to the end of the current cell In a table 2 Go to the end of the table 3 Go to the end of the document PgUp Scroll one page up the screen Switch to the header and back PgDn Scroll one page down the screen Switch to the footer and back Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 65 Inserting Special Characters This is how to insert special characters such as check marks boxes telephone symbols etc in your text To view a selection of all characters choose Insert Special Characters Inthe large selection field click the desired character or several characters in succession The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog When you close the dialog with OK all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document In any text input field e g in the URL field of the function bar or in the input fields in the Find amp Replace dialog you can press Shift Ctrl 5 to call the Special Characters dialog Inserting Protected Spaces Hyphens and Conditional Separators Non breaking spaces To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press the Ctrl
454. ucture using the Evaluation level spin box First you have to have assigned one of the Paragraph Styles which is determined for the chapter numbering to the headings You can determine the Styles under Tools Chapter Numbering The predefined Paragraph Styles are Heading1 through Heading10 Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 189 If you have used other Paragraph Styles of your own for the headings you can also incorporate these into the table of contents To do so go to the Insert Index Table dialog click the Index table tab and in the Create from area mark the Additional Styles check box Click the button to the right of the check box The Assign Styles dialog will appear Assign Styles x Styles Norms a a E a f amp PF Pp Default oOo a Frame contents Heading Heading 1 This is where you determine to which level the Style should be assigned in the table of contents for each Style used in the document You can choose more settings on the Entries and Styles tab pages Click OK to create your table of contents After your newsletter is finished you can save and print it Further Information Using Automatic Hyphenation When working with columns it makes sense to activate automatic hyphenation for every Paragraph Style do so by calling up the context menu of the Stylist and clicking Modify to access the Paragraph Style dialog click theText Flow tab Enter a 3 for Charact
455. uide March 2002 Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions If you are using drag and drop selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names you can use the keys Shift Ctrl and occasionally Alt to access additional functionality The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag and drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form When selecting files objects text passages and cells rows and columns in tables the modifier keys enhance among other things the selection the functions are explained accord ingly in the descriptions of the individual options Practical Text Input Fields Convenient edit options are available in all text boxes and combo boxes where you can enter text directly You can open a context menu which contains some of the most often used commands Use the shortcut keys Shift Ctrl S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters Use Ctrl A to select the entire text Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection Double click a word to select it A triple click selects the entire line Use Ctrl Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word By using Ctrl and right or left arrow key the cursor will jump from word to word if you also hold down the Shift key one word after the other is selected INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again Drag amp
456. unctions that help you enter and format text Turning Off AutoCorrect Function By default StarOffice Writer corrects many common typing errors However you may not always want this You can undo any automatic correction immediately after it is made for example by pressing Ctrl Z Below we indicate the places in StarOffice where you can turn off automatic corrections and turn them on again Quotation marks are replaced with Custom Quotes 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat 3 Click on the Custom Quotes tab Unmark Replace Sentences always begin with a capital letter 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat 3 Click on the Options tab Unmark Capitalize first letter of every sentence A word is replaced with another word 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat 3 Click on the Replace tab Look for the word pair and delete it 100 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Three identical characters will become a whole line When you enter three of the following characters at the start of anew paragraph and press Return a complete line of various thickness will result _ 1 Open a text document 2 Choose Tools AutoCorrect AutoFormat 3 Go to the Options tab Unmark the Apply border check box if you no longer want this automatic conversion to occur The line is a border of the previous paragraph Choose Format Paragraph
457. vailable that are relevant to the work being currently carried out If the cursor is located in a text then all of those menu commands are available that are needed to edit the text If for example you have selected graphics in a document then you will see all of the menu commands that can be used to edit graphics You now see only the menu entries that can also be started The other inactive menu items are hidden If you choose Tools Options StarOffice View you can mark the Inactive Menu Entries field if you wish to see the inactive menu entries as gray entries In StarOffice you can change and adapt the menu bar the way you like You can also modify many of the toolbars and the status bar Tools Configure see page 401 Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 27 The Toolbars Below the menu bar is the function bar This bar contains icons for several impor tant commands and functions that you can use in StarOffice to open a document or print the current document for example al Immediately above the document is the object bar This offers features that are always appropriate to the current context For example if you select a piece of normal text you will see different icons than if the cursor is posi tioned in a bulleted list or in a text table If the cursor is positioned in a bulleted list within a text table for example you can toggle the object bar with an icon at the far right of the object bar On the left edge of th
458. ved by clicking on the icon Remove Filter Sort a If you want to connect several filter conditions with OR click the Filter Navigation icon on the filter bar The dockable Filter Navigator window appears The filter conditions that are set appear in the Filter Navigator As soon as a filter is set at the bottom of the Filter Navigator you will see a blank filter level which you can select by clicking on the word Or Once you have selected the blank filter level you can enter other filter conditions in the form These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions The context menu can be called for every entry in the Filter Navigator You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text In addition you can also select the filter conditions SQL Is Null or SQL Is not Null if you wish to check if a field has content or not It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu You are able to move the filter conditions within a form in the Filter Navigator by Drag amp Drop or copy them by holding down the Crtl Key While designing your form you can set the Filter proposal property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog These fields allow you in a subsequent search in the filter mode to select in a combo box all the summa rized information contained in such fields The field contents can also be easily selected using the AutoComplete function
459. ver Styles with the same name in subdocuments It is a good idea to base all subdocuments and the master document itself on the same document template If a new Style is needed in the documents now you simply have to add it to the document template and reload the master document Then the new Style can be applied to all documents automatically Use Page Styles if you want all subdocuments to always start on a new page e g always on a new right page We included a Page Style called Right page that you can for example link to the Paragraph Style Header 1 If you assign a page break to the Paragraph Style Header 1 every Header 1 will always be at the top of a right page As the Next Style assigned to the Page Style Right page you now choose Left page and vice versa Paragraph Style Heading 1 Mumbering Tabs Crop Caps Background Borders Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation Automatically dt 2 Ghetacters at line end aL 2 a Bharacters at line begit fo Maximum na OT consecutive hyphens Options M Break f Page Column f Before After with Page Style Right Page Page number fo H Don t separate lines al Keep with next paragraph Orphan control z lines E Widow control 2 lines Cancel Help Reset Standard Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 133 If the cursor is positioned in a text in th
460. want to get rid of color for the current printing process select the option in File Print Options Selecting the Default quality option allows documents to be printed in color again later on Grayscale converts everything to a maximum of 256 gradations from black to white Black amp White converts everything into the two values black and white Printing only text in black and white In StarOffice Writer you can choose to print color formatted text in black and white You can specify this either for all text documents to be printed subse quently or only for a printing process of the current text document Printing all text documents with black and white text 1 Choose Tools Options Text Document or Tools Options HTML Document 2 Then choose Print 3 Under Contents mark Print black and click OK All text documents or HTML documents will from now on be printed with black text 42 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Printing the current text document with black and white text 1 Choose File Print This opens the Print dialog 2 Click the Options button This opens the Printer Options dialog 3 Under Contents mark Print black and click OK The text document or HTML document now being printed will be printed in black text Printing Brochures StarOffice text documents consisting of more than one page can be printed auto matically as a brochure Two pages of a text document will be reduced in size and
461. want to update single click do not double click 4 In the Stylist click on the icon TE Update Style You can also update the Style by using drag and drop 1 Select the Style to be updated in the Stylist 2 Select the section of paragraph text the format of which is to be used to update the Style selected in the Stylist 3 Drag the text into the main Stylist area and release the mouse button when you see the insertion line above an entry The Paragraph Style directly above the insertion line is assigned the new format Copying Styles into Documents You can load the Styles from another document into the current document Load Styles Categories Templates renee Ear gai Cancel i Help Forms and Contracts Miscellaneous Other Business documents Personal Correspondence And Documents T Text E Frame E Pages E Mumbering E Overvrite From File Choose Format Styles Load to select a document Choose whether to apply Text Styles i e Paragraph Styles and Character Styles Frame Styles Page Styles and or Numbering Styles and whether you want to overwrite the Styles in the current document with the new ones In the dialog click the From File button to start a dialog in which you can make a selection like under File New Templates and Documents Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 99 Entering and Formatting Text Automatically This section deals with certain automatic f
462. ways have the option to specify whether you want to print the entire presentation certain slides or only the current selection You can also specify how many copies to print and how these should be sorted Click the Options button in the Print dialog to display additional options When printing text drawing and presentation documents you can choose the Brochure option for multi page text The size of the pages will be reduced and printed two to a page and double sided so that you only need to fold the pile in the middle to create a brochure Since the presentation objects are usually in the form of vector graphics you can print them out in any resolution supported by your printer or film recorder If you want to send a slide to a film recording service or have it printed on a high resolu tion color printer in a printshop mark the Print to file check box in the Print dialog It will then be printed to a file that you can send to a film recording service But first you must install and select on your system the printer driver for the printer or film recorder that will be used by the printing or film recording service Most printing and film recording services require files created for a PostScript printer You can install a PostScript printer driver and print to a file with this driver even if you do not have a PostScript printer Exporting Presentations as Web Pages When you choose the Web Page export file format StarOffice Impress autom
463. well as an overview of fees that are payable as a result of these transactions 4 In the Quantity field change the setting to 100 The total number of shares of Airtrans Inc held in the account is 300 but only 100 shares are to be sold 5 Confirm your entries with OK The profit created by this transaction is added into the Profits Realized column and is recorded in a newly created line on the Movements tab page Stock Split A stock split is the change from for example an old share to two new shares whereby the number of shares usually doubles in a 1 to 2 split and the value gets cut in half The point of this is among other things to make shares at least appear cheaper one share at 150 is more expensive than one share at 75 1 In order to accommodate this action in the overview click the Stock Split button The Stock Split input mask will appear Chapter 4 Creating Spreadsheets With StarOffice Calc 271 2 Fill out the fields Name of Stock Exchange Rate old gt new Exchange Date 3 Confirm with OK In the portfolio overview the row with the split stock will be updated Movements This gives you an overview of all transactions you have initiated for your account This tab contains the following columns Column Header Explanation Name This column displays the name and or ticker symbol for the stock Date Date of the transaction Quantity Shares pur
464. will then be stated on the status bar You can now for example break a polygon down into its basic parts by choosing Break from the Modify menu The status bar will then read 4 Lines selected You can shift each of the lines separately With the polygon selected you can also click the Edit Points icon to modify points insert new ones and so on 340 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Choose Modify Convert To 3D to generate a three dimen sional object by so called extrusion of the two dimensional object The polygon is pulled perpendicular to its plane by a certain amount into the third dimension You can rotate the 3D object and edit it with the help of the 3D Effects window that is called up via the context menu Choose Modify Convert To 3D Rotation Object to create a 3D object by means of a rota tion extrusion A polygon will be rotated 360 degrees around an axis into the third dimension If you rotate the rectangle a little bit before converting it into a 3D rotation object a more striking object will be created Here we converted only basic objects simple rectangles Just imagine how much you can do when you convert complex objects Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 341 For example drag a drawing from the Gallery to the page and convert it into a 3D object StarOffice positions the objects contained in the drawing in various 3D levels corresponding to their arran
465. wing Here we explain how to produce a construction drawing with StarOffice Airplane Engine PX 1362 StarOffice includes a sample document for a construction plan The document Engine is found in the folder Samples Drawings Chapter 6 Creating Drawings With StarOffice Draw 369 Creating a Construction Plan Click the Rectangle icon and drag the floating toolbar into your work area Then select Curves and Lines and Arrows and drag these floating toolbars into your work area as well Choose a tool with which to begin e g Rectangle and use it to drag open an area to represent the first surface Finally draw in the details with the Line tool Using Snap Lines It is advisable to use snap lines to help you position lines and objects more precisely P Snap lines are lines which are visible only on the screen and are used for the sole purpose of precise positioning and alignment You can create an unlimited number of horizontal and vertical snap lines To display a snap line click on a ruler and hold down the mouse button to drag it into your document To move the snap line rest the mouse pointer on it until a double arrow appears Shift the line by holding down the mouse button and drag ging the line to the desired position If you want to delete a snap line simply drag it back onto the ruler In StarOffice Draw you can also position snap lines in a numerically exact way using the Edit Snap Line command in the context menu of
466. wo four or any number of pages beside and on top of each other To print two pages beside one another on one sheet of paper 1 Choose File Page Preview 2 fy You will see the Page Preview with two pages alongside each other If you see more or fewer pages click the icon Page Preview Two Pages on the object bar Click on the Print page view icon Click OK to confirm 4 oe Clicking the Print options page view icon starts a dialog where you can enter settings for reduced printing Printing in Black and White If you have a color printer but only wish to print in black and white you have the following options Printing text and graphics in black and white 1 Choose File Print This opens the Print dialog 2 Click on Properties This opens the properties dialog for your printer 3 Select the option to print in black and white For further information refer to the help for your printer or read your printer manual 4 Confirm the Properties dialog and click OK in the Print dialog The current document will be printed in black and white Chapter 2 Working With StarOffice 41 Printing in black and white in StarOffice Impress and StarOffice Draw 1 Choose Tools Options Presentation or Tools Options Drawing as appropriate 2 Then choose Print 3 Under Quality select either Grayscale or Black amp white and click OK From now on all presentations or drawings will be printed without color If you only
467. wo linked frames He heard quiet steps behind him That didn t bode weil Who could be llow Ing him this late at night and in this deadbeat part of town And at this Particular moment just afer he pulied wrists He nervously looked al around Suddenly he saw the alley Like lightening he darted off to the ieft and disappeared between the two warehouses almost foiling over the and mark the margins and columns and then pencil in your document You can erase as often as you wish and can experiment with the posi Honing of text and graphics You should try to create attention grab bing layouts Break up your texts moth oaranhices and charte nhatar Adje bP 4 Creating a Newsletter From a Template In the File menu choose New Templates and Documents On the left double click Miscellaneous Double click to open the Newspaper Template In a dialog you can now select the type of newspaper or newsletter you want to create Depending on the type some variables will be differently predefined e g for the Headline The document contains several elements that you could make good use of in your newsletter It contains for example an automatic page numbering system and a field with the fixed date You can now enter text and position graphic objects Chapter 3 Creating Text Documents With StarOffice Writer 183 Click the headline This text is an input field You can modify the existing heading in a dialog A few other
468. y of an object is independent of the original object Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy A link remains dependent on the original object Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link Inserting an object as a copy 1 A KP Open the Gallery Select a theme in the left area Select the object by a single click Drag the object into the document or right click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy A 30 Effects EA Animations BA Arrows BA Backgrounds BA Computers BA Emoticons BA Finances EA Flags 388 StarOffice 6 0 User s Guide March 2002 Inserting an object as a link 1 A WO N Open the Gallery Select a theme in the left area Select the object by a single click Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and Ctrl keys or right click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link Inserting an object as a background graphic 1 Pe oe Open the Gallery Select a theme in the left area Select the object by a single click Open the context menu and choose Insert Background Page or Paragraph Inserting an object as a texture pattern for another object 1 ee AS Open the Gallery Select a theme in the left area Select the object by a single click Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing Ctrl Chapter 7 Advanced Tips for Working With S
469. y or verti cally in the selected direction Ctrl drag with the mouse and activated Copy while moving option While the selected object is being moved a copy is gener ated Alt While creating objects or changing their size after pressing Alt key the object will be centricly constructed Alt mouse click on object Selection of overlapping objects The object behind the currently selected object will be selected Alt Shift click the object Selection of overlapping objects The object in front of the currently selected object will be selected Shift key while selecting The object will be added to the selection if it has not yet been selected or will be removed from the selection if it has already been selected Shift key during zoom The size of the object is increased in proportion to the in create original shape A straight line can only be changed along its direction Tab Individual objects will be selected in the order in which they were created from first to last Shift Tab Selecting objects in the order of creation from last to first object Shift drag with the mouse in Edit Point mode Allows you to change the length of a dimension line Esc Switches to selection mode if a creation tool is active Turns the selection off if an object is selected Turns text entry mode off for an object in text entry mode The object remains selected Chapter 8 Appendix 439

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Mivar Ralex Fono user manual  manual de instruções furadeira pneumática reta: tfp3/8p tfp1/2p  Massage Chair Massage Chair  EPSON TM-T88V  Aqua SnakeEye™ OA-09 Extended Life NiMH Battery Operators  vegapuls 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, sr68, 69    Samsung 275T Užívateľská príručka  EverFocus NVR-208 4TB  IFP-45S IFP-45A  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file